You are on page 1of 571

Global Customer Documentation

DIMETRATM
System Documentation

Dimetra IP

MTS /L7(0762 and MTS 4


Installation, Configuration
and Basic Service Manual

-DQXDU\ 201
When printed by Motorola
6802800U74-7
Copyrights
The Motorola products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs. Laws in the United States and other countries
preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in
the Motorola products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola.
© 2011 Motorola Solutions Inc. All Rights Reserved
No part of this document may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by
any means, without the prior written permission of Motorola Solutions, Inc.
Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the
copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal nonexclusive, royalty-free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale
of a product.
Disclaimer
Please note that certain features, facilities, and capabilities described in this document may not be applicable to or licensed for use on a particular system, or
may be dependent upon the characteristics of a particular mobile subscriber unit or configuration of certain parameters. Please refer to your Motorola contact
for further information.
Trademarks
MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC
and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

European Union (EU) Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive

The European Union’s WEEE directive requires that products sold into EU countries must have the crossed out trashbin label on the product (or the package
in some cases).
As defined by the WEEE directive, this cross-out trashbin label means that customers and end-users in EU countries should not dispose of electronic and
electrical equipment or accessories in household waste.
Customers or end-users in EU countries should contact their local equipment supplier representative or service centre for information about the waste collection
system in their country.
CMM labeling and disclosure table

The People’s Republic of China requires that Motorola’s products comply with
China Management Methods (CMM) environmental regulations. (China
Management Methods refers to the regulation Management Methods for
Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products.) Two items are used to
demonstrate compliance; the label and the disclosure table.
The label is placed in a customer visible position on the product.
• Logo 1 means that the product contains no substances in excess of the
maximum concentration value for materials identified in the China
Management Methods regulation.
• Logo 2 means that the product may contain substances in excess of the
maximum concentration value for materials identified in the China
Management Methods regulation, and has an Environmental Friendly
Use Period (EFUP) in years, fifty years in the example shown.

Logo 1 Logo 2

The Environmental Friendly Use Period (EFUP) is the period (in years) during
which the Toxic and Hazardous Substances (T&HS) contained in the Electronic
Information Product (EIP) will not leak or mutate causing environmental pollution
or bodily injury from the use of the EIP. The EFUP indicated by the Logo 2 label
applies to a product and all its parts. Certain field-replaceable parts, such as
battery modules, can have a different EFUP and are marked separately.
The Disclosure Table is intended only to communicate compliance with China
requirements; it is not intended to communicate compliance with EU RoHS or any
other environmental requirements.

© 2011 Motorola Solutions, Inc.


This page intentionally left blank.
Service Information
EMEA Systems Support Centre (ESSC)
The EMEA Systems Support Centre provides a remote Technical Support Service to help customers resolve
technical issues and quickly restore networks and systems. This team of highly skilled professionals is available
to customers with current service agreements in place that include the Technical Support Service. The ESSC
technical experts may be accessed through the EMEA Integrated Call Center either electronically or using the
telephone numbers listed below. If you are unsure as to whether or not your current service agreement entitles
you to benefit from this service, or if you would like more information about the Technical Support Service,
please contact your local customer support or account manager for further information.
Contact details:are:
Email: ESSC@motorolasolutions.com

List of Telephone numbers:


Country In Country Number to Dial
AUSTRIA 01206091087
DENMARK 043682114
FRANCE 0157323434
GERMANY 06950070204
ITALY 0291483230
LITHUANIA 880 030 828
NETHERLANDS 0202061404
NORWAY 24159815
PORTUGAL 0217616160
810 800 228 41044
RUSSIA
(Alternative 810 800 120 1011)
SAUDI ARABIA 800 844 5345
SOUTH AFRICA 0800981900
SPAIN 0912754787
UNITED KINGDOM 02030 277499
All Other Countries +44 2030 277499

European Systems Component Centre (ESCC)


The European Systems Component Centre provides a repair service for infrastructure equipment. Customers
requiring repair service should contact the Customer Information Desk to obtain a Return Material Authorisation
number. The equipment should then be shipped to the following address unless advised otherwise.

Motorola GmbH, European Systems Component Centre, Am Borsigturm 130,13507 Berlin, Germany
Contact details:
E-Mail: ESCC.admin@motorolasolutions.com
Telephone: +49 (0) 30 66861555
Telefax: +49 (0) 30 66861426
Monday - Friday 08:00 am to 06:00 pm (CET)

Parts Identification and Ordering


Request for help in identification of non-referenced spare parts should be directed to the Customer Care
Organization of Motorola’s local area representation. Orders for replacement parts, kits and assemblies should
be placed directly on Motorola’s local distribution organization or via the Extranet site Motorola Online at
https://emeaonline.motorola.com.
EMEA Test Equipment Support
Information related to support and service of Motorola Test Equipment is available by calling the Motorola Test
Equipment Service Group in Germany at +49 (0) 6128 702179, Telefax +49 (0) 6128 951046, through the
Customer Care Organization of Motorola’s local area representation, or via the Internet at
http://www.gd-decisionsystems.com/cte/.

Your Input
...is much appreciated. If you have any comments, corrections, suggestions or ideas for this publication or any
other requirements regarding Motorola publications, please send an e-mail to
doc.emea@motorolasolutions.com.

Updated Versions of this Manual


......are available at our Extranet site Motorola Online. Contact us at doc.emea@motorolasolutions.com for
access.
Document
History

Document History
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Edition Description Date


6802800U74–A Initial Edition July 2006
6802800U74–B Minor changes Aug. 2006
6802800U74–C Table 4–4 updated Aug. 2006
Table 4–5 updated and note inserted
Table 5–6 updated
6802800U74–D Service Cable and Connector Box Description section updated Oct. 2006
6802800U74–E Updates throughout the manual Feb. 2007
6802800U74–F Expansion Cabinet updates throughout the manual, and Aug. 2007
addition of Expansion Options chapter.
6802800U74–G 800 MHz updates throughout the manual. Nov. 2007
6802800U74–H BTS Q108 SPU updates, including the addition of redundant Mar. 2008
power connector on the Site Controller.
6802800U74–J • Regulatory CE Labelling Compliance updated June 2008
• Chapter 16, "MTS 4 Outdoor Enclosure" added
• Added info about Base Radio dekey when Standby SC
is powered on.
• Added info about frequencies in receiver band that can
cause high bit error rate to occur
• Updated FRU number for RX Splitter
6802800U74–K • Updated MTS site link configuration info in Table 8–9 Dec. 2008
• Updated RF cabling/Connections for MTS 4 with two
TX/RX antennas and up to one additional RX antenna
(Table 5–13 and Figure 5–12)
• Revision to FRU numbers for MTS fan and Hybrid
Combiner
• Other minor updates
6802800U74–L • Updated manual with TEDS compatibility. Apr. 2009
• Updates to the Power Supply Unit (PSU) DC Input
Power.
• Other minor updates throughout the manual.

6802800U74-T January 2011 i


Document History

Edition Description Date


6802800U74–M • Ethernet Site Link Cabling hardware installation June 2009
information added.
• Ethernet Site Link cabling and interconnection added.
• Configuring Ethernet Site Link added.
6802800U74–N • Ethernet Site Link Retro-fit kit and configurations added. Sep. 2009
• Added section MTS LVD Kit Installation to Hardware
Installation chapter.
6802800U74–P Updated the following sections: July 2010
• 260 MHz additions throughout the manual.
• Updated information on LVD Kit Installation
• Updated MTS 4 Duplexer FB diagram
• Updated procedure How to configure E1 links
• other minor updates
6802800U74–R Added non-duplexed MTS 2 configurations Sep. 2010
6802800U74–T Added MTS LiTE Dec.2010

ii 6802800U74-T January 2011


Table
of
Contents

Contents
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual
Icon Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -xxviii
Regulatory CE Marking Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -xxx

Chapter 1: MTS Overview


MTS Platform. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
MTS LiTE Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
MTS 2 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
MTS 4 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Expansion Cabinet Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
MTS Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
RF Distribution System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Preselector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Post Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Cavity Combiners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Hybrid Combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Rx Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Site Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
XHUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Base Radio (BR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Cooling Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Chapter 2: General Safety


General Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Mains Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Battery Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Chapter 3: Site Preparation


Site Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Site Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Site Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Cabinets Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
MTS LiTE Cabinet Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

6802800U74-T January 2011 iii


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual

MTS 2 Cabinet Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6


MTS 4 Cabinet Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Expansion Cabinet Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Antenna Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
RF Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
GPS Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Surge Arrestors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Ethernet/X.21/E1 Network Interface Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Special Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Electrical Service Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Hazardous Materials and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Seismic Active Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Environmental Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Corrosive Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Air Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Applicable Codes and Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
AC and DC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Service Current Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
AC and DC Current Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Surge Arrestors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Power Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
User Alarms, Control Outputs, and Door Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Grounding Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Chapter 4: Hardware Installation


Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Personnel Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Receipt of Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Pre-Installation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Cabinet Transportation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Moving the MTS LiTE and MTS 2 Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Lifting the MTS 4 and Expansion Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Cabinet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Cabinet Bracing Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Floor Mounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Mounting Plate Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Mounting a Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Securing Cabinet to a Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Wall Fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Electrical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Grounding Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Battery System Grounding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Ground Connections Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Power Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
–48 VDC Input Power and Backup Battery Charging Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
110 VAC – 240 VAC Input Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Backup Battery Sensor Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
MTS LVD Kit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
RF Antenna Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

iv 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Contents

Expansion Cabinet Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41


TX Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Connections Between Site Controller and XHUB Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Connecting Power to the XHUB Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
CAN Bus Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
RX Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
GPS Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Site Reference Operation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Tracking Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
GPS Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Initial Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Warm Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Soft Restart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Remote GPS Antenna/Receiver Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Remote GPS Receiver Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Remote GPS Receiver Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
GPS Antenna Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
GPS Antenna Line Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Avoiding GPS Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
X.21, E1-120Ω Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Ethernet Site Link Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Ethernet Site Link Retrofit Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Using Ethernet Site Link Retrofit Kit for MTS 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Using Ethernet Site Link Retrofit Kit for MTS 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Using Ethernet Site Link Retrofit Kit for MTS 4 Prime and Expansion Cabinet . . . . . . . . 4-64
External Alarm Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Final Check-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Final Check-out Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Expansion Cabinet Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Recommended Tools, Parts, and Test Equipment for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Recommended Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Recommended Test Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Recommended Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Recommended Torque. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling


AC/DC Power Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
E1 and Ethernet Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Ethernet Site Link Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
RF Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
CAN Bus Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
MTS LiTE CAN Bus Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
MTS 2 CAN Bus Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
MTS 4 CAN Bus Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
Expansion Cabinet CAN Bus Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73

Chapter 6: Configuration and Testing


Setup and Testing Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
MMI Commands and MTS Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Service Cable and Connector Box Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

6802800U74-T January 2011 v


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual

Service Terminal Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7


CAN Bus Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
PSU CAN Bus Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Fans CAN Bus Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
DPM CAN Bus Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
ATCC CAN Bus Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Other CAN Bus Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Site Controller Configuration and Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Site Controller Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
E1 Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
X.21 Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Site Reference Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Base Radio Configuration and Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Base Radio Startup Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Selecting Base Radio Position and Receivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Setting and Accessing Base Radio Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Setting and Accessing Base Radio Position Using Test Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Setting and Accessing Base Radio Position Using Boot1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Setting Base Radio IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Base Radio Receiver Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Configuring the pm_config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Station Verification Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Base Radio Software Revision Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Base Radio Test Application Software Upgrade (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Transmitter Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Receiver Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Displaying Base Radio Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Viewing the Transmit Spectrum (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Synchronizing Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32

Chapter 7: Radio Frequency Distribution System


RFDS Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
CAN Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
RFDS Frequency Band and Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
MTS LiTE and MTS 2 RFDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
MTS LiTE and MTS 2 Filter Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
MTS LiTE / MTS 2 Preselector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
FRU Replacement Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
MTS LiTE / MTS 2 Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
FRU Replacement Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Hybrid Combiner in MTS 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
FRU Replacement Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
MTS 4 RFDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
MTS 4 Filter Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
MTS 4 Preselector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
FRU Replacement Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
MTS 4 Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
FRU Replacement Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Hybrid Combiner in MTS 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Post Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
FRU Replacement Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Cavity Combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Cavity Combiner - Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Cavity Combiner - FRU Replacement Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

vi 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Contents

Expansion Cabinet RFDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37


RX Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
FRU Replacement Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Cavity Combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

Chapter 8: Site Controller


Site Controller - Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Site Controller - Indicators, Switches, and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Site Controller - Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Site Controller - Front Panel Indicators (LED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Site Controller - Front Panel Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Site Controller - Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Site Controller - Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Site Controller - Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Site Controller - CAN Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Site Controller - Updating CAN Bus TrackID Mapping List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Site Controller - GPS Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Checking and Replacing Site Controller Lithium Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
MTS - Restoration Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
MTS – Replacing Site Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
MTS - Configuration Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
MTS - Replacing Site Controller FRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
MTS - Restoring the Site Controller Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
MTS - Configuring E1 Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
MTS - Configuring Ethernet Site Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
MTS - Configuring CAN Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
MTS - Configuring Cooling Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
MTS - Loading Ki's Into MTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
MTS - Refreshing Ki's for the MTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
MTS - Connecting KVL to the AuC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
MTS - Downloading Ki's from the AuC to KVL (Locally) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
MTS - Downloading Ki's from the AuC to KVL (Remotely Using GSM) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
MTS - Checking the Inventory in KVL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
MTS - Downloading Ki's from KVL to the Site Controller/BRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
MTS - Uploading the Site Receipts (Locally) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
MTS - Uploading the Site Receipts (Remotely using GSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
MTS - Site Controller Post-Restoration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
MTS - Site Controller Post - Restoration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Adding Redundant Site Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
List of Equipment in the Expansion Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
How to Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Configuring Redundant Site Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
MTS – Site Controller Software Version Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
Verifying Test Application Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
Upgrading Test Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53

Chapter 9: XHUB Controller


XHUB Controller – Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
XHUB Controller – Indicators, Switches, and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
XHUB Controller – Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
XHUB Controller – Front Panel Indicators (LED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
XHUB Controller – Front Panel Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
XHUB Controller – Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
XHUB Controller – Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

6802800U74-T January 2011 vii


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual

XHUB Controller – Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6


MTS - Replacing XHUB Controller FRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Chapter 10: Base Radio


Base Radio - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Base Radio - Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Transceiver (XCVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Base Radio - Indicators and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Base Radio Replacement Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Electrostatic Discharge Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Base Radio - Restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

Chapter 11: Power Supply Unit


Power Supply Unit (PSU) - Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
PSU - CAN Bus Monitoring, Alarms, and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Backup Battery Charging Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Power Supply Unit (PSU) - Indicators, Switches, and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
PSU Indicators (LEDs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
PSU Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
PSU Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Power Supply Unit (PSU) - FRU Replacement Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
PSU Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
PSU Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
PSU TrackID Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

Chapter 12: Cooling Fans


Cooling Fans Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Cooling Fans Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
PSU Fan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Alarms and Controls Available Through PSU CAN Bus Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Airflow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Cooling Fans FRU Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8

Chapter 13: MTS Troubleshooting


Site Controller Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Site Controller Fault Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
LED Fault Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Troubleshooting Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Troubleshooting: Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Troubleshooting: status sc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Troubleshooting: SC Config File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Troubleshooting: status bts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Troubleshooting: BRC Config Files and Code File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Troubleshooting: General Check of a Site Controller File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
MMI Fault Indications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Troubleshooting: GPS and Site Reference Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
GPS Receiver Detailed Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Troubleshooting Site Link Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

viii 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Contents

Other Site Controller Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21


Base Radio / RFDS / Miscellaneous Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
Base Radio Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
Troubleshooting Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
Base Radio Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
Recommended Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42
Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42
Routine Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42
Reported/Suspected Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-44
Base Radio Fault Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-45
Miscellaneous Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-47

Chapter 14: Technical Specifications


Environmental and Standards Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Standards Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Cabinet and Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Dimensions of the MTS Cabinets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
RF Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Site Controller Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Internal GPS Module Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
MTS LiTE / MTS 2 Duplexer Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
MTS LiTE / MTS 2 Preselector Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
MTS 4 Duplexer Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
MTS 4 Post Filter Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
MTS 4 Preselector Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Auto Tune Cavity Combiner (ATCC) Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Manual Tune Cavity Combiner (MTCC) Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Hybrid Combiner Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Base Radio Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Power Supply Unit Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
XHUB Controller Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
RX Splitter Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Connectors Used in MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16

Chapter 15: Expansion Options


Adding Additional Base Radio to MTS 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
List of Equipment in the Expansion Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
How to Install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
Adding Additional Module Cage to MTS 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
List of Equipment in the Expansion Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
How to Install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14
Adding Additional Base Radio into Existing Module Cage for MTS 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15
List of Equipment in the Expansion Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15
How to Install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-25
Adding Redundant Site Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26
List of Equipment in the Expansion Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-27
How to Install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-27
Configuring Redundant Site Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-30

6802800U74-T January 2011 ix


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual

Expanding to 4 Channel Cavity Combiner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-34


List of Equipment in the Expansion Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-34
Auto Tuned Cavity Combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-34
Manual Tuned Cavity Combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-35
How to Install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-35
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-38
Expanding Hybrid Combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-39
List of Equipment in the Expansion Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-39
How to Install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-39
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-39
Expanding from MTS 2 to MTS 4 Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-40
List of Equipment in the Expansion Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-40
How to Install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-40
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-43
Adding Redundant XHUB Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-44
List of Equipment in the Expansion Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-44
How to Install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-45
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-45

Chapter 16: MTS 4 Outdoor Enclosure


Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

Appendix A: Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)


Field Replaceable Units for MTS LiTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Field Replaceable Units for MTS 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Field Replaceable Units for MTS 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Surge Arrestors and Suppliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
AC Power and E1/X.21 Interface Surge Arrestors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Antenna Surge Arrestors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Lightning Arrestors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13

Appendix B: Planned Maintenance Inspection (PMI)

Appendix C: Static Precautions and ESD Strap


Static Sensitive Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
ESD Wrist Strap Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

Appendix D: TETRA/Dimetra Acronyms

x 6802800U74-T January 2011


List
of
Figures

List of Figures
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Figure 1-1: MTS LiTE Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4


Figure 1-2: MTS 2 Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Figure 1-3: MTS 4 Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Figure 1-4: MTS Expansion Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Figure 3-1: MTS LiTE Cabinet Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Figure 3-2: Suggested MTS LiTE Site Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Figure 3-3: MTS 2 Cabinet Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Figure 3-4: Suggested MTS 2 Site Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Figure 3-5: MTS 4 Cabinet Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Figure 3-6: Suggested MTS 4 Site Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Figure 3-7: Expansion Cabinet Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Figure 3-8: Suggested Expansion Cabinet Site Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Figure 3-9: Opto-isolated Alarm Input Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Figure 4-1: Lifting Point for MTS 4 and Expansion Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Figure 4-2: Placing the MTS 4 and the Expansion Cabinet in the Vertical or Horizontal Position . . . . 4-7
Figure 4-3: MTS – Mounting Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Figure 4-4: MTS LiTE / MTS 2 – Drill Hole Position for the Mounting Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Figure 4-5: MTS 4 and Expansion Cabinet – Drill Hole Position for the Mounting Brackets . . . . . . 4-10
Figure 4-6: MTS – Mounting Brackets and the Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Figure 4-7: MTS Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Figure 4-8: MTS LiTE/MTS 2 – Drill Hole Position for the Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Figure 4-9: MTS 4 – Drill Hole Position for the Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Figure 4-10: Position of Security Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Figure 4-11: MTS – Wall Fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Figure 4-12: Station Ground Point on the MTS LiTE Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Figure 4-13: Station Ground Point on the MTS 2 Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Figure 4-14: Station Ground Point on the MTS 4 Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Figure 4-15: Station Ground Point on the Expansion Cabinet Junction Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Figure 4-16: Cabinet Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Figure 4-17: –48 VDC Connection on the MTS LiTE Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Figure 4-18: –48 VDC Connection on the MTS 2 Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Figure 4-19: -48 VDC Connections on the MTS 4 Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Figure 4-20: -48 VDC Connections on the Expansion Cabinet Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Figure 4-21: DC Plug MTS LiTE/MTS 2 (Motorola P/N 3166501A01) – Blue/Black Wires . . . . . . 4-25
Figure 4-22: DC Plug MTS LiTE/MTS 2 (Motorola P/N 3166501A01) – Red/Black Wires . . . . . . . 4-25
Figure 4-23: DC Plug MTS 4 (Motorola P/N 3166501A02) – Blue/Black Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Figure 4-24: DC Plug MTS 4 (Motorola P/N 3166501A02) – Red/Black Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Figure 4-25: 110-240 VAC Connection on the MTS LiTE Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Figure 4-26: 110-240 VAC Connection on the MTS 2 Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Figure 4-27: 110 – 240 VAC Connections on the MTS 4 Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Figure 4-28: 110-240 VAC Connections on the Expansion Cabinet Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Figure 4-29: AC Socket (IEC Connector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

6802800U74-T January 2011 xi


List of Figures

Figure 4-30: Backup Battery Sensor Connection on MTS LiTE Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Figure 4-31: Backup Battery Sensor Connection on MTS 2 Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Figure 4-32: Backup Battery Sensor Connections on MTS 4 Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Figure 4-33: Backup Battery Sensor Connections on Expansion Cabinet Junction Panel . . . . . . . . 4-32
Figure 4-34: Backup Battery Temperature Sensor Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Figure 4-35: MTS LVD Kit Relay Connection Diagram – Single PSU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Figure 4-36: MTS LVD Kit Relay Connection Diagram – Dual PSU, Dual Batteries . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Figure 4-37: MTS LVD Kit Relay Connection Diagram – Dual PSU, Single Battery . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Figure 4-38: MTS LVD Kit Battery Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Figure 4-39: MTS LVD Kit Plus and Minus Signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Figure 4-40: MTS LVD Kit Backplate Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Figure 4-41: Mounting the MTS LVD Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Figure 4-42: Base Radio Antenna Connections – MTS LiTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Figure 4-43: Base Radio Antenna Connections – MTS 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Figure 4-44: Base Radio Antenna Connections – MTS 2 Non Duplexed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Figure 4-45: Base Radio Antenna Connections – MTS 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Figure 4-46: Connection Between MTS 4 Prime Cabinet and MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet – Phasing
Harness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Figure 4-47: Connections Between MTS 4 Prime Cabinet and MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet – Two
Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Figure 4-48: Connections Between Site Controller and XHUB Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Figure 4-49: Power Connection to the XHUB Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Figure 4-50: RX Connection Between MTS 4 Prime Cabinet and MTS4 Expansion Cabinet . . . . . . 4-45
Figure 4-51: Holes in Top Lid for Rx Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Figure 4-52: Remote GPS Receiver Connection on MTS LiTE Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Figure 4-53: Remote GPS Receiver Connection on MTS 2 Junction Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Figure 4-54: Remote GPS Receiver Connection on MTS 4 Junction Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Figure 4-55: Connector Pin-outs and Color code of Deutsch Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Figure 4-56: RGPS Modular Data Surge Protector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Figure 4-57: RGPS Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Figure 4-58: GPS Antenna Connection on MTS LiTE Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Figure 4-59: GPS Antenna Connection on MTS 2 Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Figure 4-60: GPS Antenna Connection on MTS 4 Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Figure 4-61: E1/X.21 and Ethernet Site Link Connectors on the MTS LiTE Junction Panel . . . . . . . 4-57
Figure 4-62: E1/X.21 and Ethernet Site Link Connectors on the MTS 2 Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Figure 4-63: E1/X.21 and Ethernet Site Link Connectors on the MTS 4 Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Figure 4-64: Site Link Connector E1 Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Figure 4-65: Site Link Connector X.21 Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Figure 4-66: Alarm Wiring Connection on MTS LiTE Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Figure 4-67: Alarm Wiring Connection on MTS 2 Junction Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Figure 4-68: Alarm Wiring Connection on MTS 4 Junction Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Figure 4-69: External Alarm Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Figure 4-70: MTS LiTE Screws Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Figure 4-71: MTS 2 Screws Positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Figure 4-72: MTS 4 Screws Positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Figure 4-73: Expansion Cabinet Screw Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Figure 5-1: AC/DC Power Cabling Diagram for MTS LiTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Figure 5-2: AC/DC Power Cabling Diagram for MTS 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Figure 5-3: AC/DC Power Cabling Diagram for MTS 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Figure 5-4: AC/DC Power Cabling Diagram for Expansion Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Figure 5-5: User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS Cabling Diagram for MTS LiTE. . . . . . . 5-9
Figure 5-6: User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS Cabling Diagram for MTS 2. . . . . . . . . 5-11
Figure 5-7: User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS and GPS Cabling Diagram for MTS 4 . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Figure 5-8: E1 and Ethernet Cabling Diagram for MTS LiTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Figure 5-9: E1 and Ethernet Cabling Diagram for MTS 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

xii 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual List of Figures

Figure 5-10: E1 and Ethernet Cabling Diagram for MTS 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17


Figure 5-11: E1 and Ethernet Cabling for MTS 4 with Expansion Cabinet (to the Right) . . . . . . . . 5-19
Figure 5-12: Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS LiTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Figure 5-13: Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Figure 5-14: Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 4 with Single Site Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Figure 5-15: Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 4 with Dual Site Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Figure 5-16: Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet with Single Site Controller . . . 5-28
Figure 5-17: Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet with Dual Site Controller . . . . 5-30
Figure 5-18: RF Cabling/Connections for MTS LiTE with One TX and One RX ant. No Diversity . . . 5-32
Figure 5-19: RF Cabling/Connections for MTS LiTE with One TX/RX ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Figure 5-20: RF Cabling/Connections for MTS LiTE with One TX/RX ant. and One Additional RX
ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Figure 5-21: RF Cabling Diagram for MTS 2 with No Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Figure 5-22: RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 2 with One TX ant. and up to Two Additional RX
ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Figure 5-23: RF Cabling Diagram for MTS 2 with One TX/RX ant. and Up to Two Additional RX
ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Figure 5-24: RF Cabling Diagram for MTS 2 with Two TX/RX ant. and Up to One Additional RX ant.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Figure 5-25: RF Cabling Diagram for MTS 4 with No Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Figure 5-26: RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 4 with one TX/RX ant. and Up to Two Additional RX ant.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Figure 5-27: RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 4 with Two TX/RX ant. and Up to One Additional RX
ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Figure 5-28: RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 4 with One TX ant. and Up to Three Additional RX
ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Figure 5-29: RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 4 with Two TX ant. and Up to Three Additional RX
ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Figure 5-30: Holes in Top Lid for Rx Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Figure 5-31: RF Cabling/Connections for Expansion Cabinet with One TX/RX ant. and Up to Two Additional
RX ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Figure 5-32: RF Cabling/Connections for Expansion Cabinet with Two TX/RX ant. and Up to One Additional
RX ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Figure 5-33: RF Cabling/Connections for Expansion Cabinet with One TX ant. and Up to Three Additional
RX ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Figure 5-34: RF Cabling/Connections for Expansion Cabinet with Two TX ant. and up to Three Additional
RX ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Figure 5-35: CAN Bus Cabling Diagram for MTS LiTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Figure 5-36: CAN Bus Cabling Diagram for MTS 2 with TX/RX on 1 ant. RX on 2 ant. . . . . . . . . 5-67
Figure 5-37: CAN Bus Cabling Diagram for MTS 2 with TX/RX on 2 ant. RX on 1ant. . . . . . . . . 5-68
Figure 5-38: CAN Bus Cabling Diagram for MTS 4 with TX/RX or TX on 1 ant. . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Figure 5-39: CAN Bus Cabling Diagram for MTS 4 with TX/RX or TX on 2 ant. with ATCCs . . . . . 5-72
Figure 5-40: CAN Bus Cabling Diagram for MTS4 and Expansion Cabinet with ATCCs . . . . . . . . 5-74
Figure 5-41: CAN Bus Cabling Diagram for MTS4 and Expansion Cabinet with MTCCs and Redundant Site
Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Figure 6-1: Basic Service Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Figure 6-2: Service Connector Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Figure 6-3: Service Connector Box Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Figure 6-4: BRC Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Figure 6-5: Base Radios Cabinet Positions and Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Figure 6-6: Spectrum Analyzer Display of Transmitted Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Figure 7-1: MTS LiTE TX/RX on 1 ant. - Filter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Figure 7-2: MTS LiTE TX/RX on 1 ant., RX on 1 ant - Filter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Figure 7-3: MTS 2 TX/RX on 2 ant. - Filter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Figure 7-4: MTS 2 TX/RX on 2 ant., RX on 1 ant - Filter Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

6802800U74-T January 2011 xiii


List of Figures

Figure 7-5: MTS 2 TX/RX on 1 ant., RX on 1 ant - Filter Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6


Figure 7-6: MTS 2 TX/RX on 1 ant., RX on 2 ant - Filter Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Figure 7-7: MTS LiTE / MTS 2 Preselector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Figure 7-8: Schematic Diagram of MTS LiTE / MTS 2 Preselector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Figure 7-9: MTS 2 Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Figure 7-10: Schematic Diagram of MTS LiTE / MTS 2 Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Figure 7-11: Hybrid Combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Figure 7-12: MTS 4 TX/RX on 2 ant. - Filter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Figure 7-13: MTS 4 TX/RX on 2 ant., RX on 1 ant. - Filter Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Figure 7-14: MTS 4 TX on 2 ant., RX on 2 ant. - Filter Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Figure 7-15: MTS 4 TX on 2 ant., RX on 3 ant. - Filter Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Figure 7-16: MTS 4 TX/RX on 1 ant., RX on 1 ant. - Filter Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Figure 7-17: MTS 4 TX/RX on 1 ant., RX on 2 ant. - Filter Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Figure 7-18: MTS 4 TX on 1 ant., RX on 2 ant. - Filter Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Figure 7-19: MTS 4 TX on 1 ant., RX on 3 ant. - Filter Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Figure 7-20: MTS 4 Preselector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Figure 7-21: Schematic Diagram of MTS 4 Preselector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Figure 7-22: MTS 4 Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Figure 7-23: Schematic Diagram of MTS 4 Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Figure 7-24: Post Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Figure 7-25: Schematic Diagram of Post Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Figure 7-26: Auto Tune Cavity Combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Figure 7-27: Expansion Cabinet with Single Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Figure 7-28: Expansion Cabinet with Dual Diversity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Figure 7-29: Expansion Cabinet with Triple Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Figure 7-30: Expansion Cabinet RX Splitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Figure 7-31: Schematic Diagram of RX Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Figure 8-1: Site Controller - Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Figure 8-2: Site Controller - Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Figure 8-3: Site Controller - Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Figure 8-4: Site Controller - Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Figure 8-5: Site Controller - Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Figure 8-6: Site Controller - CAN Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Figure 8-7: Site Controller - Captive Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Figure 8-8: Site Controller - Lithium Battery Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Figure 8-9: Site Controller - Captive Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Figure 9-1: XHUB Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Figure 9-2: XHUB Controller – Functional Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Figure 10-1: Base Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Figure 10-2: Base Radio Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Figure 10-3: Base Radio – Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Figure 10-4: Low-power PA Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Figure 10-5: High-power PA Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Figure 11-1: Power Supply Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Figure 11-2: PSU Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Figure 12-1: MTS Fan kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Figure 12-2: MTS LiTE Airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Figure 12-3: MTS 2 Airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Figure 12-4: MTS 4 Airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Figure 13-1: Site Controller LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Figure 13-2: Troubleshooting Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Figure 13-3: Procedure 1 Troubleshooting Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-43
Figure 13-4: Procedure 2 Troubleshooting Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-44
Figure 13-5: Base Radio LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-45

xiv 6802800U74-T January 2011


List of Figures

Figure 15-1: RF Cabling Diagram for MTS 2 with one TX/RX ant. and up to two additional RX ant. before
Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Figure 15-2: E1 and Ethernet Cabling Diagram for MTS 2 before Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Figure 15-3: RF Cabling Diagram for MTS 2 with one TX/RX ant. and up to two RX ant. after
Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
Figure 15-4: E1 and Ethernet Cabling Diagram for MTS 2 after Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
Figure 15-5: RF Cabling of MTS 4 with one TX ant. before Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
Figure 15-6: RF Cabling of MTS 4 with twoTX ant. before Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18
Figure 15-7: E1 and Ethernet Connections of MTS 4 Before Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19
Figure 15-8: TX Connectors on Cavity Combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21
Figure 15-9: RF Cabling Diagram of MTS 4 with one TX ant. after Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22
Figure 15-10: RF Cabling Diagram of MTS 4 with two TX ant. after Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23
Figure 15-11: E1 and Ethernet Cabling of MTS 4 after Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-24
Figure 15-12: Site Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26
Figure 15-13: Example of an Auto Tuned Cavity Combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-34
Figure 15-14: ATCC Cabling Diagram for MTS 4 with 1 TX ant. before Expansion . . . . . . . . . 15-36
Figure 15-15: ATCC Cabling Diagram for MTS 4 with 1 TX ant. after Expansion . . . . . . . . . . 15-38
Figure 15-16: M4 Screw Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-41
Figure 15-17: M3 Screw position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-42
Figure A-1: Position of Modules in MTS LiTE Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Figure A-2: Position of Modules in MTS 2 Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Figure A-3: Position of Modules in MTS 4 cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Figure A-4: Position of Modules in Expansion Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Figure C-1: MTS LiTE - Connecting the ESD Strap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Figure C-2: MTS 2 / MTS 4 - Connecting the ESD Strap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4

6802800U74-T January 2011 xv


List of Figures

This page intentionally left blank.

xvi 6802800U74-T January 2011


List
of
Tables

List of Tables
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Table -1: Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -xxviii


Table 3-1: MTS LiTE Equipment Cabinet Weight and Floor Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Table 3-2: MTS 2 Equipment Cabinet Weight and Floor Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Table 3-3: MTS 4 Equipment Cabinet Weight and Floor Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Table 3-4: Expansion Cabinet Weight and Floor Loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Table 3-5: Typical Power Loads and Heat Dissipation Values - MTS 400 MHz Configurations . . . . . 3-21
Table 3-6: Typical Power Loads and Heat Dissipation Values - Expansion Cabinet 400 MHz
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Table 3-7: Typical Power Loads and Heat Dissipation Values - MTS 260 MHz Configurations . . . . . 3-23
Table 3-8: Typical Power Loads and Heat Dissipation Values - Expansion Cabinet 260 MHz
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Table 3-9: Typical Power Loads and Heat Dissipation Values - MTS 800 MHz Configuration . . . . . . 3-24
Table 3-10: Typical Power Loads and Heat Dissipation Values - Expansion Cabinet 800 MHz
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Table 4-1: Antenna Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Table 4-2: GPS Start-up Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Table 4-3: RGPS Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Table 4-4: RGPS Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Table 4-5: Site Link Connector E1 on Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Table 4-6: Site Link Connector X.21 on Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Table 4-7: Ethernet Site Link Connector on Junction Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Table 4-8: External Alarm Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Table 4-9: Recommended Tools for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Table 4-10: Recommended Test Equipment for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Table 4-11: Recommended Parts for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Table 4-12: Recommended Torque for RF Connectors, Screws, and Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Table 4-13: Screws for Mounting Modules and Parts Within MTS2/4 and Expansion Cabinets . . . . . 4-75
Table 5-1: AC/DC Power Cabling for MTS LiTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Table 5-2: AC/DC Power Cabling for MTS 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Table 5-3: AC/DC Power Cabling for MTS 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Table 5-4: AC/DC Power Cabling for Expansion Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Table 5-5: User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS Cabling for MTS LiTE . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Table 5-6: User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS Cabling for MTS 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Table 5-7: User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS Cabling for MTS 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Table 5-8: E1 and Ethernet Cabling for MTS LiTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Table 5-9: E1 and Ethernet Cabling for MTS 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Table 5-10: E1 and Ethernet Cabling for MTS 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Table 5-11: E1 and Ethernet Cabling for Expansion Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Table 5-12: Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS LiTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Table 5-13: Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Table 5-14: Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 4 with Single Site Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Table 5-15: Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 4 with Dual Site Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

6802800U74-T January 2011 xvii


List of Tables

Table 5-16: Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet with Single Site Controller. . . . 5-27
Table 5-17: Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet with Dual Site Controller . . . . 5-29
Table 5-18: RF Cabling/Connections for MTS LiTE with One TX and One RX ant. No Diversity. . . . 5-32
Table 5-19: RF Cabling/Connections for MTS LiTE with One TX/RX ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Table 5-20: RF Cabling/Connections for MTS LiTE with One TX/RX ant. and One Additional RX
ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Table 5-21: RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 2 with no diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Table 5-22: RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 2 with One TX ant. and up to Two Additional RX ant. . . 5-37
Table 5-23: RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 2 with One TX/RX ant. and up to Two Additional RX
ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Table 5-24: RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 2 with Two TX/RX ant. and Up to One Additional RX
ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Table 5-25: RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 4 with No Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Table 5-26: RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 4 with One TX/RX ant. and Up to Two Additional RX
ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Table 5-27: TX ATCC Interconnect Harness Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Table 5-28: RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 4 with Two TX/RX ant. and Up to One Additional RX
ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Table 5-29: RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 4 with One TX ant. and up to Three Additional RX
ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Table 5-30: RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 4 with Two TX ant. and Up to Three Additional RX
ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Table 5-31: RF Cabling/Connections for Expansion Cabinet with One TX/RX ant. and Up to Two Additional
RX ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Table 5-32: TX ATCC Phasing Harness Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Table 5-33: RF Cabling/Connections for Expansion Cabinet with Two TX/RX ant. and Up to One Additional
RX ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Table 5-34: RF Cabling/Connections for Expansion Cabinet with One TX ant. and Up to Three Additional RX
ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
Table 5-35: RF Cabling/Connections for Expansion Cabinet with Two TX ant. and Up to Three Additional RX
ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
Table 5-36: CAN Bus Cabling for MTS LiTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Table 5-37: CAN Bus Cabling for MTS 2 with TX/RX on 1 ant. RX on 2 ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Table 5-38: CAN Bus Cabling for MTS 2 with TX/RX on 1 ant. RX on 2 ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
Table 5-39: CAN Bus Cabling for MTS 4 with TX/RX or TX on 1 ant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
Table 5-40: CAN Bus Cabling for MTS 4 with TX/RX or TX on 2 ant. with ATCCs . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Table 5-41: CAN Bus Cabling for MTS 4 with Expansion Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
Table 6-1: Equipment for Cabinet Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Table 6-2: Basic Service Cable Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Table 6-3: Site Controller Service Port Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Table 6-4: RS-232 Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Table 6-5: Base Radio LEDs: Normal Startup Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Table 6-6: Base Radio LEDs: Hardware Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Table 6-7: Corrective Actions for Missing or Bad Base Radio Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Table 6-8: Transmitter Verification Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Table 7-1: MTS LiTE RF Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Table 7-2: MTS 2 RF Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Table 7-3: MTS 4 RF Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Table 7-4: MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet RF Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Table 8-1: Site Controller - Front Panel Indicators (LED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Table 8-2: Site Controller - Front Panel Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Table 8-3: Site Controller - Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Table 8-4: Site Controller - Service Cable Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Table 8-5: Site Controller - Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Table 8-6: Site Controller - CAN Bus Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

xviii 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual List of Tables

Table 8-7: MTS - Restoration Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19


Table 8-8: Site Controller - FRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Table 8-9: Slots Configured on the E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Table 8-10: MTS - Site Controller Post-Restoration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Table 8-11: Equipment in Expansion Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Table 9-1: XHUB Controller – Front Panel Indicators (LED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Table 9-2: XHUB Controller – Front Panel Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Table 9-3: XHUB Controller – Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Table 9-4: XHUB Controller – Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Table 9-5: XHUB Controller - FRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Table 10-1: Base Radio - LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Table 10-2: Base Radio - Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Table 10-3: Base Radio - Service Cable Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Table 11-1: Power Supply Unit LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Table 11-2: Power Supply Unit Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Table 11-3: Power Supply Unit Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Table 13-1: Site Controller LED Fault Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Table 13-2: Site Reference States - status sc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Table 13-3: Site Reference Reasons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Table 13-4: Site Reference States - status bts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Table 13-5: BRC Config File Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Table 13-6: Other Site Controller Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Table 13-7: Generic Base Radio Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
Table 13-8: Recommended Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42
Table 13-9: Base Radio Fault Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-45
Table 13-10: Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-47
Table 14-1: Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Table 14-2: Standards Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Table 14-3: Dimensions of the MTS 2, MTS 4, and MTS 4 Expansion Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Table 14-4: RF Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Table 14-5: Auto Tune and Manual Tune Cavity Combining Transmitter-to-Antenna Port
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Table 14-6: Hybrid Combining Transmitter-to-Antenna Port Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Table 14-7: Transmit Specifications – TETRA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Table 14-8: Transmit Specifications – TEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Table 14-9: Receiver Specifications – TETRA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Table 14-10: Receiver Specifications – TEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Table 14-11: Site Controller Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Table 14-12: Internal GPS Input specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Table 14-13: MTS LiTE / MTS 2 Duplexer Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Table 14-14: MTS LiTE / MTS 2 Preselector Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Table 14-15: MTS 4 Duplexer Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Table 14-16: MTS 4 Post Filter Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Table 14-17: MTS 4 Preselector Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Table 14-18: Auto Tune Cavity Combiner (ATCC) Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Table 14-19: Manual Tune Cavity Combiner (MTCC) Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Table 14-20: Hybrid Combiner Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Table 14-21: Base Radio Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Table 14-22: Power Supply Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
Table 14-23: XHUB Controller Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Table 14-24: MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet RX Splitter Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Table 14-25: Connectors on MTS LiTE/MTS 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Table 14-26: Connectors on MTS 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
Table 15-1: Equipment in Expansion Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Table 15-2: Equipment in Expansion Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12

6802800U74-T January 2011 xix


List of Tables

Table 15-3: Equipment in Expansion Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15


Table 15-4: Equipment in Expansion Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-27
Table 15-5: Equipment in Expansion Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-34
Table 15-6: Equipment in Expansion Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-35
Table 15-7: Equipment in Expansion Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-39
Table 15-8: Equipment in Expansion Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-40
Table 15-9: Equipment in Expansion Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-44
Table A-1: Available FRUs for MTS LiTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Table A-2: Other FRUs for MTS LiTE Available from After Market Operations (AMO) . . . . . . . . A-1
Table A-3: Available FRUs for MTS 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Table A-4: Other FRUs for MTS 2 Available from After Market Operations (AMO) . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Table A-5: Available FRUs for MTS 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Table A-6: Other Field Replaceable Units for MTS 4 Available from After Market Operations (AMO) . . A-6
Table A-7: Available Field Replaceable Units for MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Table A-8: Other Field Replaceable Units for MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet Available from After Market
Operations (AMO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Table B-1: Planned Maintenance Inspection for MTS LiTE/MTS 2 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Table B-2: Duplexer Digital Power Monitor PMIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Table B-3: Preselector PMIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Table B-4: Planned Maintenance Inspection for MTS 4 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Table B-5: Other Replaceable Parts and Accessories for MTS 4 PMIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Table D-1: TETRA/Dimetra Acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

xx 6802800U74-T January 2011


List
of
Procedures

List of Procedures
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Procedure 4-1: How to Install the Cabinet Using the Mounting Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Procedure 4-2: How to Mount a Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Procedure 4-3: How to Secure Cabinet to a Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Procedure 4-4: How to Provide Grounding Connection to the Equipment Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Procedure 4-5: How to Ensure Adequacy of Cabinet – to – Facility Ground Connections . . . . . . . . 4-21
Procedure 4-6: How to Connect –48 VDC Power Source to Equipment Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Procedure 4-7: How to Connect 110 – 240 VAC Power Source to Equipment Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Procedure 4-8: How to Connect Backup Battery Sensor to the Equipment Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Procedure 4-9: How to Install the MTS LVD Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Procedure 4-10: How to Connect Ethernet Site Link Retrofit Kit for MTS 2 (old JP) . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Procedure 4-11: How to Connect Ethernet Site Link Retrofit Kit for MTS 2 (new JP) . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Procedure 4-12: How to Connect Ethernet Site Link Retrofit Kit for MTS 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Procedure 4-13: How to Connect Ethernet Site Link Retrofit Kit for MTS 4 with Expansion Cabinet (old
JP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Procedure 4-14: How to Connect Ethernet Site Link Retrofit Kit for MTS 4 with Expansion Cabinet (new
JP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Procedure 4-15: How to Perform the Cabinet Final Check-out Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Procedure 4-16: How to Power-Up MTS and Expansion Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Procedure 6-1: Site Controller Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Procedure 6-2: Base Radio LED Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Procedure 6-3: How to Verify Base Radio Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Procedure 6-4: How to Configure pm_config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Procedure 6-5: How to Verify the Base Radio Software Version Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Procedure 6-6: How to Upgrade to Latest Test Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Procedure 6-7: How to Verify the Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Procedure 6-8: How to set up the Equipment for Receiver Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Procedure 6-9: How to Verify the Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Procedure 6-10: Display Outstanding Base Radio Alarm Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Procedure 7-1: MTS LiTE - How to Remove the Preselector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Procedure 7-2: MTS 2 - How to Remove the Preselector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Procedure 7-3: MTS LiTE - How to Reinstall the Preselector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Procedure 7-4: MTS 2 - How to Reinstall the Preselector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Procedure 7-5: How to Remove the MTS LiTE / MTS 2 Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Procedure 7-6: How to Insert the Duplexer into the Filter Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Procedure 7-7: How to Update the Mapping List with the New Unit TrackID . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Procedure 7-8: How to Remove the Hybrid Combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Procedure 7-9: How to Reinstall the Hybrid Combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Procedure 7-10: How to Remove the MTS 4 Preselector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Procedure 7-11: How to Reinstall the MTS 4 Preselector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Procedure 7-12: How to Remove the MTS 4 Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Procedure 7-13: How to Insert the Duplexer into the Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Procedure 7-14: How to Update the Mapping List with the New Unit TrackID. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

6802800U74-T January 2011 xxi


List of Procedures

Procedure 7-15: How to Remove the Post Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30


Procedure 7-16: How to Reinstall the Post Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Procedure 7-17: How to Update the Mapping List with the New TrackerID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Procedure 7-18: How to Remove the Cavity Combiner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Procedure 7-19: How to Insert the Cavity Combiner into the Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Procedure 7-20: How to Update the Mapping List with the New TrackID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Procedure 7-21: How to Remove the RX Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Procedure 7-22: How to Reinstall the RX Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Procedure 8-1: Site Controller - How to Update the Mapping List with the New Unit TrackID . . . . . 8-14
Procedure 8-2: How to Check if Site Controller Lithium Battery Needs Changing . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Procedure 8-3: How to Replace Site Controller Lithium Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Procedure 8-4: MTS - How to Set Up a Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Procedure 8-5: MTS - How to Back Up Current MTS Configuration to PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Procedure 8-6: MTS - How to View and Edit the Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Procedure 8-7: MTS - How to Replace Site Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Procedure 8-8: MTS - How to Download the Site Controller Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Procedure 8-9: MTS - How to Program the BRC Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Procedure 8-10: MTS - How to Change the Site Controller Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Procedure 8-11: MTS - How to Download the Site Controller Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Procedure 8-12: MTS - How to Configure E1 Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Procedure 8-13: MTS - How to Configure CAN Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Procedure 8-14: MTS - How to Configure the Cooling Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Procedure 8-15: MTS - How to Refresh Ki's for the MTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Procedure 8-16: MTS - How to Connect KVL to the AuC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Procedure 8-17: MTS - How to Download Locally Ki's from the AuC to KVL. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Procedure 8-18: MTS - How to Download Ki's from the AuC to KVL (Remotely using GSM) . . . . . 8-38
Procedure 8-19: MTS - How to Check the Inventory in KVL to Ensure Correct Information is
Downloaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Procedure 8-20: MTS - How to Download Ki's from KVL to Site Controller/BRC . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Procedure 8-21: MTS - How to Upload the Site Receipts (Locally) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Procedure 8-22: MTS - How to Upload the Site Receipts (Remotely Using GSM) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Procedure 8-23: MTS - Site Controller - How to Verify the Internal GPS Module . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Procedure 8-24: MTS - Site Controller - How to Verify the External GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Procedure 8-25: Add Additional Site CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
Procedure 8-26: Site Controller Hardware Pre-Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Procedure 8-27: Site Controller Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Procedure 8-28: How to Configure Ethernet Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Procedure 8-29: How to Configure SC IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
Procedure 8-30: How to Upgrade the Site Controller Test Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Procedure 9-1: MTS - How to Replace XHUB Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Procedure 10-1: How To Remove the Base Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Procedure 10-2: How to Reinstall the Base Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Procedure 11-1: How to Remove Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Procedure 11-2: How to Reinstall Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Procedure 11-3: How to Update the Mapping List with the New PSU TrackID. . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Procedure 12-1: How to Replace the MTS Fan Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Procedure 15-1: How to Install Additional Base Radio to MTS 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Procedure 15-2: How to Install Hybrid Combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Procedure 15-3: How to Add an Additional Module Cage to MTS 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
Procedure 15-4: How to Add an Additional Base Radio to MTS 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-20
Procedure 15-5: How to Add Redundant Site Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-29
Procedure 15-6: Site Controller Hardware Pre-Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-31
Procedure 15-7: Site Controller Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-31
Procedure 15-8: Configure Ethernet Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-32
Procedure 15-9: Configure Site Controller IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-33

xxii 6802800U74-T January 2011


List of Procedures

Procedure 15-10: How to Install Additional Cavity Combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-36


Procedure 15-11: How to Install Hybrid Combiner for MTS 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-39
Procedure 15-12: How to Extract the Module Cage from MTS 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-41
Procedure 15-13: How to Assemble the Module Cage in the MTS 4 Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-42
Procedure 15-14: How to Install Redundant XHUB Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-45

6802800U74-T January 2011 xxiii


List of Procedures

This page intentionally left blank.

xxiv 6802800U74-T January 2011


List
of
Processes

List of Processes
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Process 4-1: Mounting the Cabinet Using Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11


Process 6-1: Preparation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Process 6-2: The Site controller (SC) setup and checkout procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Process 6-3: Base Radio Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Process 7-1: Replacing the MTS LiTE / MTS 2 Preselector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Process 7-2: Replacing the MTS LiTE / MTS 2 Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Process 7-3: Replacing the Hybrid Combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Process 7-4: Replacing the MTS 4 Preselector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Process 7-5: Replacing the MTS 4 Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Process 7-6: Replacing the Post Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Process 7-7: Replacing the Cavity Combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Process 7-8: Replacing the Expansion Cabinet RX Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Process 8-1: MTS – Replacing Site Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Process 8-2: MTS - Configuration Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Process 8-3: MTS - Restoring the Site Controller Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Process 8-4: MTS - Loading Ki's Into MTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Process 8-5: MTS - Site Controller Post - Restoration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Process 8-6: Adding Redundant Site CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Process 8-7: How to Configure Redundant Site Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Process 10-1: Base Radio Replacement Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Process 11-1: Replacing the Power Supply Unit (PSU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Process 15-1: Adding an Additional Base Radio to MTS 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Process 15-2: Adding a Redundant Site Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-28
Process 15-3: How to Configure Redundant Site Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-30
Process 15-4: Installing 4 CH Cavity Combiner Expansion Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-35
Process 15-5: Expanding from MTS 2 to MTS 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-40

6802800U74-T January 2011 xxv


List of Processes

This page intentionally left blank.

xxvi 6802800U74-T January 2011


About
This
Manual

MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation,


Configuration and Basic Service Manual
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

This manual provides an overview of the Motorola TETRA Station (MTS) within the Dimetra IP System.

What Is Covered In This Manual?


This manual covers the basics of Installation, Configuration, and Service of the following TETRA stations:
• MTS LiTE 400 MHz and 800 MHz
• MTS 2 260 MHz, 400 MHz and 800 MHz
• MTS 4 260 MHz, 400 MHz and 800 MHz

This manual refers to the following MTS frequencies:


• 260 MHz: covers the 260 MHz - 275 MHz frequency range
• 400 MHz: covers the 350 MHz - 470 MHz frequency ranges
• 800 MHz: covers the 806 MHz - 870 MHz frequency range

Helpful Background Information


This manual is intended for use by the following audiences within the user community:
• Operations Group - This group is responsible for the day-to-day system operation
and comprises system administrators and communication specialists, usually
under the supervision of an operations manager.
• Field Technicians / Engineers - Responsible for installation, configuration, support
of customer systems, and FRU replacement.
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the operating principles of Motorola Dimetra
IP trunked radio equipment or similar.

6802800U74-T January 2011 xxvii


Icon Conventions

Related Information
Table -1 Related Information

Document Title Description


Motorola TETRA Stations manual –
Motorola Standards and Guidelines for Provides standards and guidelines that should be followed when
Communications Sites, R56, Document setting up a Motorola communications site.
MTS Man-Machine Interface (MMI) This manual describes the Man-Machine Interface commands
Commands Manual, Document Part used to test and configure MTS sites.
Number: 6866600D04
TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) This manual is an introduction and guide to the use of the
User Guide, Document Part Number: Dimetra™ BTS (Base Transceiver System) Service Software.
6802700U57 Through the Dimetra BTS Service Software trained service
personnel and systems engineers can configure and program a
BTS.
MTS 4 Outdoor Enclosure (Addendum), This manual describes all necessary actions to install the MTS
Document Part Number: 6866600D34 outdoor enclosure.
Dimetra IP Glossary Provides a list of Dimetra IP abbreviations and acronyms.

Icon Conventions
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

The document set is designed to give the reader more visual cues. The following graphic icons are used
throughout the documentation set. These icons and their associated meanings are described below.

SUGGESTION

A Suggestion implies a recommendation or tip from Motorola, which does not require to be
followed, but may be helpful. There is no warning level associated with a Suggestion.

Notes contain information that is more important than the surrounding text, such as exceptions or
preconditions. Also, refer the reader elsewhere for additional information, remind the reader how
to complete an action (when it is not part of the current procedure, for instance), or tell the reader
where information is located on the screen. There is no warning level associated with a Note.

xxviii 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Icon Conventions

An Important icon indicates information that is crucial to the discussion at hand, but which is
not a Caution or a Warning. There is no warning level associated with the Important icon.

The Caution icon implies information that must be carried out in a certain manner
to avoid problems, procedures that may or may not be necessary as determined
by the reader’s system configuration, and so on. Although no damage occurs if
the reader does not heed the caution, some steps may need repeating.

The Warning icon implies potential system damage if the instructions or


procedures are not carried out exactly, or if the warning is not heeded.

The Danger icon implies information that, if disregarded, may result in severe
injury or death of personnel. This is the highest level of warning.

6802800U74-T January 2011 xxix


Regulatory CE Marking Compliance

Regulatory CE Marking Compliance


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 are compliant with the essential requirements in article 3 of the
E.U. Directive, 1999/5/EC, “Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment and
the Mutual Recognition of their Conformity (R&TTE)”. Compliance testing is performed with
maximum configurations with AC Power and Battery Backup. This includes:
Article 3.1a: Safety, of the R&TTE directive: Verification tests performed according
to the harmonized European standard:
• EN 60950–1 Safety of information technology equipment; Part 1: General requirements.

Article 3.1b: EMC, of the R&TTE directive: Verification tests performed according
to the harmonized European standards:
• ETSI EN 301 489-1 EMC standard for radio equipment and services; Part
1: Common technical requirements.
• ETSI EN 301 489-18 EMC standard for radio equipment and services; Part 18: Specific
conditions for Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) equipment.
• EN 61000-3-2 standard for Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) -- Part 3-2: Limits – Limits
for harmonic current emissions (equipment input current up to and including 16 A per phase)
• EN 61000-3-3 standard for Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) -- Part 3-3 Limits – Limitation
of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in public low-voltage supply systems, for
equipment with rated current <=16 A per phase and not in subject to conditional connection.

This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference
in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Article 3.2: Radio spectrum use, of the R&TTE directive: Verification tests performed
according to the harmonized European standards:
• ETSI EN 303 035-1 Harmonized EN for TETRA equipment covering essential requirements
under article 3.2 of the R&TTE directive; Part 1: Voice plus Data (V+D)
• ETSI EN 300 394-1 TETRA conformance testing specification; Part 1: Radio.
• ETSI EW 302 561 Radio equipment using constant or non-constant envelope modulation
operating in a channel bandwidth of 25 kHz, 50 kHz, 100 kHz or 150 kHz; Harmonized
EN covering essential requirements of article 3.2 of the R&TTE Directive.

MTS 2 and MTS 4 are also compliant with the following requirement:
• ARIB STD-T80 Digital Mobile Telecommunication System for Local Government TYPE 2

xxx 6802800U74-T January 2011


Chapter

1
MTS Overview
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

This chapter provides an overview of the Motorola TETRA Station (MTS). This should give you an
overview of what MTSs are, what they do, and the modules that they are comprised of.
The MTS is one type of Base Station that can be used in a Dimetra IP communication system. A
Base Station serves as the Radio Frequency (RF) interface between the system infrastructure and the
mobile stations. Base Stations in a trunked system have three primary interfaces:
• A receiver to pick up the RF signal from the mobile stations
• A transmitter to send RF signals to the mobile stations
• A wireline interface to send audio and control traffic to the system infrastructure

Strategically placed base stations allow users to communicate with one another, dispatch
operators or telephone users using the Dimetra IP system.
This chapter includes the following topics:
• "MTS Platform"
• "MTS LiTE Components"
• "MTS 2 Components"
• "MTS 4 Components"
• "Expansion Cabinet Components"
• "MTS Modules"

6802800U74-T January 2011 1-1


MTS Platform Chapter 1: MTS Overview

MTS Platform
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

The MTS provides the interface between the mobile stations within the Dimetra IP system and
the rest of the system infrastructure. The main functions of the MTS are:
• Radio link formatting, coding, timing, framing, and error control
• Timing control supervision to mobile stations (Timing Advance)
• Radio link quality measurements (Signal Quality Estimate)
• Site to site frame synchronization
• Interface translation - radio link to network equipment
• Switching functions between multiple base transceivers (radio carriers)
• Air Interface Encryption
• Local Site Trunking
• Operation, maintenance, and administration agent

There are three different versions of MTS:


• MTS LiTE
• MTS 2
• MTS 4

MTS LiTE is the smallest of the three versions and supports one Base Radio. MTS 2 is the middle size
version of the MTSs and supports one to two Base Radios. MTS 4 is the largest of the three versions,
and with the expansion cabinet installed it supports one to eight Base Radios.
MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 are built up inside cabinets. The MTS cabinets comprise card cages (the same
card cage is used in MTS 2 and MTS 4 while a separate card cage type is used in MTS LiTE), which in turn
house different configurations of modules, for example, Power Supply Units, Base Radios, and Site Controllers.
These modules provide the MTS's functionality. Different configurations and number of modules determine
the MTS's functionality and capacity. Each of these modules is described in more detail in this manual.
The MTSs are managed by the system infrastructure's Network Management (NM) applications.
Communication between the MTSs and the NM applications takes place through an Ethernet, E1
or X.21 link. Through this link, the NM applications can download new configuration files to the
MTSs and receive alarm/event and performance statistics from them.

When a MTS LiTE is managed in TESS application, MTS 2 should be selected.


For information regarding network management configuration of the MTS, please refer to the MTS
Site Object sections of the Zone Configuration Manager manual and Online Help.

1-2 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS Platform

The three versions of MTS are, in general, very similar in terms of functionality and the
modules that they are comprised of. However, there are a number of important differences
between them, which are highlighted in appropriate sections of this document.

6802800U74-T January 2011 1-3


MTS LiTE Components Chapter 1: MTS Overview

MTS LiTE Components


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

The MTS LiTE is comprised of the following components:


• A stainless steel and painted aluminum cabinet
• A removable (hingeless) front door
• A junction panel
• A filter section
• A 19 inch card cage
• Interface cabling
• Internal modules
• Cooling fans (optional)

MTS LiTE is available in 400 MHz and 800 MHz versions.

Figure 1-1 MTS LiTE Cabinet

1-4 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS LiTE Components

The modules that comprise a typical configuration MTS LiTE cabinet includes the following modules:
• Duplexer
• Preselector
• Site Controller
• Base Radio
• Power Supply Unit

The door of the cabinet has a lock to prevent unauthorized opening. Unauthorized
opening of the door generates an alarm.
For a complete description of each module, refer to the appropriate chapter. Each chapter provides the theory
of operation, a description of switches, indicators and connectors, and FRU replacement procedures for each
module. Configuration and testing, and troubleshooting for MTSs are provided in separate chapters.

6802800U74-T January 2011 1-5


MTS 2 Components Chapter 1: MTS Overview

MTS 2 Components
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

The MTS 2 is comprised of the following components:


• A stainless steel and painted aluminum cabinet
• A removable (hingeless) front door
• A junction panel
• A filter section
• A 19 inch card cage
• Interface cabling
• Internal modules
• Cooling fans (optional)

MTS 2 cabinet is available in 260 MHz, 400 MHz, and 800 MHz versions.

Figure 1-2 MTS 2 Cabinet

1-6 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS 2 Components

The modules that comprise the MTS 2 cabinet vary based on the type of configuration chosen.
A typical configuration includes the following modules:
• Duplexer
• Preselector
• Hybrid Combiner
• Site Controller
• Base Radio(s)
• Power Supply Unit

The door of the cabinet has a lock to prevent unauthorized opening. Unauthorized
opening of the door generates an alarm.
For a complete description of each module, refer to the appropriate chapter. Each chapter provides the theory
of operation, a description of switches, indicators and connectors, and FRU replacement procedures for each
module. Configuration and testing, and troubleshooting for MTSs are provided in separate chapters.

6802800U74-T January 2011 1-7


MTS 4 Components Chapter 1: MTS Overview

MTS 4 Components
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

The MTS 4 is comprised of the following components:


• A stainless steel and painted aluminum cabinet
• A front door opening to left or right and removable
• A junction panel
• A filter section
• A combiner section
• One or two 19 inch card cages
• Interface cabling
• Internal modules
• Cooling fans

MTS 4 cabinet is available in 260 MHz, 400 MHz, and 800 MHz versions.

1-8 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS 4 Components

Figure 1-3 MTS 4 Cabinet

The modules that comprise the MTS 4 cabinet vary based on the type of configuration chosen.
A typical configuration includes the following modules:
• Duplexer
• Preselector
• Post Filter
• Cavity Combiner(s)
• Site Controller(s)
• Base Radios
• Power Supply Unit(s)

The door of the cabinet has a lock to prevent unauthorized opening. Unauthorized
opening of the door generates an alarm.

6802800U74-T January 2011 1-9


MTS 4 Components Chapter 1: MTS Overview

For a complete description of each module, refer to the appropriate chapter. Each chapter
provides an overview, a description of switches, indicators and test connectors, and a functional
description of each module. Troubleshooting and removal/replacement procedures are also
included for modules having Field Replaceable Units (FRUs).

1-10 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Expansion Cabinet Components

Expansion Cabinet Components


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

The Expansion Cabinet is comprised of the following components:


• A stainless steel and painted aluminum cabinet
• A front door opening to the left or right and removable
• A junction panel with AC/DC input
• A filter section (by default only splitters mounted)
• A combiner section
• 1 or 2, 19 inch card cages
• Interface cabling
• Internal modules
• Cooling fans

6802800U74-T January 2011 1-11


Expansion Cabinet Components Chapter 1: MTS Overview

Figure 1-4 MTS Expansion Cabinet

The modules that comprise the Expansion Cabinet vary based on the type of configuration
chosen. A typical configuration includes the following modules:
• RX Splitter(s)
• Cavity Combiner(s)
• eXpansion HUB (XHUB)
• Base Radios
• Power Supply Unit(s)

The door of the cabinet has a lock to prevent unauthorized opening. Unauthorized
opening of the door generates an alarm.
For a complete description of each module, refer to the appropriate chapter. Each chapter
provides an overview, a description of switches, indicators and test connectors, and a functional
description of each module. Troubleshooting and removal/replacement procedures are also
included for modules having Field Replaceable Units (FRUs).

1-12 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS Modules

MTS Modules
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Each MTS is comprised of a number of modules. Some of these modules in turn are comprised of
subcomponents. This section provides an overview of each of the available modules and their subcomponents.

RF Distribution System
The RF Distribution System (RFDS) module has the following subcomponents:
• Preselector (MTS LiTE, MTS2 and MTS4 prime only)
• Duplexer (MTS LiTE, MTS2 and MTS4 prime only)
• Post Filter (MTS4 prime only)
• Cavity Combiners (CC) (MTS 4 and Expansion Cabinet only)
• Hybrid Combiner (HC) (MTS 2 and MTS 4 Prime Cabinet only)
• Rx Splitter (Expansion Cabinet Only)

The Preselector types and Duplexer types used in MTS LiTE and MTS 2
are different from the types used in MTS 4.

Preselector
The Preselector is a bandpass filter, which allows only the receiver signals to pass. For 400 MHz, the
filter’s bandwidth is 5 MHz, and it is designed to block transmitter frequencies as close as 5 MHz from
its band edges. For 260 MHz, the filter’s bandwidth is 6 MHz and for 800 MHz, the filter’s bandwidth
is 19 MHz. The Preselector incorporates a Receiver Multicoupler (RMC).

Duplexer
The Duplexer consists of two bandpass filters. One allows the transmitter signal to pass while the
other allows the receiver signal to pass. Both filters have a bandwidth of 5 MHz.
For 400 MHz, the duplex spacing between a transmitter frequency and the corresponding receive frequency
is 10 MHz, with the transmitter frequency being higher. This leaves a 5 MHz spacing between the lowest
possible transmit frequency and the highest possible receive frequency. For 260 MHz, the duplex spacing
between a transmitter frequency and the corresponding receive frequency is 9 MHz. For 800 MHz, the duplex
spacing between a transmitter frequency and the corresponding receive frequency is 45 MHz.
The Duplexer incorporates both an RMC and a Digital Power Meter (DPM).

6802800U74-T January 2011 1-13


Post Filter Chapter 1: MTS Overview

Post Filter
The Post Filter supports non-duplexed configurations and incorporates a DPM.

A Post Filter is only available for the MTS 4 as MTS LiTE and MTS 2 do
not support non-duplexed configurations.

Cavity Combiners
There are two types of Cavity Combiner (CC) available:
• Auto Tune Cavity Combiners (ATCC)
• Manual Tune Cavity Combiners (MTCC)
MTCCs are functionally the same as ATCCs except that they are tuned
manually instead of electronically.

260 MHz configurations does not support MTCC.


Minimum channel spacing of the TX channels is 150 kHz while the recommended channel spacing is 250 kHz.

MTS LiTE and MTS 2 do not support Cavity Combiners.

Hybrid Combiner
The Hybrid Combiner (HC) combines up to two transmitters. The 400 MHz Hybrid Combiner covers a
frequency range of 350 MHz to 470 MHz, the 260 MHz Hybrid Combiner covers a frequency range of 260
MHz to 275 MHz, while the 800 MHz Hybrid Combiner covers a frequency range of 850 MHz to 870 MHz.
The combiner has no limitations in respect to channel spacing of the TX channels. However for
frequency planning and interference reasons, at least 50 kHz is recommended.

MTS LiTE does not support Hybrid Combiners.

Rx Splitter
The RX splitter is a passive device, receiving the signal from the Expansion Out connector of the Duplexer/Pre-
selector in the MTS 4 Prime Cabinet and then distributes it to the Base Radios in the MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet.

1-14 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Site Controller

Site Controller
The Site Controller (SC) controls resources within the base station, including assignment of frequencies
and slots to mobile stations. The Site Controller incorporates a Global Positioning System (GPS),
which receives signals that are used to develop high-precision system timing signals.
The Site Controller communicates with the Base Radio(s) through the 100Base-T Ethernet interface.
It also communicates with the network through an X.21 or E1 link.

XHUB
The eXpansion HUB (XHUB) is a non-intelligent switching and interface module, which plugs into
the Site Controller slot of an MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet. It is connected through the Expansion
Cab output of the Site Controller to the Prime Cab connector of the XHUB.

Base Radio (BR)


The Base Radio (BR) module contains the following sub-components:
• Transceiver
• Power Amplifier (PA)

Transceiver
The transceiver provides the BR's transmission, receiving, signal processing, and modulation functions. To do
this, the transceiver incorporates a Base Radio Controller (BRC), Receiver (RCV), and Exciter (EXC).
The BRC serves as the main controller of the Base Radio. The BRC provides signal processing
and operational control for the other Base Radio modules.

Power Amplifier
The Power Amplifier (PA), in conjunction with the Exciter, provides the transmitter functions
for the Base Radio. The PA accepts the low-level modulated RF signal from the exciter and
amplifies the signal for transmission through the RF output connector.

6802800U74-T January 2011 1-15


Power Supply Unit Chapter 1: MTS Overview

Power Supply Unit


Depending on the configuration, the MTS is equipped with one or two Power Supply Units (PSUs).
The PSU permits operation of the MTS in any of the following configurations:
• DC power supply
• AC power supply
• AC power supply with a DC backup battery

Backup Battery
The PSU handles the automatic switchover to a backup battery in the event of an AC power supply
failure. The MTS charges the backup battery during normal AC operation. A temperature sensor
monitors the backup battery’s temperature to ensure optimum charging.

The recommended batteries to be used are a Valve Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA) recombination
type, with -48 VDC nominal. Such as Enersys Power safe VFT type.

Cooling Fans
One or more fan modules generate an airflow through the MTS cabinets to manage their
temperature. Each module is comprised of two fans. Revolution of the fans is monitored by a
sensor. In the event of a failure, an alarm will be generated.

Low power configurations of MTS LiTE and MTS 2 can be operated without cooling fans.

1-16 6802800U74-T January 2011


Chapter

2
General Safety
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

This chapter summarizes the safety related information that you should both understand and observe
when working with Motorola TETRA Stations (MTSs). In addition to the information contained in this
chapter, additional safety related information can be found in other parts of the document.

This is not an exhaustive list of all the precautions and safety measures that should be
observed. Please ensure that all local and site safety measures are implemented before
carrying out any task with the MTS or associated equipment.

For full instructions and guidelines, please always refer to Motorola Standards and
Guidelines for Communications Sites, R56, document.

General Safety
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

This section contains general information related to safety when working with, or operating MTSs.

The MTS 4 is intended to be installed in restricted access locations, as defined


in EN/IEC 60950-1, and only to be used by service personnel, or by users with
appropriate technical experience and training.

The MTS LiTE and the MTS 2 are intended to be installed in restricted access
locations, as defined in EN/IEC 60950-1, and only to be used by service personnel,
or by users with appropriate technical experience and training.

6802800U74-T January 2011 2-1


General Safety Chapter 2: General Safety

The MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 are connected to earth and powered from a 110 V/230
VAC primary power source, or a -48 VDC secondary power source.

The batteries should be installed in the same building and properly ventilated.

The battery installation need a short circuit protection closest to the batteries.

It is important that all antennae cables are grounded at the point


that they enter the building.

Antenna design is the customer's responsibility. All aspects of antenna


design must comply with the relevant local regulations.

You must be familiar with Man-Machine Interface (MMI) commands and their
usage prior to performing procedures in this documentation. Improperly
applying MMI commands can result in equipment damage.

Do not attempt to make a resistance check of the GPS antenna. Damage to


the active devices within the antenna element may result.

Do not transmit to an antenna under any circumstance unless


those frequencies are licensed.

2-2 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual General Safety

Do not key any Base Radio with the Signal Generator directly connected
to a Tx antenna port. Damage to generator will result.

Some commands executed during Conformance Testing will bypass


normally available alarms and protection associated with the normal MTS
operation. Therefore, it is imperative to adhere to all cautionary information
and follow instructions exactly as in the procedures.

The MTS site must meet certain specifications for adequate protection
from lightning induced transients. Proper ground installation methods are
outlined in the Motorola Standards and Guidelines for Communications
Sites, R56 manual. Refer to Quality Standards in Chapter 1 - Overview
for information on obtaining the R56 manual.

The Site Controller motherboard contains a lithium battery. Refer to local


regulatory requirements for proper disposal of the battery.

During thunder storms do not service any base station or infrastructure items.

Any device (for example, power supply) providing isolation between the mains
and the MTS must provide reinforced insulation to hazardous voltages. The
DC power source providing power to the MTS shall comply with requirements
specified for a safety extra low voltage circuit (SELV) per EN60950.

Always use appropriate equipment and number of personnel whenever moving


an MTS equipment cabinet to reduce the risk of injury.

6802800U74-T January 2011 2-3


General Safety Chapter 2: General Safety

This MTS Service Manual is intended for trained technicians experienced with
Motorola Base Radio equipment or similar types of equipment.

Use extreme caution when wearing a conductive wrist strap near sources of high
voltage. The low impedance provided by the wrist strap also increases the danger
of lethal shock should accidental contact with high voltage sources occur.

Make sure that all power to the power supply equipment is off to prevent
accidental contact with high energy and injury to personnel.

RF energy burn hazard. Disconnect power in the cabinet to prevent injury


while disconnecting and connecting antennas.

Ensure a good connection between the electrical system ground and


site ground to prevent excessive voltage potential between the two
ground systems during lightning strikes.

If cooling fans are fitted, they will be exposed when modules are removed from
the rack. Touching the fans, if they are running, could result in injury.

2-4 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Mains Safety

Mains Safety
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

This section contains information specifically related to mains safety when working with, or operating MTSs.

Hazardous mains voltages exist within the power supply of the MTS. This module
is not designed for field service. Depot servicing must include appropriate
precautions when fault finding this switch-mode power supply.

6802800U74-T January 2011 2-5


Battery Safety Chapter 2: General Safety

Battery Safety
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

This section contains information specifically related to safety when working


with, or operating the MTS batteries.

To prevent injury or burns, when replacing a Lithium battery, do not allow


metal objects to come in contact with the battery terminals.

Harmful gases may be generated by the battery backup. Battery backup


should only be operated in well ventilated areas.

Batteries used for powering equipment pose the following risks:


• Explosion hazard resulting from inherent generation of hydrogen sulfide gas.
• Chemical burns/blindness resulting from sulfuric acid electrolyte.
• Very high current capabilities, with the possibility to burn, start fires, and result in arcing.

Special precautions are required when handling batteries:


• To avoid spilling acid, do not tip batteries.
• Battery acid can cause severe burns and blindness if it comes into contact with skin or eyes.
Wash affected skin or eyes immediately with running water. Seek medical help immediately.
• Jewelry should not be worn while working with batteries.
• Installation personnel should wear necessary safety equipment when installing batteries.
• Batteries may require two-person lift. Use proper lifting techniques and equipment to avoid
injury. Insulated tools should be used when installing battery systems.

2-6 6802800U74-T January 2011


Chapter

3
Site Preparation
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

This chapter covers the following topics:


• "Site Planning"
• "Cabinets Considerations"
• "Antenna Considerations"
• "Ethernet/X.21/E1 Network Interface Considerations"
• "Special Considerations"
• "Environmental Considerations"
• "Electrical Requirements"
• "User Alarms, Control Outputs, and Door Alarm"
• "Grounding Requirements"

Site Planning
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Proper planning helps to prevent potential on-site and off-site interference from other RF
systems, and helps maximize system performance. Site layouts should always be planned
to minimize the cabling lengths between RF equipment.

For full instructions and guidelines, please refer always to Motorola Standards
and Guidelines for Communications Sites, R56.

6802800U74-T January 2011 3-1


Site Survey Chapter 3: Site Preparation

Site Survey
The site must be carefully inspected or surveyed using appropriate site survey forms
before orders are placed for the equipment.
A technical representative from both the customer and the site owner should preferably be
in attendance for total concurrence at a single given time.
In order to minimize any misunderstandings, which may arise in the future, the survey report should be approved
by all the attendees at the site survey. The site survey should address all relevant issues involving the MTS
site installation. All involved parties should be in agreement on all of the issues before any work commences.
The site survey issues typically include the following items:
• The potential location of the MTS Cabinet, size of the equipment room, and
the doorway or access into it. Access around the MTS shall include adequate
clearance for cabinet front door opening.
• Verifying the suitability of the existing heating-ventilation-air conditioning (HVAC)
and other environmental criteria in relation to the MTS equipment (see Table 3-6,
"Typical Power Loads and Heat Dissipation Values - Expansion Cabinet 400 MHz
Configuration," on page 3-22, later in this chapter).
• The power requirements for the site.
• A check of the history of local voltage and frequency variations together with the
possibility of interruptions of the supply to the site.
• The stand-by power requirements for the site.
• The location of the mains power distribution.
• The location of the network terminating unit (NTU) for the Ethernet, X.21 or E1 leased line.
• The location of telephone connections.
• The location of the building earth and the tower earth.
• Inspection/Test of the building and tower earth.
• The suitability, space availability, and location of the cable entry point into the equipment room.
• The suitability and location of the existing lightning arrestors.
• The suitability, space availability, and location of the existing cable tray or ladder rack between
the equipment room and the antenna tower or the antenna system support structure.
• Checking the cable access route into the equipment room.
• Identifying the type of tower and the type of structure on which the GPS antenna will be mounted.

3-2 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Site Considerations

Site Considerations
The MTS site building should be designed to meet the requirements of any and all local building
codes, and relevant regulations, applicable to the site location.
Motorola recommends the following considerations when selecting a site:
• For front access, stations allow only a minimum of 80 cm for access.
• The ceiling structure should be able to support a cable tray assembly for routing
the inter-cabinet cabling and other site cabling. The cable tray assembly is
mounted to the site ceiling and walls per site plan.
• Check the room door dimensions to ensure that the MTS cabinet can pass through:
◦ MTS LiTE or MTS 2 cabinet transported on wooden pallet needs 86
cm width/without wooden pallet 59 cm
◦ MTS 4 and Expansion cabinet transported on wooden pallet needs 86
cm width/without wooden pallet 68 cm
• The operating temperature of the MTS is:
◦ MTS LiTE 400 MHz without fans: -30 °C to +55 °C
◦ MTS LiTE 400 MHz with fans: -30 °C to +60 °C
◦ MTS LiTE 800 MHz (always fans): -30 °C to +60 °C
◦ MTS 2 260 MHz and 400 MHz without fans: -30 °C to +55 °C
◦ MTS 2 400 MHz with fans: -30 °C to +60 °C
◦ MTS 2 800 MHz (always fans): -30 °C to +60 °C
◦ MTS 4 260 MHz and 400 MHz (always fans): -30 °C to +60 °C
◦ MTS 4 800 MHz (always fans): -30 °C to +55 °C
Therefore the site interior temperature must be maintained within these limits. Maintaining a
stable, moderate site temperature is the best approach for long term reliability of the equipment.
• It is suggested that a mains socket outlet is available adjacent to the MTS for the powering of
test equipment. This mains outlet must be on the same electrical phase as the MTS supply.
• If sited close to a railway track, the MTS must be installed at least 3m from the center of the track.

Proper surge protection should be installed on E1/X.21 site links, all antennas, and power
inputs to prevent potential damage to the MTS. Please refer to "Surge Arrestors and Suppliers"
section in Appendix A, "Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)" for more information.
For full instructions and guidelines, please refer always to Motorola Standards
and Guidelines for Communications Sites, R56.

6802800U74-T January 2011 3-3


Cabinets Considerations Chapter 3: Site Preparation

Cabinets Considerations
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

The equipment cabinets are not approved or intended for outdoor use.

MTS LiTE Cabinet Considerations


The equipment cabinet dimensions are: 450 mm (width)/480 mm (depth)/380 mm
(height) as shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 MTS LiTE Cabinet Dimensions

The equipment cabinet may be installed against adjacent equipment, however the fol-
lowing minimal distances must be retained:
• 45 mm on both sides of the cabinet
• 800 mm of free space in front of the cabinet

The cabinet front door is removable. Figure 3-2 shows the cabinet layout within a
suggested site. Additional free space is recommended at the front of the cabinet to allow
the service personnel to access the equipment easily.

3-4 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS LiTE Cabinet Considerations

The free space above the cabinet(s) must be 20 cm at minimum to enable


service access and assure the cooling ventilation. Please note that especially
antenna cabling may require additional space.

All doors to the equipment room should be able to open to at least 90º. The
MTS LiTE has a removable door.

Figure 3-2 Suggested MTS LiTE Site Layout

Table 3-1 lists typical weight and floor loading information for the MTS LiTE. These
are not guaranteed specifications.
Table 3-1 MTS LiTE Equipment Cabinet Weight and Floor Loading

Configuration Weight [kg] Floor Loading [kg/sq metre]


MTS LiTE 35 163

6802800U74-T January 2011 3-5


MTS 2 Cabinet Considerations Chapter 3: Site Preparation

MTS 2 Cabinet Considerations


The equipment cabinet dimensions are: 443 mm (width)/472 mm (depth)/605 mm
(height) as shown in Figure 3-3.

Figure 3-3 MTS 2 Cabinet Dimensions

The equipment cabinet may be installed against adjacent equipment, however the following
minimal distances must be retained:
• 45 mm on both sides of the cabinet
• 800 mm of free space in front of the cabinet
The cabinet front door is removable. Figure 3-4 shows the cabinet layout within a
suggested site. Additional free space is recommended at the front of the cabinet to allow
the service personnel to access the equipment easily.

The free space above the cabinet(s) must be 20 cm at minimum to enable


service access and assure the cooling ventilation. Please note that especially
antenna cabling may require additional space.

All doors to the equipment room should be able to open to at least 90º.
The MTS 2 has a removable door.

3-6 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS 2 Cabinet Considerations

Figure 3-4 Suggested MTS 2 Site Layout

Table 3-2 lists typical weight and floor loading information for various configurations of
the MTS 2. These are not guaranteed specifications.

Table 3-2 MTS 2 Equipment Cabinet Weight and Floor Loading

Configuration Weight [kg] Floor Loading [kg/sq metre]


1 BR 39 181
2 BRs 48 227

6802800U74-T January 2011 3-7


MTS 4 Cabinet Considerations Chapter 3: Site Preparation

MTS 4 Cabinet Considerations


The equipment cabinet dimensions are: 550 mm (width)/570 mm (depth)/1430 mm
(height) as shown in Figure 3-5.

Figure 3-5 MTS 4 Cabinet Dimensions

The equipment cabinet may be installed against adjacent equipment, however the following
minimal distances must be retained:
• 25 mm on both sides of the cabinet
• 800 mm of free space in front of the cabinet
The cabinet front door has hinges on both sides and it can be opened right, left, or completely removed.
Figure 3-6 shows the cabinet layout within a suggested site. Additional free space is recommended at
the front of the cabinet to allow service personnel easy access to the equipment.

3-8 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS 4 Cabinet Considerations

The free space above the cabinet(s) must be 20 cm at minimum to enable


service access and assure the passive cooling ventilation. Please note that
especially antenna cabling may require additional space.

All doors to the equipment room should be able to open to at least 90º. The MTS
4 has a removable door, which can be easily removed.

Figure 3-6 Suggested MTS 4 Site Layout

Table 3-3 lists typical weight and floor loading information for various configurations of
MTS 4. These are not guaranteed specifications.

Table 3-3 MTS 4 Equipment Cabinet Weight and Floor Loading

Configuration Weight [kg] Floor Loading [kg/sq metre]


1 BR 90 286
2 BRs 111 354
3 BRs 132 421
4 BRs 141 450

6802800U74-T January 2011 3-9


Expansion Cabinet Considerations Chapter 3: Site Preparation

Expansion Cabinet Considerations


The Expansion Cabinet dimensions are: 550 mm (width)/570 mm (depth)/1430 mm
(height) as shown in Figure 3-7.

Figure 3-7 Expansion Cabinet Dimensions

The equipment cabinet may be installed against adjacent equipment, however the following
minimal distances must be retained:
• 25 mm on both sides of the cabinet
• 800 mm of free space in front of the cabinet

The cabinet front door has hinges on both sides and it can be opened right, left, or completely removed.
Figure 3-8 shows the cabinet layout within a suggested site. Additional free space is recommended at
the front of the cabinet to allow the service personnel to access the equipment easily.

3-10 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Expansion Cabinet Considerations

The free space above the cabinet(s) must be 20 cm at minimum to enable


service access and assure the passive cooling ventilation. Please note that
especially antenna cabling may require additional space.

All doors to the equipment room should be able to open to at least 90º. The Expansion
Cabinet has a removable door which can be easily removed.

Figure 3-8 Suggested Expansion Cabinet Site Layout

Even though Figure 3-8 illustrates the Expansion Cabinet to the right of the Prime Cabinet,
the Expansion Cabinet can also be placed on either side of the Prime Cabinet.

Only use RF Cable Harness provided by Motorola when connecting the Prime
Cabinet to the Expansion Cabinet since cable length is critical.

6802800U74-T January 2011 3-11


Expansion Cabinet Considerations Chapter 3: Site Preparation

Table 3-4 lists typical weight and floor loading information for various configurations of the
Expansion Cabinet. These are not guaranteed specifications.
Table 3-4 Expansion Cabinet Weight and Floor Loading

Configuration Weight (kg) Floor Loading (kg/sq metre)


1 BR 90 286
2 BRs 111 354
3 BRs 132 421
4 BRs 141 450

3-12 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Antenna Considerations

Antenna Considerations
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Antenna considerations describe the following topics:


• "RF Antenna"
• "GPS Antenna"
• "Surge Arrestors"

For full instructions and guidelines, please refer always to Motorola Standards
and Guidelines for Communications Sites, R56.

RF Antenna
Existing cable tray or ladder rack for RF cabling should be near to the MTS equipment.

GPS Antenna
The GPS antenna must be mounted high enough to clear the peak of the MTS site roof. For systems in the
northern hemisphere, the GPS antenna should be mounted so that a clear view of the southern sky is maintained.
For systems in the southern hemisphere, the GPS antenna should be mounted so that a
clear view of the northern sky is maintained.

For more information about GPS antenna installation and cabling, refer to "GPS Antenna
Connection" section in Chapter 4, "Hardware Installation".

The GPS antenna has to be installed below the tallest point on the tower, pole or roof.

6802800U74-T January 2011 3-13


Surge Arrestors Chapter 3: Site Preparation

Surge Arrestors
Proper surge protection should be installed on all antennas to prevent potential damage
to the MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4.
Please refer to "Surge Arrestors and Suppliers" section in Appendix A, "Field Replace-
able Units (FRUs)" for more information.

Lightning arrestors should be installed to transport lightning strikes away from the equipment.

Install a lightning rod on a tower leg other than the leg to which you mount the antenna.

3-14 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Ethernet/X.21/E1 Network Interface Considerations

Ethernet/X.21/E1 Network Interface Considerations


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Per any local regulations, a surge arrestor may be required at the Ethernet, X.21 or E1 service
entrance. The arrestor should be designed for operation with a Ethernet, X.21 or E1 circuit. The
arrestor typically is only installed on the customer side of the Ethernet, X.21 or E1 service entrance.
It should be wired per manufacturer instructions. Please refer to "Surge Arrestors and Suppliers"
section in Appendix A, "Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)" for more information.

6802800U74-T January 2011 3-15


Special Considerations Chapter 3: Site Preparation

Special Considerations
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Special considerations cover the following topics:


• "Electrical Service Access"
• "Hazardous Materials and Equipment"
• "Seismic Active Areas"

Electrical Service Access


Adhere to the local electrical codes and regulations regarding clearance for electrical service access.

Hazardous Materials and Equipment


Compliance with all local and any other regulations concerning the handling and use of hazardous
materials and equipment is the sole responsibility of the customer and associated agents.

Seismic Active Areas


MTS cabinets that are operating in seismic active areas may require additional bracing of the equipment cabinet.

This manual does not contain specific procedures related to seismic bracing.

3-16 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Environmental Considerations

Environmental Considerations
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Environmental considerations cover the following topics:


• "Temperature"
• "Humidity"
• "Corrosive Environment"
• "Air Quality"

Temperature
The environment in which the MTS operates is an important consideration. The temperature should be
regulated to ensure trouble-free operation. Excessive temperatures result in generated heat that may
reduce the life-span of the electronic equipment, and could cause permanent damage.
It is recommended that the ambient temperature (at the air inlet) does not exceed 35 ºC in normal operating
conditions. For exceptional conditions, the ambient temperature must not be allowed to exceed:
• 55 ºC: MTS LiTE 400 MHz (without fans)
• 55 ºC: MTS 2 260 MHz and 400 MHz (without fans)
• 55 ºC: MTS 4 800 MHz
• 60 ºC: MTS LiTE 400 MHz (with fans)
• 60 ºC: MTS 2 400 MHz (with fans)
• 60 ºC: MTS 4 260 MHz and 400 MHz
• 60 ºC: MTS LiTE 800 MHz (always with fans)
• 60 ºC: MTS 2 800 MHz (always with fans)

The low power MTS LiTE and MTS 2 cabinet use passive convection cooling. Fan modules may be
added where high ambient temperatures are experienced or operation at high altitude is necessary.

Keep attention that no other objects are covering the topside grilles and
leaves at least 20 cm of clearance above the cabinet(s).

6802800U74-T January 2011 3-17


Humidity Chapter 3: Site Preparation

Humidity
For humidity, MTS complies with ETSI norm EN300 019 1–3 Class 3.2.
At 30 ºC, the relative humidity within the site should be between 5% and 95% non-condensing.

Corrosive Environment
The equipment should not be directly exposed to corrosive environments. If the equipment
site is located in a coastal environment, proper air filtration for the site should be in place
to protect the equipment from salt mist contamination.

Air Quality
For cabinet-mounted equipment operating in an area, which is not environmentally controlled, the airborne
particulates level must not exceed concentration defined in ETSI norm EN300 019 1–3 Class 3.
Salt mist like sea salt and road salt excluded and shall always be avoided.

3-18 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Electrical Requirements

Electrical Requirements
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

All electrical wiring for the MTS site must meet the requirements of any
and all applicable local codes and regulations.

Any device (that is power supply) providing isolation between the AC mains
and the MTS must provide reinforced insulation to hazardous voltages. The
DC power source providing power to the MTS shall comply with requirements
specified for a safety extra low voltage circuit (SELV) per EN60950.

The battery installation need a short circuit protection closest to the batteries.

The batteries should be installed in the same building and properly ventilated.

Applicable Codes and Practices


The following list of codes and practices (small selection only) shall be adhered where applicable:
• Motorola R56 2000 Manual.
• UK - RPSG Installation Manual, System Quality Standard, specification
number 2200 and part number. 68P02200F01.
• UK - Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET) - BS 7671:2001 16th Edition Wiring
Regulations (Appendix 12, “Cable Capacities of Conduit and Trunking”).
• UK - Antenna System Installation Practice, issued by The Directorate of
Telecommunications of the UK Home Office.
• UK - Details of Earthing Requirements for Masts, Aerial Feeder Cables, and Radio Equipment
Rooms, issued by The Directorate of Telecommunications of the UK Home Office.
• GERMANY - VDE0100 Errichten von Starkstromanlagen bis 1000 Volt.
• GERMANY - VDE0185 Blitzschutzanlagen.
• GERMANY - VDE0510 Akkumulatoren und Batterieanlagen.
• GERMANY - VDE0855 Antennenanlagen, Errichtung und Betrieb.

6802800U74-T January 2011 3-19


AC and DC Power Supplies Chapter 3: Site Preparation

If other codes and practices are beneficial please refer to your local standards.

AC and DC Power Supplies


The MTS cabinet is equipped with a high efficiency switch mode Power Supply Unit (PSU).
Operating modes are as follows:
• DC only operation (within -41 VDC to -60 VDC)
• AC only operation (within 90 VAC to 264 VAC; 45 Hz to 66 Hz)
• AC operation (within 90 VAC to 264 VAC; 45 Hz to 66 Hz) and switch over
to DC backup operation when AC failed
The PSU handles the automatic switch over to a backup battery in the event of AC mains failure.

An external disconnect device and appropriate 20A fuse are re-


quired on the DC power supply line.

If the DC input on the station is connected to back up batteries, an external Low


Voltage Disconnect (LVD) device should be introduced directly in the power line
in order to protect the batteries against deep discharge. On the MTS2, one relay
rated min. 20 A/55 VDC should be introduced. And for the MTS4, two of these
units should be used, one for each of the two incoming DC lines. Alternatively
for the MTS4, one relay rated 40 A/55 VDC can be used if the two DC lines are
connected to one battery pack. The relays should be controlled in a way that they
disconnect the batteries once the voltage drops below 40.5 V, where the PSU in
the MTS shuts down. Two Motorola kits are available for this purpose:
• MTS2 LVD RELAY RETROFIT KIT (Kit Number: GMDN2206A)
• MTS4 LVD RELAY RETROFIT KIT (Kit Number: GMDN2207A)

The battery installation need a short circuit protection closest to the batteries.

The batteries should be installed in the same building and properly ventilated.

3-20 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Service Current Rating

Service Current Rating


The input current rating of the DC power supply equipment shall be considered
when selecting the AC main service.
The DC power system has normal loads and start-up loads. These loads are dependent on the number
of Base Radios in the site and the size and condition of the backup battery system. The normal
load of a typical power system is provided in Table 3-5 for several common MTS configurations
using battery backup. Table 3-6 lists typical power loads and heat dissipation values for Expansion
Cabinets. These loads may differ for the customer designed power systems.
Table 3-5 Typical Power Loads and Heat Dissipation Values - MTS 400 MHz Configurations

AC Heat AC
Heat When When DC Heat
MTS 400 MHz AC AC Charg- Charging -48 V DC
Configuration (W) (W) ing (W) (W) (W) (W) Comment
TETRA TX 10 W
MTS2 with 1 BR 140 130 520 185 135 125 No combining, low
power PA, no fans
MTS2 with 1 BR w. 165 155 545 210 160 150 Low power PA, no
Hybrid fans
MTS2 with 2 BRs 245 225 625 280 240 220 Two TX ant., low
power PA, no fans
MTS2 with 2 BRs w. 295 275 675 330 285 265 Low power PA, no
Hybrid fans
MTS4 with 1 BR w. 240 230 625 290 235 225 Low power PA,
MTCC/ATCC fans
MTS4 with 2 BRs w. 375 355 755 410 365 345 Low power PA,
MTCC/ATCC fans
MTS4 with 3 BRs w. 620 590 1380 705 605 575 Low power PA,
MTCC/ATCC fans
MTS4 with 4 BRs w. 760 720 2005 835 745 705 Low power PA,
MTCC/ATCC fans
TETRA TX 25 W / 40 W and TEDS TX 10 W
MTS LiTE 230 205 610 280 225 200 No combining, low
and power PA (25W)
MTS2 with 1 BR
MTS LiTE 370 345 750 420 365 340 No combining,
and high power PA
MTS2 with 1 BR (40W)
MTS2 with 1 BR w. 230 205 610 280 225 200 Low power PA
Hybrid (10W)
MTS2 with 1 BR w. 370 345 750 420 365 340 High power PA,
Hybrid fans (25W)
MTS2 with 2 BRs 430 380 810 470 420 370 Two TX ant., low
power PA (25W)

6802800U74-T January 2011 3-21


Service Current Rating Chapter 3: Site Preparation

Table 3-5 Typical Power Loads and Heat Dissipation Values - MTS 400 MHz Configurations
(Continued)
AC Heat AC
Heat When When DC Heat
MTS 400 MHz AC AC Charg- Charging -48 V DC
Configuration (W) (W) ing (W) (W) (W) (W) Comment
MTS2 with 2 BRs 630 580 1010 670 615 565 Two TX ant., high
power PA (40W)
MTS2 with 2 BRs w. 430 380 810 470 420 370 Low power PA
Hybrid (10W)
MTS2 with 2 BRs w. 630 580 1010 670 615 565 High power PA,
Hybrid fans (25W)
MTS4 with 1 BR w. 370 345 750 420 365 340 High power PA,
MTCC/ATCC fans
MTS4 with 2 BRs w. 630 580 1010 670 615 565 High power PA,
MTCC/ATCC fans
MTS4 with 3 BRs w. 1025 950 1785 1110 1000 925 High power PA,
MTCC/ATCC fans
MTS4 with 4 BRs w. 1300 1200 2065 1375 1270 1170 High power PA,
MTCC/ATCC fans

Table 3-6 Typical Power Loads and Heat Dissipation Values - Expansion Cabinet 400 MHz
Configuration

Expansion
Cabinet AC Heat AC
Consumptions Heat When When DC Heat
MTS 400 MHz AC AC Charg- Charging -48 V DC
Configuration (W) (W) ing (W) (W) (W) (W) Comment
TETRA TX 10 W
MTS4 Exp. Cab. w 1 240 230 625 290 235 225 Low power PA,
BR w. MTCC/ATCC fans
MTS4 Exp. Cab. 375 355 755 410 365 345 Low power PA,
w. 2 BRs w. fans
MTCC/ATCC
MTS4 Exp. Cab. 620 590 1380 705 605 575 Low power PA,
w. 3 BRs w. fans
MTCC/ATCC
MTS4 Exp. Cab. 760 720 2005 835 745 705 Low power PA,
w. 4 BRs w. fans
MTCC/ATCC
TETRA TX 25 W and TEDS TX 10 W
MTS4 Exp. Cab. 370 345 750 420 365 340 High power PA,
w. 1 BR w. fans
MTCC/ATCC

3-22 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Service Current Rating

Table 3-6 Typical Power Loads and Heat Dissipation Values - Expansion Cabinet 400 MHz
Configuration (Continued)
Expansion
Cabinet AC Heat AC
Consumptions Heat When When DC Heat
MTS 400 MHz AC AC Charg- Charging -48 V DC
Configuration (W) (W) ing (W) (W) (W) (W) Comment
MTS4 Exp. Cab. 630 580 1010 670 615 565 High power PA,
w. 2 BRs w. fans
MTCC/ATCC
MTS4 Exp. Cab. 1025 950 1785 1110 1000 925 High power PA,
w. 3 BRs w. fans
MTCC/ATCC
MTS4 Exp. Cab. 1300 1200 2065 1375 1270 1170 High power PA,
w. 4 BRs w. fans
MTCC/ATCC

Table 3-7 Typical Power Loads and Heat Dissipation Values - MTS 260 MHz Configurations

AC Heat AC
Heat When When DC Heat
MTS 260 MHz AC AC Charg- Charging -48 V DC
Configuration (W) (W) ing (W) (W) (W) (W) Comment
TETRA TX 10 W
MTS2 with 1 BR 140 130 520 185 135 125 No combining, low
power PA, no fans
MTS2 with 1 BR w. 165 155 545 210 160 150 Low power PA, no
Hybrid fans
MTS2 with 2 BRs 245 225 625 280 240 220 Two TX ant., low
power PA, no fans
MTS2 with 2 BRs w. 295 275 675 330 285 265 Low power PA, no
Hybrid fans
MTS4 with 1 BR w. 240 230 625 290 235 225 Low power PA,
ATCC fans
MTS4 with 2 BRs w. 375 355 755 410 365 345 Low power PA,
ATCC fans
MTS4 with 3 BRs w. 620 590 1380 705 605 575 Low power PA,
ATCC fans
MTS4 with 4 BRs w. 760 720 2005 835 745 705 Low power PA,
ATCC fans
TETRA TX 25 W
MTS2 with 1 BR 230 205 610 280 225 200 No combining, low
power PA
MTS2 with 2 BRs 430 380 810 470 420 370 Two TX ant., low
power PA

6802800U74-T January 2011 3-23


Service Current Rating Chapter 3: Site Preparation

Table 3-8 Typical Power Loads and Heat Dissipation Values - Expansion Cabinet 260 MHz
Configuration

Expansion
Cabinet AC Heat AC
Consumptions Heat When When DC Heat
MTS 260 MHz AC AC Charg- Charging -48 V DC
Configuration (W) (W) ing (W) (W) (W) (W) Comment
TETRA TX 10 W
MTS4 Exp. Cab. w 240 230 625 290 235 225 Low power PA,
1 BR w. ATCC fans
MTS4 Exp. Cab. w. 375 355 755 410 365 345 Low power PA,
2 BRs w. ATCC fans
MTS4 Exp. Cab. w. 620 590 1380 705 605 575 Low power PA,
3 BRs w. ATCC fans
MTS4 Exp. Cab. w. 760 720 2005 835 745 705 Low power PA,
4 BRs w. ATCC fans

Table 3-9 Typical Power Loads and Heat Dissipation Values - MTS 800 MHz Configuration

AC Heat AC
Heat When When DC Heat
MTS 800 MHz AC AC Charg- Charging -48 V DC
Configuration (W) (W) ing (W) (W) (W) (W) Comment
TETRA TX 10 W
MTS LiTE 280 270 660 325 215 205 No combining,
and high power PA,
MTS2 with 1 BR fans
MTS2 with 1 BR w. 320 310 705 370 235 225 High power PA,
Hybrid fans
MTS2 with 2 BRs 445 425 825 480 315 295 Two TX ant., low
power PA, fans
MTS2 with 2 BRs w. 530 510 915 570 365 345 High power PA,
Hybrid fans
MTS4 with 1 BR w. 320 310 705 370 235 225 High power PA,
MTCC/ATCC fans
MTS4 with 2 BRs w. 530 510 915 570 365 345 High power PA,
MTCC/ATCC fans
MTS4 with 3 BRs w. 855 825 1620 940 605 575 High power PA,
MTCC/ATCC fans
MTS4 with 4 BRs w. 1080 1040 1840 1155 745 705 High power PA,
MTCC/ATCC fans
TETRA TX 25 W and TEDS TX 10 W
MTS LiTE 330 305 715 380 325 300 No combining,
and High power PA,
MTS2 with 1 BR fans

3-24 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Service Current Rating

Table 3-9 Typical Power Loads and Heat Dissipation Values - MTS 800 MHz Configuration
(Continued)
AC Heat AC
Heat When When DC Heat
MTS 800 MHz AC AC Charg- Charging -48 V DC
Configuration (W) (W) ing (W) (W) (W) (W) Comment
MTS2 with 1 BR w. 405 380 790 455 395 370 High power PA,
Hybrid fans
MTS2 with 2 BRs 550 500 930 590 540 490 Two TX ant., High
power PA, fans
MTS2 with 2 BRs w. 700 650 1085 740 685 635 High power PA,
Hybrid fans
MTS4 with 1 BR w. 405 380 790 455 395 370 High power PA,
MTCC/ATCC fans
MTS4 with 2 BRs w. 700 650 1085 740 685 635 High power PA,
MTCC/ATCC fans
MTS4 with 3 BRs w. 1130 1055 1890 1215 1105 1030 High power PA,
MTCC/ATCC fans
MTS4 with 4 BRs w. 1445 1345 2205 1515 1410 1310 High power PA,
MTCC/ATCC fans

Table 3-10 Typical Power Loads and Heat Dissipation Values - Expansion Cabinet 800 MHz
Configuration

Expansion
Cabinet AC Heat AC
Consumptions Heat When When DC Heat
MTS 800 MHz AC AC Charg- Charging -48 V DC
Configuration (W) (W) ing (W) (W) (W) (W) Comment
TETRA TX 10 W
MTS4 with 1 BR w. 320 310 705 370 235 225 High power PA,
MTCC/ATCC fans
MTS4 with 2 BRs w. 530 510 915 570 365 345 High power PA,
MTCC/ATCC fans
MTS4 with 3 BRs w. 855 825 1620 940 605 575 High power PA,
MTCC/ATCC fans
MTS4 with 4 BRs w. 1080 1040 1840 1155 745 705 High power PA,
MTCC/ATCC fans
TETRA TX 25 W and TEDS TX 10 W
MTS4 with 1 BR w. 405 380 790 455 395 370 High power PA,
MTCC/ATCC fans
MTS4 with 2 BRs w. 700 650 1085 740 685 635 High power PA,
MTCC/ATCC fans
MTS4 with 3 BRs w. 1130 1055 1890 1215 1105 1030 High power PA,
MTCC/ATCC fans

6802800U74-T January 2011 3-25


AC and DC Current Load Chapter 3: Site Preparation

Table 3-10 Typical Power Loads and Heat Dissipation Values - Expansion Cabinet 800 MHz
Configuration (Continued)
Expansion
Cabinet AC Heat AC
Consumptions Heat When When DC Heat
MTS 800 MHz AC AC Charg- Charging -48 V DC
Configuration (W) (W) ing (W) (W) (W) (W) Comment
MTS4 with 4 BRs w. 1445 1345 2205 1515 1410 1310 High power PA,
MTCC/ATCC fans

• All the values in the table are calculated from AC = 230 V


• Add additional 5% for 110 V
• Charging is up to 6 A per PSU

AC and DC Current Load

The MTS has a certain power consumption even when the Power Supply Unit (PSU)
is switched off (2 mA). The switch only disconnects DC outputs and charging
currents. In case of field repair, all PSU connecting cables have to be disconnected.

Backup Battery
The backup battery is normally located near the cabinet(s). The recommended batteries to be used are
a VRLA (Valve Regulated Lead Acid) recombination type, with -48 VDC nominal.

Surge Arrestors
Please refer to "Surge Arrestors and Suppliers" in Appendix A, "Field Replaceable
Units (FRUs)" for more information.

Lightning arrestors should be installed to transport lightning strikes away from the equipment.

Install a lightning rod on a tower leg other than the leg to which you mount the antenna.

3-26 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Power Panel

Power Panel
Motorola recommends that all sites where an MTS will be installed use a standardized power panel
including circuit breaker layout. Vacant space should be left to allow for future requirements.

6802800U74-T January 2011 3-27


User Alarms, Control Outputs, and Door Alarm Chapter 3: Site Preparation

User Alarms, Control Outputs, and Door Alarm


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

The MTS in all configurations has the following alarm inputs and control outputs:
• 15 x 12 V opto-isolated alarm inputs - available on the junction panel
◦ Alarm inputs and Alarm ground are floating
• 2 x Form A relay outputs with Common and Normally Open contacts -
available on the junction panel
• DOOR alarm - connected to the Site Controller

All 15 alarm inputs and Door alarm are using the same Alarm Ground. All these alarms
and controls are connected directly to the Site Controller (SC).
The Expansion Cabinet only offers the Door alarm feature.
For detailed information refer to "External Alarm Cabling" in Chapter 4, "Hardware
Installation" and "User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS Cabling" in
Chapter 5, "Interconnection and Internal Cabling".
.
See Figure 3-9 for more detailed description of User Alarms input structure.

Figure 3-9 Opto-isolated Alarm Input Structure

3-28 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Grounding Requirements

Grounding Requirements
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

The methods and standards cited in the following paragraphs are typical. Local codes, statutes,
regulations, and/or standards shall supersede any information provided herein, as applicable.

The MTS site must meet certain specifications for adequate protection from
lightning induced transients. Proper ground installation methods are outlined
in the Motorola Standards and Guidelines for Communications Sites, R56. The
references cited earlier in this chapter shall also be followed.

Cabinet grounding wires may have been installed prior to cabinet installation. If
so, follow the instructions below.
Single-point ground method (where each cabinet is grounded to master ground using its own
ground wire) shall be used. Equipment cabinet shall use green (or green-yellow) insulated wire
with a minimum size of 16 mm2 CSA (#5 AWG) for ground wire.
Any external -48 VDC power system should be grounded in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions and any applicable local regulations.

The MTS cabinet is wired to positive earth but the Power Supply Unit inside
has a floating DC ground concept.
Different wire colors may be used according the local standards.
If the specified wire size is not available, use the next-larger available wire size.
During the installation of cabinet ground wires, be sure to check any factory-
installed internal ground connections for tightness.

6802800U74-T January 2011 3-29


Grounding Requirements Chapter 3: Site Preparation

This page intentionally left blank.

3-30 6802800U74-T January 2011


Chapter

4
Hardware Installation
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

This chapter covers the following topics:


• "Installation Overview"
• "Pre-Installation Checklist"
• "Cabinet Transportation"
• "Cabinet Installation"
• "Electrical Connections"
• "RF Antenna Connections"
• "Expansion Cabinet Connections"
• "GPS Connections"
• "X.21, E1-120Ω Cabling"
• "External Alarm Cabling"
• "Final Check-out"
• "Recommended Tools, Parts, and Test Equipment for Installation"

Installation Overview
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

The MTS cabinets can be mounted in two ways:


• Directly to the floor using the mounting brackets
• Using the mounting plate
MTS LiTE, MTS 2, MTS 4, and the Expansion Cabinet all have four mounting holes for leveling feet. However,
the position of the holes is not identical for the cabinets due to the stability of the different size cabinets.
Maintenance can generally be achieved using front access. Top access is required
for connecting the external services.
The procedures described in this chapter assume the field technician or installer has knowledge of the installa-
tion techniques contained in the Motorola Standards and Guidelines for Communications Sites, R56 manual.

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-1


Personnel Considerations Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

For full instructions and guidelines, please always refer to Motorola Standards and
Guidelines for Communications Sites, R56 manual.
Prior to performing the installation procedures, the site has to be prepared with all associated
antennas, communications lines, and other related site equipment.
In an MTS site, the term “cabinet” is a generic term used to refer to Fixed Network
Equipment (FNE) mounted in different types of frames. It does not refer in any
way to building electrical cabinets, outdoor utility cabinets, or some types of
equipment shelters commonly known as cabinets.

Personnel Considerations
The following personnel are typically required to install an MTS site:
• An installation supervisor.
• A minimum of two installers per MTS site. (Two installers could include the supervisor,
provided there are a minimum of two persons on each MTS site at all times.)
• A commissioning engineer (attends only during the commissioning stage).

Receipt of Equipment
Inspection of the MTS equipment must be performed as soon as all equipment is unpacked. Check
the MTS equipment against the itemized packing list to ensure that all equipment was received. If
available, check the sales order with the packing list to account for all equipment ordered. Contact
your Motorola representative to report the missing items and for additional information.

If obvious damage has occurred to the shipping containers before unpacking, contact the
shipping agent and ask that a representative of their company be present while the equipment
is unpacked. Then your Motorola representative should be informed.
Observe guidelines for safe handling of electrostatic sensitive devices or equipment
to prevent electrostatic damage.

4-2 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Receipt of Equipment

An anti-static wrist strap should always be worn when handling any electrical component.

Please refer to Appendix C.

• Check for loose or damaged equipment


• Check all sides of the cabinet for dents, scratches, or other damage
• Check all cabinet wiring to ensure connections are in place
• Check modules and boards for physical damage to controls or connectors
• Verify that ground straps are secure
If any equipment is damaged, contact the shipping company immediately, and
then your Motorola representative.

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-3


Pre-Installation Checklist Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Pre-Installation Checklist
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Proper installation ensures the best possible performance and reliability of the MTS station.
Preinstallation planning is required. This includes considering the mounting location of the cabinet
in relation to input power, antennas, and site link interfaces. Also, consider the site environment
conditions, the particular mounting method, and required tools and equipment.
The installation shall only be carried out after the following activities are completed:
• Antenna installation (including GPS antenna)
• New building earth (if required)
• The installation of the Ethernet, X.21 or E1 link (to the control centre)
by the site link service provider
• The installation of the cable tray in the equipment room
• The increase in the capacity of the mains power supply (if required)
• The increase in the capacity of the stand-by mains power supply (if required)
• The completion of any civil works on the site (for example, new or modified
accommodation, new access road, and so on)
• The position in which each piece of equipment will be placed on the floor
has been marked and agreed
• Reinforcement of site floor to accommodate load of site equipment (if required)
• All the equipment has been delivered to site and placed in their final positions
by the transportation company

Proper surge protection should be installed on Ethernet/E1/X.21 site links, all antennas,
and power inputs to prevent potential damage to the MTS.
For full instructions and guidelines, please always refer to Motorola Standards and
Guidelines for Communications Sites, R56 manual .

4-4 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Cabinet Transportation

Cabinet Transportation
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

It is recommended that to move and locate all the equipments to the final position, a transportation
company specializing in the moving of heavy electronic equipment should be used.

Safety Considerations

Crush hazard could result in personal injury or equipment damage. MTS


LiTe cabinet with packaging can weigh up to 49 kg, MTS 2 cabinet with
packaging up to 64 kg and MTS 4 cabinet with packaging up to 170 kg.
Follow instructions below when moving the cabinet.

Equipment racks should only be lifted without the use of lifting equipment when there are sufficient personnel
available to ensure that regulations covering Health and Safety are not breached. Motorola recommends the
use of appropriate powered mechanical lifting apparatus for moving and lifting the equipment racks. In
addition to these points, refer to and comply with any local regulations that govern the use of lifting equipment.

Moving the MTS LiTE and MTS 2 Cabinets


For MTS LiTE and MTS 2 cabinet, Motorola recommends the use of a sack trolley or
appropriate lifting straps for transportation.

A sack trolley will generally be used from the front of the MTS LiTE or the MTS 2 as
this allows it to be moved into position. Protective padding or cardboard should
be placed between the MTS and the sack trolley to prevent equipment damage.

Lifting the MTS 4 and Expansion Cabinet


Use appropriate lifting apparatus to lift the racks complying with all applicable health and safety
regulations and any other regulations applicable to lifting heavy equipment.
If it is necessary to lift the equipment rack, use two (2) lifting brackets provided with the accessory
kit. Follow the instructions below to use them for cabinet lifting
1. Screw the lifting brackets to both sides of the MTS 4 cabinet. The holes are pre-drilled.

2. Use the three screws for each bracket.

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-5


Lifting the MTS 4 and Expansion Cabinet Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

3. The screws must be tightened to between 10-13.5 Nm (91-120 in-lbs) torque.

Before attempting to use, visually check the lifting brackets and associated rack hardware for
damage that may have occurred during transit. If any damage is apparent, contact Motorola for
replacement. Correct lifting bracket tightness and alignment are crucial to ensure that the lifting
bracket assembly will perform to its intended lifting capacity.
Both lifting brackets must be used when lifting the equipment rack. When lifting from a center
point, the distance measured between the lifting point and the top surface of the cabinet must be
minimum 350 mm to ensure that the proper lifting angle is maintained (see Figure 4-1). Using a
length shorter than that specified could cause the lifting brackets to fail.

Figure 4-1 Lifting Point for MTS 4 and Expansion Cabinet

If lifting brackets are removed or become loose, they must be properly installed before
they are used to lift the equipment rack.
When placing the MTS 4 cabinet back on the floor, it can be easily decided whether to put it
in the vertical (A) or horizontal (B) position, see Figure 4-2.

4-6 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Lifting the MTS 4 and Expansion Cabinet

Figure 4-2 Placing the MTS 4 and the Expansion Cabinet in the Vertical or Horizontal Position

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-7


Cabinet Installation Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Cabinet Installation
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

This section provides procedures for mounting the MTS cabinet within a site.

The free space above the cabinet(s) must be 20 cm at minimum to enable


service access and assure the passive cooling ventilation. Please note that
especially antenna cabling may require additional space. Allow at least 80 cm
of floor space in front of the cabinet(s) to permit access during installation.
Although all maintenance, expansion, cabling, and antenna connections can
be performed from the front or top. The required space towards the wall is
ensured by an integrated “spacer” on back of the cabinet.
The cabinet must be secured to the floor for optimum stability.

Cabinet Bracing Considerations


The MTS cabinet is self-supporting. In seismically active areas, additional bracing of the cabinet
could be required. However, the bracing hardware must be locally procured.

There are no specific procedures within this manual for bracing cabinets in active seismic areas.

4-8 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Floor Mounting Instructions

Floor Mounting Instructions


The MTS LiTE, MTS 2, MTS 4, and Expansion Cabinets can be mounted directly to the
floor using the mounting brackets, see Figure 4-3.

The floor mounting brackets are not part of standard MTS shipment. If floor mounting
brackets are to be used, they must be ordered as an accessory.
Partnumber 0166559A01 STANDARD FLOOR MOUNT SET MTS

Figure 4-3 MTS – Mounting Brackets

Perform Procedure 4-1 to properly install the cabinet using the mounting brackets within the site facility.
Procedure 4-1 How to Install the Cabinet Using the Mounting Brackets

1 Check that the mounting brackets have been correctly positioned in the equipment room, see
Figure 3-2 for MTS LiTE, Figure 3-4 for MTS 2, Figure 3-6 for MTS 4, and Figure 3-8 for
Expansion Cabinet site.

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-9


Floor Mounting Instructions Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Procedure 4-1 How to Install the Cabinet Using the Mounting Brackets (Continued)
2 Mark and then drill the floor according to the dimensions shown in Figure 4-4 and Figure 4-5.
Remember to keep the 13 mm distance behind the mounting plate. In each bracket, a 12 mm
hole is pre-drilled. The front brackets can be placed anywhere around the leveling feet at a
radius of 60 mm or 105 mm (either hidden under the cabinet, or stuck out for easy mounting),
see the circles in Figure 4-4 and Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-4 MTS LiTE / MTS 2 – Drill Hole Position for the Mounting Brackets

Figure 4-5 MTS 4 and Expansion Cabinet – Drill Hole Position for the Mounting
Brackets

4-10 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Mounting Plate Instructions

Procedure 4-1 How to Install the Cabinet Using the Mounting Brackets (Continued)
3 Secure the two rear brackets to the floor using one screw for each bracket.
4 Place 2 screws for each front bracket (2x2) in the drilled holes. Screw them almost all the way
down but leave space rotate the bracket into position later.
5 Move the MTS cabinet near to the mounting brackets.
6 Move the MTS backwards ensuring that the rear leveling feet of the MTS locate in the
corresponding cups in the rear mounting brackets.
7 Push the front brackets over the corresponding leveling feet and swing them until they engage
the screws.
8 Fully tighten the screws in the front brackets, see Figure 4-6.

Figure 4-6 MTS – Mounting Brackets and the Cabinet

Mounting Plate Instructions


To mount the cabinet using the mounting plate, follow Process 4-1.
Process 4-1 Mounting the Cabinet Using Mounting Plate

1 Mount the mounting plate to the floor, see "Mounting a Mounting Plate".
2 Secure the cabinet to the mounting plate, see "Securing Cabinet to a Mounting Plate".

Recommended clearances are shown in Figure 3-2 for MTS LiTE, Figure 3-4 for MTS 2,
in Figure 3-6 for MTS 4, and in Figure 3-8 for Expansion Cabinet.

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-11


Mounting a Mounting Plate Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Mounting a Mounting Plate


Follow Procedure 4-2 to properly install the mounting plate within the site facility.

MTS LiTE/MTS 2 and MTS 4/Expansion Cabinet mounting plates have


different size and hole positions.

Figure 4-7 MTS Mounting Plate

The mounting plate is normally secured directly to the floor.

The use of an insulated base may be considered where additional lightning protection is required
or where local regulations require this (see R56 Manual for further information).

4-12 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Mounting a Mounting Plate

Procedure 4-2 How to Mount a Mounting Plate

1 Ensure that the mounting plate has been correctly positioned in the equipment room, see Figure
3-2 for MTS LiTE, Figure 3-4 for MTS 2, Figure 3-6 for MTS 4, and Figure 3-8 for Expansion
Cabinet.
2 Use the mounting plate as drilling template or mark the floor according to the dimensions shown
in Figure 4-8 and Figure 4-9. Remember to keep the 13 mm distance behind the mounting
plate. Four 12 mm holes are pre-drilled. Additional holes may be drilled in the mounting plate
where required.

Figure 4-8 MTS LiTE/MTS 2 – Drill Hole Position for the Mounting Plate

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-13


Securing Cabinet to a Mounting Plate Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Procedure 4-2 How to Mount a Mounting Plate (Continued)

Figure 4-9 MTS 4 – Drill Hole Position for the Mounting Plate

3 Secure all mounting locations using nuts and lock washers.


4 Fully tighten all mounting nuts securing the mounting plate to the floor.

Securing Cabinet to a Mounting Plate


Procedure 4-3 How to Secure Cabinet to a Mounting Plate

1 Move the MTS cabinet near to the mounting plate which has been fixed to the floor as described
before.
2 Bring the MTS in position and lower it onto the mounting plate. Care must be taken not to lower
the MTS onto the locating tabs on the rear of the mounting plate to avoid bending.
3 Move the MTS from the front to the back ensuring that the leveling feet of the MTS locate in the
corresponding slots in the mounting plate.

4-14 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Securing Cabinet to a Mounting Plate

Procedure 4-3 How to Secure Cabinet to a Mounting Plate (Continued)


4 Secure the MTS on the mounting plate using the two front security M10 screws. If the leveling
feet are in the lowest position, M10x40 screws must be used. The position of the screws is
shown in Figure 4-10. Recommended tool: allen wrench for M10, SW8 HEX screws (supplied
with the mounting plate kit).

Figure 4-10 Position of Security Screws

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-15


Wall Fixing Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Wall Fixing
The MTS 4 and Expansion Cabinet have the option of being fixed to a wall for extra stability. To do this, use
the two M6 holes in the back of either the MTS 4 cabinet or the Expansion Cabinet. See Figure 4-11.

Figure 4-11 MTS – Wall Fixing

Use brackets and screws appropriate for the site wall properties.

4-16 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Electrical Connections

Electrical Connections
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Battery backup systems are not manufactured by Motorola. Consult the manufacturer’s
instruction manual and other pertinent documentation for installing battery systems. Any
local regulations shall be adhered to when installing battery equipment.
The equipment cabinet is shipped with all cabling within the cabinet factory-installed. If necessary,
refer to Chapter 5, "Interconnection and Internal Cabling", for cabling within the cabinet.
After the station equipment has been mechanically installed, electrical connections must be
made. This involves making the following connections to:
• Grounding Cables
• Power Supply Cables
• Antenna Cables
• GPS Cables
◦ Remote GPS Receiver Cable
◦ Internal GPS Cable
• Site Link Cables
• Alarm System Cables

Proper surge protection should be installed on Ethernet/E1/X.21 site links, all antennas and
power inputs to prevent potential damage to the MTS. For more information, please refer to
"Surge Arrestors and Suppliers" in Appendix A, "Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)".
For full instructions and guidelines, please refer always to Motorola Standards
and Guidelines for Communications Sites, R56.

Grounding Connection
Various cabling from the equipment cabinet to external equipment is made through the MTS Junction Panel
located at the top-rear of the equipment cabinet. The Junction Panel is accessed from the top of the cabinet.

Depending on system configuration, not all connector locations on Junction Panel are populated.
Cabinet grounding wires may have been installed prior to the cabinet installation. If
so, follow the instructions below.

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-17


Grounding Connection Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

If grounding wires have not yet been installed, refer to "Grounding Requirements"
in Chapter 3, "Site Preparation".
Single-point ground method (where each cabinet is grounded to master ground using its own
ground wire) shall be used. The cabinet shall use green (or green-yellow) insulated wire with
a minimum size of 16 mm2 CSA (#5 AWG) for ground wire.
The MTS is connected to the site ground through the M10 station ground point located on the junction
panel, see Figure 4-12 for MTS LiTE, Figure 4-13 for MTS 2 and Figure 4-14 for MTS 4. This connection
is essential for the protection of the equipment against lightning induced surges.
If the specified wire size is not available, use the next-larger available wire size. During the installation of
cabinet ground wires, ensure to check any factory-installed internal ground connections for tightness.

Figure 4-13 and Figure 4-14 depicts the newer version of the MTS Junction Panel.
There may be small differences in older configurations.

Figure 4-12 Station Ground Point on the MTS LiTE Junction Panel

4-18 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Grounding Connection

Figure 4-13 Station Ground Point on the MTS 2 Junction Panel

Figure 4-14 Station Ground Point on the MTS 4 Junction Panel

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-19


Grounding Connection Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Figure 4-15 Station Ground Point on the Expansion Cabinet Junction Panel

Procedure 4-4 How to Provide Grounding Connection to the Equipment Cabinet

1 Strip the end of the wire to be connected to the station ground point in the junction panel.
2 Using an appropriate tool, attach a crimp lug onto the cabinet ground wire. Ensure that the lug is
securely fastened to wire.
3 Use a star type and a regular lock washer, which should be placed between the screw and the
lug (as shown in Figure 4-16). The regular lock washer must be placed above the lug. The lug
must have direct contact to the surface of the cabinet (no washer of any kind between the lug
and the surface to which it contacts).

Figure 4-16 Cabinet Grounding

4-20 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Battery System Grounding

Procedure 4-4 How to Provide Grounding Connection to the Equipment Cabinet (Continued)
4 Using the M10 bolt provided, secure the cabinet ground wire to the M10 nut located on the
junction panel.
5 Ground connections should be checked after installation. Please refer to "Recommended Torque"
for information about the torque.

Battery System Grounding


Ground the battery cabinet (if used) in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions
and any applicable local regulations.

Ground Connections Check


Perform the following procedure to ensure adequacy of cabinet-to-facility ground (earth) connections.
Procedure 4-5 How to Ensure Adequacy of Cabinet – to – Facility Ground Connections

1 Install the earth cable between the building earth and the earth point on the MTS cabinet.
2 With a Milliohmmeter, check that the earth connection between the MTS Cabinet and the
building earth in the room is < 0.1 Ω.

Power Supply Connections


One of the following power supply connections is required for the MTS:
• DC in/out – within -41 VDC to -60 VDC – for MTS 4 two connectors are available
• AC in – within 110 VAC to 240 VAC (nominal values) – for MTS 4 two connectors are available

–48 VDC Input Power and Backup Battery Charging Connections


The –48 VDC connectors are used for:
• Supplying the MTS with power in the DC only mode – in DC only mode the MTS
takes the power from a separate –48 VDC facility power system
• For charging backup batteries in the AC mode

An external disconnect device is required on the DC power supply line.

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-21


–48 VDC Input Power and Backup Battery Charging Connections Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

If the DC input on the station is connected to backup batteries, an external Low


Voltage Disconnect (LVD) device should be introduced directly in the power line
in order to protect the batteries against deep discharge. On the MTS2, one relay
rated min. 20A/55 VDC should be introduced. And for the MTS4, two of these
units should be used, one for each of the two incoming DC lines. Alternatively
for the MTS4, one relay rated 40A/55 VDC can be used if the two DC lines are
connected to one battery pack. The relays should be controlled in a way that they
disconnect the batteries once the voltage drops below 40.5 V, where the PSU in
the MTS shuts down. Two Motorola kits are available for this purpose:
• MTS2 LVD RELAY RETROFIT KIT (Kit Number: GMDN2206A)
• MTS4 LVD RELAY RETROFIT KIT (Kit Number: GMDN2207A)

Figure 4-18 and Figure 4-19 depicts the newer version of the MTS Junction Panel.
There may be small differences in older configurations.

Figure 4-17 –48 VDC Connection on the MTS LiTE Junction Panel

4-22 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual –48
VDC Input Power and Backup Battery Charging Connections

Figure 4-18 –48 VDC Connection on the MTS 2 Junction Panel

Figure 4-19 -48 VDC Connections on the MTS 4 Junction Panel

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-23


–48 VDC Input Power and Backup Battery Charging Connections Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Figure 4-20 -48 VDC Connections on the Expansion Cabinet Junction Panel

Procedure 4-6 How to Connect –48 VDC Power Source to Equipment Cabinet

Make sure that all power is off to prevent accidental contact with high
energy and injury to personnel.
2 Route two runs of bulk wiring between the MTS DC input connector and the facility power
supply -48 VDC connections.
3 Make sure that the wire runs are properly routed to the cabinet, allowing adequate slack.
4 Connect the free ends of the wire to the MTS DC plug, which is provided with the MTS.

Do not use other types of DC Connectors than specified here.


Following the industry standard for positive earth systems unless local regulations state
something different:
• Blue/Black wires: see Figure 4-21 for MTS 2 and Figure 4-23 for MTS 4.
• Red/Black wires: see Figure 4-22 for MTS 2 and Figure 4-24 for MTS 4.

4-24 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual –48
VDC Input Power and Backup Battery Charging Connections

Procedure 4-6 How to Connect –48 VDC Power Source to Equipment Cabinet (Continued)

Figure 4-21 DC Plug MTS LiTE/MTS 2 (Motorola P/N 3166501A01) – Blue/Black Wires

Figure 4-22 DC Plug MTS LiTE/MTS 2 (Motorola P/N 3166501A01) – Red/Black Wires

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-25


Determining Power Connection Wire Size Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Procedure 4-6 How to Connect –48 VDC Power Source to Equipment Cabinet (Continued)

Figure 4-23 DC Plug MTS 4 (Motorola P/N 3166501A02) – Blue/Black Wires

Figure 4-24 DC Plug MTS 4 (Motorola P/N 3166501A02) – Red/Black Wires

5 Connect the other end of wires to -48 VDC output in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions
and any applicable local regulations.
6 The MTS DC plug shall be fixed to the DC connector using the plug’s screws.

Determining Power Connection Wire Size

Wire size recommendations contained herein reflect Motorola engineering


requirements
for proper system operation. Local regulations shall be adhered to in any case and
shall supersede any other specifications in this manual, where applicable.

4-26 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual 110 VAC – 240 VAC Input Power Connections

Wire used for DC connection shall not be smaller than 3.3 mm2 (#12 AWG) or
greater than 5.3 mm2 CSA (#10 AWG). Blue is the color recommended for -48
VDC wires. However, if the wire is not color-coded, mark these leads with a
colored tracer on each end. Wire used for AC connection shall not be smaller
than 1.3 mm2 CSA (#16 AWG) or greater than 2.1 mm2 (#14 AWG).

110 VAC – 240 VAC Input Power Connections

Figure 4-26 and Figure 4-27 depicts the newer version of the MTS Junction Panel.
There may be small differences in older configurations.

Figure 4-25 110-240 VAC Connection on the MTS LiTE Junction Panel

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-27


110 VAC – 240 VAC Input Power Connections Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Figure 4-26 110-240 VAC Connection on the MTS 2 Junction Panel

Figure 4-27 110 – 240 VAC Connections on the MTS 4 Junction Panel

4-28 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual 110 VAC – 240 VAC Input Power Connections

Figure 4-28 110-240 VAC Connections on the Expansion Cabinet Junction Panel

Make sure all power to the Power Supply Unit is switched off to prevent
accidental contact with high energy and injury to personnel.

Procedure 4-7 How to Connect 110 – 240 VAC Power Source to Equipment Cabinet.

1 Connect the AC cable to the AC socket (type IEC C15 line socket, Motorola P/N 3166502A01),
which is provided with the MTS.

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-29


Backup Battery Sensor Connections Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Procedure 4-7 How to Connect 110 – 240 VAC Power Source to Equipment Cabinet. (Continued)
2 Insert the AC socket into the AC input connector on the MTS and fix with the retaining clip as
shown in Figure 4-29. This fixture will only work with the supplied IEC connector.

Figure 4-29 AC Socket (IEC Connector)

3 Connect the other end of the AC cable to the facility AC outlet.

Backup Battery Sensor Connections

The temperature sensor is placed on the battery and connected to the PSU through the junction panel,
see Figure 4-30 for MTS LiTE, Figure 4-31 for MTS 2 and Figure 4-32 for MTS 4.

4-30 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Backup Battery Sensor Connections

Figure 4-30 Backup Battery Sensor Connection on MTS LiTE Junction Panel

Figure 4-31 and Figure 4-32 depicts the newer version of the MTS Junction Panel.
There may be small differences in older configurations.

Figure 4-31 Backup Battery Sensor Connection on MTS 2 Junction Panel

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-31


Backup Battery Sensor Connections Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Figure 4-32 Backup Battery Sensor Connections on MTS 4 Junction Panel

Figure 4-33 Backup Battery Sensor Connections on Expansion Cabinet Junction Panel

Make sure all power to the Power Supply Unit is off to prevent accidental
contact with high energy and injury to personnel.

4-32 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS LVD Kit Installation

Procedure 4-8 How to Connect Backup Battery Sensor to the Equipment Cabinet

1 Plug the temperature sensor cable (Motorola P/N 0166501N84) into the 2-pin connector on one
side and attach the sensor to the backup battery according to the manufacturer’s instructions,
which are supplied with the accessory kit. See Figure 4-34.

Figure 4-34 Backup Battery Temperature Sensor Cable

2 Make AC cable connection between the facility AC outlet and AC connector on the junction
panel using plug (Motorola P/N 3166502A01 for MTS LiTE/MTS 2 and Motorola P/N
3166502A02 for MTS 4) as described in "110 VAC – 240 VAC Input Power Connections".
3 Make DC cable connection between backup battery and DC connector on the junction panel
using the DC plug (Motorola P/N 3166501A01) as described for -48 VDC input power
connections in "–48 VDC Input Power and Backup Battery Charging Connections". It is
recommended that an in-line fuse (20 A slow-blow type) should be installed in the negative
line near to the battery.

Ensure that all the battery temperature sensor cables are fitted into the battery
associated with the appropriate PSUs.

The MTS station is to be connected only to those backup batteries, which are in
accordance with the applicable electrical codes for the end use country.

Backup battery systems are not manufactured by Motorola. Consult the manufacturer’s
instruction manual and other pertinent documentation for installing a battery systems. Any
local regulations shall be adhered to when installing the battery equipment.

MTS LVD Kit Installation


This section provides a quick reference for installation of the LVD Kit for use with both MTS2 and
MTS4. The MTS LVD kit consist of an aluminium housing including Power relay and push button for
hot activation of LVD and controller cable for plugging the LVD to a MTS base station.

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-33


MTS LVD Kit Installation Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

When installed, the kit enables a low voltage disconnection option of batteries connected to a MTS backup
system, as a discharge of a battery pack below 40,5V can cause permanent damage.
The LVD also offers a push bottom which gives an override function, which will:
• activate cabin light, and
• power up the Base station power supply, which also will enable normal activation of the LVD.

Procedure 4-9 describes how to install the MTS LVD kit. For installing the MTS
LVD kit, the following tools are needed:
• PZ2 and PH2 screwdriver
• Hammer
• Cutting tool for cable ties, etc.
• 2 Nm torque tool and crimp tool for ring terminal (optional)

Figure 4-35, Figure 4-36, and Figure 4-37 depicts the relay connection as a diagrams.

Figure 4-35 MTS LVD Kit Relay Connection Diagram – Single PSU

Figure 4-36 MTS LVD Kit Relay Connection Diagram – Dual PSU, Dual Batteries

4-34 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS LVD Kit Installation

Figure 4-37 MTS LVD Kit Relay Connection Diagram – Dual PSU, Single Battery

The number of LVD Kits used depends on the type of MTS:


• For MTS2, only one LVD is necessary.
• For MTS4 with two batteries, two LVD devices have to be used (one LVD for each PSU).
• For MTS4 powered with a single battery, LVD battery cables should be connected in parallel.
LVD controller cables should be connected to separate PSUs so each PSU controls a LVD.
• For MTS with XHUB configuration, see the first two points in this list.

Procedure 4-9 How to Install the MTS LVD Kit

1 Unpack the kit and check if all items are present.

Working on live system is hazardous, switch off power!


2 1. Connect the battery cables (Ø6 ring terminals apply) using a PH2 screwdriver.
Recommended torque is max 2Nm.
2. Two spare Ø6 terminals for 16 mm2 cable are included. Special crimp tool apply on fitting
these (not included).
3. Click the protection cap on. Additional break away windows are available on cap allowing
multiple entry of cables.

Make sure no damage are done on cables by sharp edges on the cap.

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-35


MTS LVD Kit Installation Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Procedure 4-9 How to Install the MTS LVD Kit (Continued)

4. Check that cables are secured properly and tighten the included cable tie retainers.

The cables shall not touch the metal housing.

Be very careful not to short circuit the battery poles.

Figure 4-38 MTS LVD Kit Battery Cable Connections

3 Note the small + and – signs on the side of the relay.


The pole with the –sign is recommended to be connected to the – pole on the battery.

Figure 4-39 MTS LVD Kit Plus and Minus Signs

4-36 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS LVD Kit Installation

Procedure 4-9 How to Install the MTS LVD Kit (Continued)


4 Flip the backplate by hand, and insert the 2 rivet plugs as in Figure below.

Figure 4-40 MTS LVD Kit Backplate Plugs

5 Mount the LVD housing to the intended location, i.e. on top of the MTS as shown in Figure
below, using a hammer for snapping in the screw.

Figure 4-41 Mounting the MTS LVD Kit

The plug fits into any Ø7mm hole. Center diameter between the two rivet plugs
is 90mm
6 Locate the Power connector on the Site Controller and disconnect this.
7 Plug the LVD controller cable into the now empty power slot and plug the existing power plug
just removed in step above into the empty socket on the controller cable.
8 Secure LVD controller cable using cable ties to the best possible routing toward the LVD relay.
Avoid any potential damages on cable due to sharp edges etc.
9 Switch power ON.
10 Check if the relay is engaged, when MTS 4 is powered up.

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-37


RF Antenna Connections Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

RF Antenna Connections
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

In the MTS 2, the RF antenna connectors are placed on the junction panel, see Figure 4-42,
Figure 4-43 and Figure 4-44. In the MTS 4, the RF antenna connectors are located in the top
of the cabinet and integrated with the filter tray, see Figure 4-45.

Figure 4-42 Base Radio Antenna Connections – MTS LiTE

Figure 4-43 Base Radio Antenna Connections – MTS 2

4-38 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual RF Antenna Connections

Figure 4-44 Base Radio Antenna Connections – MTS 2 Non Duplexed

Figure 4-45 Base Radio Antenna Connections – MTS 4

The antenna leads should be dropped above the MTS cabinet as per the site plan. It is assumed that the Base
Radio antennas have been installed before and that the RFDS section is properly configured. (If required, refer
to Chapter 5, "Interconnection and Internal Cabling", section "RF Cabling" for RF cabling diagrams.)
Identify and tag all antenna cables designated for connection to the MTS. Be sure to
document this information for future use.

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-39


RF Antenna Connections Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Proper surge protection should be installed on RF inputs to prevent potential damage


to the MTS. Please refer to "Surge Arrestors and Suppliers" in Appendix A, "Field
Replaceable Units (FRUs)" for more information.
The antenna connectors are DIN 7–16. The center connector is usually silver coated,
the outer body is usually aluminum or silver. It is recommended that mating antenna
feed connectors match metal plating correspondingly.
The screens of the antenna cables have to be grounded near to the MTS in accordance
with the R56 guidelines and national standards.
Table 4-1 Antenna Connections

Low Power High Power


MTS RF Antenna Configuration Number of BRs
[W] [W]
MTS LiTE
TX/RX on 2 ant. 25 40 1 BR
TX on 1ant., RX on 1 ant. 25 40 1 BR
MTS 2
TX/RX on 2 ant. 25 40 (20) 1 – 2 BRs
TX on 2 ant., RX on 1 ant. 25 40 (20) 1 – 2 BRs
TX on 1ant., RX on 1 ant. 10 25 (10) 1 – 2 BRs
TX on 1 ant., RX on 2 ant. 10 25 (10) 1 – 2 BRs
MTS 4
TX/RX on 2 ant. 25 40 (20) 1 – 2 BRs
10 25 (10) 3 – 4 BRs
TX on 2 ant., RX on 1 ant. 25 40 (20) 1 – 2 BRs
10 25 (10) 3 – 4 BRs
TX on 2 ant., RX on 2 ant. 25 40 (20) 1 – 2 BRs
10 25 (10) 3 – 4 BRs
TX on 2 ant., RX on 3 ant. 25 40 (20) 1 – 2 BRs
10 25 (10) 3 – 4 BRs
TX on 1 ant., RX on 1 ant. 10 25 (10) 1 – 4 BRs
TX on 1 ant., RX on 2 ant. 10 25 (10) 1 – 4 BRs
TX on 1ant., RX on 2 ant. 10 25 (10) 1 – 4 BRs
TX on 1 ant., RX on 3 ant. 10 25 (10) 1 – 4 BRs

In the preceding table, Low Power is valid for 400 MHz and 260 MHz, while High Power is valid
for 400 MHz and 800 MHz.
The numbers illustrated are applicable for TETRA with TEDS numbers within parentheses.

4-40 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Expansion Cabinet Connections

Expansion Cabinet Connections


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

With an Expansion Cabinet, a site may be increased by up to four Base Radios per Expansion
Cabinet. The MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet can be placed on either the left side of the MTS 4 Prime
Cabinet or on the right side. Different scenarios of connecting the MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet
with the MTS 4 Prime Cabinet are described in the following sections.

TX Connections
Depending on the Prime Cabinet configuration, TX connections between the MTS 4 Prime Cabinet
and the MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet can be configured in two ways:
• Combining eight channels onto one Duplexer/Post Filter in the MTS 4 Prime
Cabinet using a phasing harness.
• Combining four channels from the MTS 4 Prime Cabinet onto one Duplexer/Post
Filter in the Prime Cabinet and combining four channels from the MTS 4 Expansion
Cabinet onto another Duplexer/Post Filter in the Prime Cabinet.

In Figure 4-46, all the eight channels (four channels from MTS 4 Prime Cabinet and four
channels from MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet) are combined using a phasing harness and connected
to one Duplexer/Post Filter in the MTS 4 Prime Cabinet.

Tx cable from Prime Cabinet to Expansion Cabinet is routed through the con-
junction hole on the side of the cabinets.

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-41


TX Connections Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Figure 4-46 Connection Between MTS 4 Prime Cabinet and MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet – Phasing
Harness

In Figure 4-47, four channels from MTS 4 Prime cabinet are combined and connected to one Duplexer/Post
Filter in the MTS 4 Prime Cabinet and four channels from the MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet are combined
and connected to a second Duplexer/Post Filter in the MTS 4 Prime Cabinet

Figure 4-47 Connections Between MTS 4 Prime Cabinet and MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet – Two
Filters

4-42 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Connections Between Site Controller and XHUB Controller

Connections Between Site Controller and XHUB Controller


Figure 4-48 illustrates how two SCs are connected to two XHUBs. SC 1/Exp Cab is connected to the
XHUB 1/Prime Cab and SC 2/Exp Cab is connected to XHUB 2/Prime Cab. Connections between the
Site Controller and the XHUB are the same, if redundant Site Controller is being used.

Ethernet cables from Prime Cabinet to Expansion Cabinet are routed through the
conjunction hole on the side of the cabinets.

Figure 4-48 Connections Between Site Controller and XHUB Controller

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-43


Connecting Power to the XHUB Controllers Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Connecting Power to the XHUB Controllers


Along with the XHUB Controller, the concept of Redundant PSU power is introduced. The power from PSU
3/DC Out is split into two, supplying power to both XHUBs through the Power 3 connector. The power from
PSU 4/DC Out is also split into two, bringing power through the Power 4 connector on both XHUBs.

Figure 4-49 Power Connection to the XHUB Controllers

CAN Bus Cabling


CAN Bus cabling between the MTS 4 Prime Cabinet and the MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet is
described in "Expansion Cabinet CAN Bus Cabling" on page 5-73.

4-44 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual RX Connection

RX Connection
RX connection between the MTS 4 Prime Cabinet is dependent on the diversity of the MTS 4 Prime Cabinet.
• For Single diversity, Filter 1 (far left) in the MTS 4 Prime Cabinet is connected
to the RX Splitter 1 in the Expansion Cabinet.
• For Dual diversity, Filter 1 (far left) in the MTS 4 Prime Cabinet is connected
to the RX Splitter 1 in the Expansion Cabinet; Filter 2 (far right) is connected
to the RX Splitter 2 in the Expansion Cabinet.
• For Triple diversity, Filter 1 (far left) in the MTS 4 Prime Cabinet is connected to the RX Splitter
1 in the Expansion Cabinet; Filter 2 (far right) is connected to the RX Splitter 2 in the Expansion
Cabinet; Filter 3 (in the middle) is connected to the RX Splitter 3 in the Expansion Cabinet.

Figure 4-50 RX Connection Between MTS 4 Prime Cabinet and MTS4 Expansion Cabinet

Rx connection cables between the MTS 4 Prime Cabinet and the Expansion Cabinet are
routed on the outside of the cabinet, as shown in Figure below.

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-45


RX Connection Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Figure 4-51 Holes in Top Lid for Rx Cables

4-46 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual GPS Connections

GPS Connections
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

The MTS Site Controller has an integrated GPS module and an option for a remote GPS module. The
selection is done by configuring MTS using the BTS Service Software (TESS).
The main purpose of the GPS module is to allow accurate absolute timing of less than ½ of a symbol
between adjacent base stations and to supply UTC (Universal Time Coordinate). Dimetra does not need the
functionality of measuring the cable delay at start-up. The Site Controller calculates the delay, no manual
calculation, or configuration is required, and supports connection to a remote GPS antenna that is 600 m away
or less. The cable delay if any will be configured by BTS Service Software (TESS). Default will be 0 ns.
The antenna/receiver must have a sufficiently clear view of the sky (10º above the horizon in all directions
without any obstructions) to be able to locate and track at least four satellites during initial power-up. The four
satellites (approx. 20183 km above earth) are used to establish a three dimensional fix (latitude, longitude, and
altitude) for the site. This process can take up to 30 minutes, but typically is completed in less than 5 minutes.
Once the position of the site has been established, the corresponding data is stored
in memory and normal operation resumes.

Site Reference Operation Modes


The ETSI standard allows two modes of operation of adjacent cells: Synchronized and Non-
Synchronized relative to the serving cell. The MTS uses GPS to synchronize to the same
time reference. For an adjacent cell to be indicated to be synchronized requires that both the
serving MTS and the adjacent cell are synchronized to GPS.
MTS can be configured through the BTS Service Software for two different operating
configurations, which control the synchronization mode:
• Automatic Synchronized Configuration (ASC)
This configuration is used to specify that the MTS should operate in synchronized mode
relative to GPS; however if the GPS reference is lost, the MTS continues to operate
in synchronized mode for a configurable period (free run time – no upper limit). It
should be noted that setting this value greater than the recommended values above may
mean the BTS is unable to maintain synchronisation and can result in call failures and
erratic network performance. If the GPS reference is not recovered in this time period,
the MTS switches to the non-synchronized mode. If an MTS is started when no GPS
reference is available, it operates in the non-synchronized mode.
Non-synchronized mode will not have optimized hand over performance. When operating in
non-synchronized mode, all the adjacent cells will be indicated as non-synchronized with
the MTS. By default the re-synchronization of MTS running non-synchronized is done
automatically whenever there is valid GPS reference signal and the site does not handle
traffic. Prolonged operation in non- synchronized mode will eventually lead to critical
alarms and the frequency accuracy of the MTS will no longer be guaranteed.
To maintain the frequency accuracy, it is necessary that the oscillator within the
MTS is periodically recalibrated. The periodic recalibration happens automatically
when a GPS reference is present. The critical alarms indicate that recalibration
is due and should be performed without delay.

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-47


Tracking Criteria Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

• Forced Non-Synchronized Configuration (FNC)


FNC is not recommended for System Release D6.0. In this configuration, the MTS
will always operate non- synchronized to GPS. The failure or lack of GPS will not
be reported as an alarm. The sets of events that are reported in ASC and FNC modes
are the same, however the events reported in ASC mode with Minor severity, in
FNC mode are reported with lower – Normal severity.
The MTS starts up in non-synchronized mode regardless of the presence of a GPS signal.
However if GPS is present, the site reference is trained accordingly. Prolonged operation in this
configuration without GPS eventually leads to critical alarms and the frequency accuracy of the
MTS is no longer guaranteed. Frequency accuracy is expected to be maintained for 4 to 8 years.
To maintain the frequency accuracy, it is necessary that the oscillator within the MTS is
periodically recalibrated (every 8th year (400 MHz and 260 MHz) or every 4th year (800 MHz)).
The periodic recalibration happens automatically when a GPS reference is present. If no GPS
reference is present, it is necessary to ship the Site Controller for calibration at a repair center.
The critical alarms indicate that recalibration is due and should be performed without delay.
It is possible to change configuration with BTS Service Software. The new
configuration will only be active after an MTS reset.
• NSC mode
This mode can be configured (for example, through TESS) for compatibility
reasons but will be treated as ASC.
• Non-GPS / Non-Synchronized mode
The Non-GPS / Non-Synchronized mode introduced in System Release D6.1 guarantees
frequency accuracy of the site reference and the introduction of a Network Time Server (NTS)
using Network Time Protocol (NTM) allows the MTS to operate in non-synchronized mode
without being characterized as a malfunction and with accurate frequency and Network time.
When the BTS is GPS non-synchronized and without GPS and if a NTS is
available the NTP time shall be used to maintain and adjust frequency stability,
network time for UTD and timestamps for BTS log.
If GPS is not available and NTS are configured with IP address(es) the time derived
from NTP shall be used for UTD and time stamping of BTS logs.
Only if the selected NTS are of sufficient accuracy and the BTS is configured for
“Allow NTS frequency locking” shall the NTS be used for frequency locking of the
OCXO. The usability of the NTS shall be based on NTS alarm condition, Stratum,
Precision, root distance, reference ID and reference time.
If GPS is not available and NTS is configured and allowed for locking and the BTS cannot
establish the connection to the NTS or the NTS is not usable for a period of more than a
NTS_Free_Run_Timer the operator shall be informed the NTS is failing.

Tracking Criteria
To allow a system to successfully initialize for the first time at a new location, the Position
Dilution Of Position (PDOP) must be less than 2.0. A low PDOP value indicates a low error
(higher accuracy) in the position calculated by the GPS receiver.

4-48 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual GPS Start Up

PDOP is an accuracy factor, which is a function of the relative positions of the satellites. If the satellites being
tracked by the GPS receiver are within close relative proximity to each other, the resulting PDOP will be poor.
Conversely, if the satellites are relatively far from each other, PDOP will be improved. Because any error in
position results in a timing error in the BR transmission, the BRs are not allowed to key until the position error
is acceptably low. Therefore, a site with a large PDOP value may incur a delay when the site is first initialized.

It is essential that after FRU replacement or moving the Site Controller in some
other manner, the position memory is reset using MMI commands.

Excessive PDOP values may be the result of the GPS receiver not having an adequate “view” of
the sky to initially determine its position. Motorola recommends locating the antenna(s) such that
there are no PDOP values that exceed 10.0 for periods of more than 15 minutes. To maintain a
maximum reliability, four satellites should be tracked at all times.
The system must be capable of the following:
• Tracking a minimum of four satellites during initial start-up
• Sustaining PDOP less than 10
• Working in 3D fix mode for the most of the time

GPS Start Up
The times given below are from applying power to the system until GPS LED is solid green illuminating.
GPS startup is the significant contributing factor in determining system start up times.

Initial Start
This is the first time an MTS is powered on or after the almanac or position information
has been erased from non volatile memory (NVM). The site needs to locate 4 satellites and
then train the reference oscillator from an unknown state.

Warm Start
The MTS has been previously powered up and the non volatile memory contains valid almanac and
position information and the reference oscillator was trained prior to starting the site. The times
quoted are for a power-off restart. A software restart will be slightly faster.

Soft Restart
This is an MTS restart, where power is maintained during the reset, for example, the remote MTS
restart after software upgrade. The GPS receiver will continue to track satellites during the MTS
restart, thus eliminating the ‘search for satellites’ phase of start-up.

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-49


Remote GPS Antenna/Receiver Connection Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Table 4-2 GPS Start-up Time

Initial Start Normal Start Soft restart


Typical Maximum Typical Maximum Typical Maximum
10 Minutes 30 Minutes 4 Minutes 10 Minutes 90 Seconds 8 Minutes

If these start-up times are exceeded, then follow the procedures for GPS Site
Controller fault indications section.

Remote GPS Antenna/Receiver Connection


The remote GPS antenna connectors of DB15 type are placed on the junction panel, see Figure
4-52 for MTS LiTE, Figure 4-53 for MTS 2 and Figure 4-54 for MTS 4.

Figure 4-53 and Figure 4-54 depicts the newer version of the MTS Junction Panel.
There may be small differences in older configurations.

Figure 4-52 Remote GPS Receiver Connection on MTS LiTE Junction Panel

4-50 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Remote GPS Receiver Requirements

Figure 4-53 Remote GPS Receiver Connection on MTS 2 Junction Panel

Figure 4-54 Remote GPS Receiver Connection on MTS 4 Junction Panel

Remote GPS Receiver Requirements


The antenna must be mounted high enough to clear the peak of the MTS site roof. For systems in the
northern hemisphere, the remote GPS receiver should be mounted so that a clear view of the southern sky
is maintained. For systems in the southern hemisphere, the remote GPS receiver should be mounted so
that a clear view of the northern sky is maintained. The recommendation is to have view to the entire
sky if possible (10º above the horizon in all directions without any obstructions).
Isolate the remote GPS receiver from RF interference by mounting the antenna at least 3.7 m
(12 in.) horizontally from other transmitting antennas. For mounting and physical installation,
see instructions enclosed with the external GPS receiver head.

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-51


Remote GPS Receiver Cabling Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Remote GPS Receiver Cabling


The remote GPS (RGPS) receiver is connected to the junction panel using one of the three standardized cables
or a customer provided alternative. Standardized cables are terminated with a Deutsch connector (remote
GPS receiver site) and a metal shell 15-pin SubD connector (MTS site). The cable is supplied with an
additional SubD connector insert to allow the cable to be shortened and re- terminated where required.

The RGPS receiver cable has to be a shielded cable. The screen has to be grounded through the
metal shell of the D type connector. However, it is required for the cable screen to be connected
also to the site ground where the cable enters the building. This is similar to the grounding that
is applied to the RF cables. Please refer to R56 Guidelines and National Standards.

Table 4-3 RGPS Cables

Pos. Length Kit Number


1 40 m 3066564B01
2 150 m 3066564B02
3 600 m 3066564B03

Figure 4-55 Connector Pin-outs and Color code of Deutsch Connector

A modular data surge protector (Part Number: GMDN0889A) should be used for remote
GPS cable, see Figure 4-56. The surge arrestor must be installed on a grounding plate,
or a ground connection stud added to the side of the box.

4-52 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Remote GPS Receiver Cabling

Figure 4-56 RGPS Modular Data Surge Protector

See also Table 5-6, "User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS Cabling for MTS 2," on page 5-10 and
Table 5-7, "User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS Cabling for MTS 4," on page 5-12.

Figure 4-57 RGPS Connector Pinout

Table 4-4 RGPS Connector


MTS Site GPS Site
(15-pin SubD connector) (12-pin Deutsch connector)
Surge
Pin No. Description Description Protection Color Pin No.
11 Supply GMDN0889A White/Blue stripe 1
TWISTED
PAIR
3 GND GMDN0889A Blue/White stripe 9
4 Rx (RXD_N) TWISTED GMDN0889A Green/White stripe 4
12 Rx (RXD_P) PAIR GMDN0889A White/Green stripe 5
5 Tx (TXD_N) TWISTED GMDN0889A White/Grey stripe 2
13 Tx (TXD_P) PAIR GMDN0889A Grey/White stripe 3
2 GND GMDN0889A Orange/White 8
TWISTED stripe
10 Supply PAIR GMDN0889A White/Orange 10
stripe
14 1 pps (PPS_P) TWISTED GMDN0889A White/Brown stripe 11
6 1 pps (PPS_N) PAIR GMDN0889A Brown/White stripe 12

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-53


GPS Antenna Connection Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Table 4-4 RGPS Connector (Continued)


MTS Site GPS Site
(15-pin SubD connector) (12-pin Deutsch connector)
Surge
Pin No. Description Description Protection Color Pin No.
NC N/A TWISTED GMDN0889A Blue/Red stripe 6
NC N/A PAIR GMDN0889A Red/Blue stripe 7
1, 7, 8, 9, 15 Not Connected

The duplicated Supply and GND connections should be joined together at the surge protector.

GPS Antenna Connection


The integrated GPS antenna connectors of N type, are placed on the junction panel, see Figure
4-58 for MTS LiTE, Figure 4-59 for MTS 2 and Figure 4-60 for MTS 4.

Figure 4-59 and Figure 4-60 depicts the newer version of the MTS Junction Panel.
There may be small differences in older configurations.

Figure 4-58 GPS Antenna Connection on MTS LiTE Junction Panel

4-54 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual GPS Antenna Connection

Figure 4-59 GPS Antenna Connection on MTS 2 Junction Panel

GPS Antenna must be protected by a grounded surge arrestor of the type that allows
DC to pass through. Please refer to "Surge Arrestors and Suppliers" in Appendix A,
"Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)" for more information.

Figure 4-60 GPS Antenna Connection on MTS 4 Junction Panel

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-55


GPS Antenna Line Loss Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

GPS Antenna Line Loss


The maximum allowable line attenuation between the antenna and the Site Controller GPS
Receiver input is 6 dB. There is an additional 4 dB of attenuation for foliage. In a typical MTS
installation using 1/2 inch low density foam coaxial cable (or equivalent), the length of the cable
run should never exceed 46 m. This is sufficient for most installations.
When considering the use of longer cables, calculate the cable lengths allowing 4.5 dB
of loss at 1.5 GHz (the GPS receiver frequency). The remaining 1.5 dB of attenuation
is provided by interior site cabling and connectors.

Avoiding GPS Interference


High frequency radio waves, such as those broadcast by the GPS system behave like light (straight
lines) therefore it is likely that any long term interference will be ground based. Two strategies
have been successfully employed to mitigate against jamming signals:
• If possible, determine a location where adequate GPS signals are available using a hand
held receiver and move the Base station GPS antenna to this location.
• Construct a shield (Cardboard & Foil is adequate) to exclude the jamming signal. The shield
should be approximately 6 cm from the antenna body and should be connected to an earth point.

4-56 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual X.21, E1-120Ω Cabling

X.21, E1-120Ω Cabling


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

A cable connects the network termination unit (NTU) and the E1/X.21 interface on the MTS Junction
Panel, see Figure 4-61 for MTS LiTE, Figure 4-62 for MTS 2 and Figure 4-63 for MTS 4.
The E1 or X.21 (only one of them can be used) connectors on the Junction Panel are connected with the Site
Controller through an internal extension cable. For more information, see "E1 and Ethernet Cabling" and
"User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS Cabling" in Chapter 5, "Interconnection and Internal Cabling".

Figure 4-62 and Figure 4-63 depicts the newer version of the MTS Junction Panel.
There may be small differences in older configurations.

Figure 4-61 E1/X.21 and Ethernet Site Link Connectors on the MTS LiTE Junction Panel

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-57


X.21, E1-120Ω Cabling Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Figure 4-62 E1/X.21 and Ethernet Site Link Connectors on the MTS 2 Junction Panel

Figure 4-63 E1/X.21 and Ethernet Site Link Connectors on the MTS 4 Junction Panel

The network termination unit (NTU) in the same building shall provide the necessary
isolation between the X.21/E1 interface and the network, and should be approved for
use by the appropriate agency in the end user country.
Do not remove the supplied caplug and retaining bag from the D-type connector
of the X.21 or E1 cable.
A surge arrestor should be used. For full instructions and guidelines, please refer always to
Motorola Standards and Guidelines for Communications Sites, R56.
Table 4-5 and Table 4-6 show the pin assignment for E1 and X.21 connection.

4-58 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual X.21, E1-120Ω Cabling

The E1 connector described in Table 4-5 contains two E1 lines. If only one line is needed,
use Receive 1 and Transmit 1. Be aware that the Pin definitions on the Site Controller are
different from the E1 connector on the Junction Panel.

Figure 4-64 Site Link Connector E1 Pinout

Table 4-5 Site Link Connector E1 on Junction Panel

Pin No. Function


1 Receive 1 positive
2 Receive 1 negative
3 Receive 2 positive
4 Transmit 1 positive
5 Transmit 1 negative
6 Receive 2 negative
7 Transmit 2 positive
8 Transmit 2 negative

Figure 4-65 Site Link Connector X.21 Pinout

Table 4-6 Site Link Connector X.21 on Junction Panel

Pin No. Function


1 Not Used
2 Tx Data B
3 Control B
4 Rx Data B
5 Indication B
6 Signal Timing B

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-59


X.21, E1-120Ω Cabling Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Table 4-6 Site Link Connector X.21 on Junction Panel (Continued)


Pin No. Function
7 Byte Timing B
8 Ground
9 Tx Data A
10 Control A
11 Rx Data A
12 Indication A
13 Signal Timing A
14 Byte Timing A
15 Not Used

4-60 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Ethernet Site Link Cabling

Ethernet Site Link Cabling


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Newer versions of the MTS 2 and MTS 4 Junction Panels contain breakouts for Ethernet Site Link
connectors (Link1 and Link2). In order to gain Ethernet site link functionality on these newer versions
of Junction Panel, the breakout(s) needs to be removed and a RJ45 coupler needs to be inserted. For
more information on placement on the Junction Panel, See Figure 4-62," E1/X.21 and Ethernet Site Link
Connectors on the MTS 2 Junction Panel" on page 4-58 for MTS 2 and Figure 4-63," E1/X.21 and
Ethernet Site Link Connectors on the MTS 4 Junction Panel" on page 4-58 for MTS 4.
Previous version of the MTS 2 Junction Panel contain no breakout while the previous version of the
MTS 4 Junction Panel contain an AUX breakout. In order to gain Ethernet site link functionality
on those previous versions of MTS 2 and MTS 4 Junction Panels, a MTS Ethernet Retrofit Kit
is needed, see "Ethernet Site Link Retrofit Kit" on page 4-61.
The Link1 and Link2 connectors on the Junction Panel (or via the MTS Ethernet Retrofit kit) are
connected with the Site Controller through an internal extension cable.
For more information, see "Ethernet Site Link Cabling" in Chapter 5, "Interconnection and Internal Cabling".
Table 4-7 show the pin assignment for Ethernet Site Link connection.
The Ethernet Site Link MDIX connector pin out described in Table 4-7 is applicable to both
Link1 and Link2. Be aware that the Pin definitions on the Site Controller are different from
the Link1 and Link2 connectors on the Junction Panel.
Table 4-7 Ethernet Site Link Connector on Junction Panel

Pin No Function
1 RX+
2 RX-
3 TX+
4 Not used
5 Not used
6 TX-
7 Not used
8 Not used

Ethernet Site Link Retrofit Kit


The Ethernet Site Link Retrofit kit is used convert one E1 output to two Ethernet outputs on
MTS 2 Junction Panels not equipped with such Ethernet outputs in order to get Ethernet Site-link
functionality. On MTS 4 Junction Panels, the Ethernet Site link Retrofit kit is used to convert
existing E1 and AUX outputs in order to get Ethernet site link functionality.

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-61


Using Ethernet Site Link Retrofit Kit for MTS 2 Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

The following Ethernet Site Link Retrofit Kits can be used for older versions of the Junction
Panels where Ethernet connectors are missing (only E1 present):
• GMKN4746A - for MTS 2 with new version of junction panel.
• GMKN4747A - for MTS 2 with old version of junction panel.
• GMKN4745A - for MTS 4
• GMKN4744A - for MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet

GMKN4744A contains only the cables for the expansion cabinet. GMKN4745A
needs to be ordered separately for the MTS 4 Prime Cabinet.

Using Ethernet Site Link Retrofit Kit for MTS 2


Follow Procedure 4-10 in order to gain Ethernet Site Link functionality from the E1
connector on the previous type of MTS 2 Junction Panel.
Procedure 4-10 How to Connect Ethernet Site Link Retrofit Kit for MTS 2 (old JP)

1 Remove existing E1 cable from the E1 connector on Junction Panel.


2 Connect the open E1 connector on the Junction Panel with the RJ45 coupler (3066562B01).
3 Connect the Ethernet Y Splitter (01015002001) to the lose end of the RJ45 coupler connected in
previous step.
4 Connect the Link1 and Link2 outputs on the Ethernet Y Splitter to the Site Controller by using
the Ethernet cables as described in Table 5-13, "Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 2," on page
5-21 and Figure 5-13,"Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 2" on page 5-22.

Procedure 4-11 How to Connect Ethernet Site Link Retrofit Kit for MTS 2 (new JP)

1 Bend open and connect the open Link1 connector on the Junction Panel with the RJ45 coupler
(3066562B01).
2 Bend open and connect the open Link2 connector on the Junction Panel with the RJ45 coupler
(3066562B01).
3 Connect the Link1 and Link2 outputs on the Ethernet Y Splitter to the Site Controller by using
the Ethernet cables as described in Table 5-13, "Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 2," on page
5-21 and Figure 5-13,"Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 2" on page 5-22.

4-62 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Using Ethernet Site Link Retrofit Kit for MTS 4

Using Ethernet Site Link Retrofit Kit for MTS 4


Unlike the MTS 2, the previous type of MTS 4 Junction Panel has an unused AUX breakout
which will be used, together with the existing E1 connector, for Ethernet Site Link functionality.
Follow Procedure 4-12 in order to gain Ethernet Site Link functionality from the E1 and AUX
connectors on the previous type of MTS 4 Junction Panel.
Procedure 4-12 How to Connect Ethernet Site Link Retrofit Kit for MTS 4

1 Remove existing E1 cable from E1 connector on Junction Panel.


2 Connect the open E1 connector on the Junction Panel with the RJ45 coupler (3066562B01).
3 Bend AUX breakout and insert the second RJ45 coupler (3066562B01).
4 • For configurations with single Site Controller, follow Table 5-14, "Ethernet Site Link
Cabling for MTS 4 with Single Site Controller," on page 5-23 and Figure 5-14,"Ethernet
Site Link Cabling for MTS 4 with Single Site Controller" on page 5-24 for further cabling
and connections.
• For configurations with dual Site Controller, follow Table 5-15, "Ethernet Site Link
Cabling for MTS 4 with Dual Site Controller," on page 5-25 and Figure 5-15,"Ethernet
Site Link Cabling for MTS 4 with Dual Site Controller" on page 5-26 for further cabling
and connections.

In Table 5-14 and Table 5-15; and Figure 5-14 and Figure 5-15 E1 on old Junction
Panel is equivalent to Link1 and AUX on old Junction Panel is equivalent to Link2.

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-63


Using Ethernet Site Link Retrofit Kit for MTS 4 Prime and Expansion Cabinet Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Using Ethernet Site Link Retrofit Kit for MTS 4 Prime and Expansion Cabinet
For an MTS Expansion Cabinet configuration with single Site Controller, follow Procedure 4-13 in order to gain
Ethernet Site Link functionality from the E1 and AUX connectors on the previous type of MTS 4 Junction Panel.
For an MTS Expansion Cabinet configuration with single or dual Site Controllers, follow
Procedure 4-14 in order to gain Ethernet Site Link functionality from the Link1 and Link2
connectors on the newer type of MTS 4 Junction Panel.
Procedure 4-13 How to Connect Ethernet Site Link Retrofit Kit for MTS 4
with Expansion Cabinet (old JP)

1 On the MTS Prime Cabinet, remove existing E1 cable from E1 connector on Junction Panel.
2 Connect the open E1 connector on the Junction Panel with the RJ45 coupler (3066562B01).
3 Bend AUX breakout and insert the second RJ45 coupler (3066562B01).
4 Follow Table 5-16, "Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet with Single Site
Controller," on page 5-27 and Figure 5-16,"Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 4 Expansion
Cabinet with Single Site Controller" on page 5-28 for further cabling and connections.

Procedure 4-14 How to Connect Ethernet Site Link Retrofit Kit for MTS 4
with Expansion Cabinet (new JP)

1 Bend open and connect the open Link1 connector on the Junction Panel with the RJ45 coupler
(3066562B01).
2 Bend open and connect the open Link2 connector on the Junction Panel with the RJ45 coupler
(3066562B01).
3 • For configurations with single Site Controller, follow Table 5-16, "Ethernet Site Link
Cabling for MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet with Single Site Controller," on page 5-27 and
Figure 5-16,"Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet with Single Site
Controller" on page 5-28 for further cabling and connections.
• For configurations with dual Site Controller, follow Table 5-17, "Ethernet Site Link
Cabling for MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet with Dual Site Controller," on page 5-29 and Figure
5-17,"Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet with Dual Site Controller"
on page 5-30 for further cabling and connections.

4-64 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual External Alarm Cabling

External Alarm Cabling


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

The alarms/outputs are available on the junction panel, see Figure 4-66 for MTS LiTE,
Figure 4-67 for MTS 2 and Figure 4-68 for MTS 4.

Figure 4-67 and Figure 4-68 depicts the newer version of the MTS Junction Panel.
There may be small differences in older configurations.

Figure 4-66 Alarm Wiring Connection on MTS LiTE Junction Panel

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-65


External Alarm Cabling Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Figure 4-67 Alarm Wiring Connection on MTS 2 Junction Panel

Figure 4-68 Alarm Wiring Connection on MTS 4 Junction Panel

4-66 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual External Alarm Cabling

The MTS supports the following alarm inputs and control outputs in all configurations:
• 15 opto-isolated 12V alarm inputs
◦ Alarm inputs and Alarm ground are floating
• External alarms are connected to an External Alarm 2-16 port and one of the 6 GND (Alarm) ports
• The 6 GND (Alarm) ports are connected internally
• External alarm voltage (open) = 12V typical
• External alarm current (short circuit) = 8mA typical
• Control output 1 (2 pins) = alarm relay (Normally Open and Common contacts)
• Control output 2 (2 pins) = alarm relay (Normally Open and Common contacts)

Figure 4-69 External Alarm Connector Pinout

Table 4-8 External Alarm Connector

Port 2 D-Type 25 Pin Description

13 Control Output 2
25 Control Output 2
12 Control Output 1
24 Control Output 1
11 GND (Alarm)
23 GND (Alarm)
10 GND (Alarm)
22 GND (Alarm)
9 GND (Alarm)
21 GND (Alarm)
8 External Alarm 16
20 External Alarm 15
7 External Alarm 14
19 External Alarm 13
6 External Alarm 12
18 External Alarm 11
5 External Alarm 10

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-67


External Alarm Cabling Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Table 4-8 External Alarm Connector (Continued)

Port 2 D-Type 25 Pin Description

17 External Alarm 9
4 External Alarm 8
16 External Alarm 7
3 External Alarm 6
15 External Alarm 5
2 External Alarm 4
14 External Alarm 3
1 External Alarm 2

For more information on alarm wiring, refer to "User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS
Cabling" in Chapter 5, "Interconnection and Internal Cabling".

4-68 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Final Check-out

Final Check-out
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

The final check-out procedure consists of:


• Final check-out setup
• Expansion Cabinet power-up

Final Check-out Setup


After the completion of the MTS installation, performProcedure 4-15. This final check-out
procedure ensures the proper operation of the MTS.
Procedure 4-15 How to Perform the Cabinet Final Check-out Setup

1 Switch to OFF the Power Supply Unit.


2 Verify that the connections on all modules and on the junction panel are secure and make good
contact. Make any necessary adjustments.
3 If a backup battery is used, check if the wires on plus (+) and minus (-) poles make good contact
and if appropriate, check that the temperature sensor is attached.

Expansion Cabinet Power-Up

Cabinet power-up procedure is arranged to prevent MTS damage in the case of an


equipment or installation defect.
Make certain the switch on the Power Supply Unit is switched OFF before
proceeding. Turn switch to ON only when directed in below procedure.

Procedure 4-16 How to Power-Up MTS and Expansion Cabinet

1 Check connections at Power Supply Unit and if applicable at the backup battery.
2 Set switch to ON position.

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-69


Expansion Cabinet Power-Up Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Procedure 4-16 How to Power-Up MTS and Expansion Cabinet (Continued)


3 Watch the following LED indicators to monitor the PSU inputs and outputs during the startup
procedure:
• Output and temperature indicator (DC OUT / TEMP):
◦ Green LED when DC output voltages are present and within limits

◦ Red LED when one or more of the output voltages failed

◦ Red LED flashes when over temperature is detected, 5 -10 °C before shutdown

• AC input indicator (AC IN STATUS):


◦ Green LED when AC input voltage is present and within limits

◦ Red LED when AC input voltage is not present or out of limits

• DC input and charging indicator (DC IN STATUS):


◦ Green LED when PSU is supplied from DC input

◦ Amber LED (green/red) when battery is charged

◦ Red-green flashing LED when a backup battery or a DC source supplies the PSU
and the source voltage drops below 43 VDC ±3%

◦ Red LED when no source connected to the DC input or the DC voltage is below
40.5 V
4 Using a digital voltmeter (DVM), verify a voltage level between -44 VDC and -60 VDC at the
“-48 VDC”- (hot) terminal and “Return”- terminal of the Power Supply Unit.

The Power Supply Unit automatically recognizes a connected backup battery and
begins charging, no matter if in operation or at start up.

4-70 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Recommended Tools, Parts, and Test Equipment for Installation

Recommended Tools, Parts, and Test Equipment for


Installation
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Table 4-9 through Table 4-11 list the tools, test equipment, and locally procured parts that are
required for the installation procedure. The model numbers listed are recommended, but equivalent
tools and equipment made by other manufacturers are acceptable.

Recommended Tools

When selecting tools and equipment, always choose those which


have insulated grips and handles. This helps prevent potential
injury resulting from electrical shock..

Avoid cold welding:


When screwing in a stainless steel screw, do not apply any
pressure to the power tool!

Table 4-9 Recommended Tools for Installation

Tool Model/Type Supplier Description


Electronics Locally procured Miscellaneous tools
Technician Tool
Kit
Sack trolley Locally procured Ensure that fork size is compatible with MTS
Wrist strap Locally procured Ensure this is regularly tested
Torx30 Locally procured For mounting lifting brackets on MTS 4
screwdriver
For mounting Cavity Combiners in MTS 4 cabinet
Long shafted Locally procured For mounting toplids (front and rear) and RFDS
Torx30 front cover in MTS 4
screwdriver

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-71


Recommended Test Equipment Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Table 4-9 Recommended Tools for Installation (Continued)


Tool Model/Type Supplier Description
Torx20 Locally procured For mounting Base Radio, Site Controller, and
screwdriver Power Supply Unit in the module cage
For mounting filters in module cage in MTS 2
For mounting filters to the filter bracket in MTS 2
For mounting filter bracket in the MTS 4 cabinet
For Hybrid Combiner
Torx10 Locally procured For fixing Fan Kit
screwdriver
SW19 wrench Locally procured For adjusting the leveling feet on MTS 2/4
SW8, allen Locally procured For fixing the cabinet to the mounting plate
wrench, HEX

Recommended Test Equipment


Table 4-10 lists the recommended test equipment for installation. These are not included as part of the MTS
shipment and must be procured locally. All model numbers are Motorola part numbers, unless noted otherwise.

Table 4-10 Recommended Test Equipment for Installation

Test Equipment Model/Type Supplier Description


Digital Multimeter Fluke 77 Fluke AC/DC measurements.
(only 1 required) Equivalent instrument is
acceptable
Time Domain Locally Possibly needed by Field
Reflectometer (TDR) Procured Installation Team
Ground Resistance AEMC 3700 clamp-on Locally Possibly needed by Field
Ohmmeter ground tester Procured Installation Team
Service Computer Locally Local service terminal
Procured
Service Connector Box p/n: 0166502N05 Motorola Used for measuring receiver
sensitivity
Basic Service Cable p/n: 3066565B01 Motorola For pinout information, see
(RS232) "Site Controller - Front Panel
Connectors" in Chapter 8,
"Site Controller"
TETRA Signal Generator Rhode & Schwarz: Used for checking receive and
SMU200A + SMX-K8 transmit operation

4-72 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Recommended Parts

Table 4-10 Recommended Test Equipment for Installation (Continued)


Test Equipment Model/Type Supplier Description
TETRA Analyzer Agilent E4443A Used for checking receive and
transmit operation
RF Attenuator, 250 W, 40 Weinschel 404043 Protection for HP89441A
dB
RF Attenuator, 10 dB minimum 100 W Motorola Protection for HP89441A
RF Adapter 33 QMA-N-50-1/133 NE Huber & Suhner “N” female to “QMA” male
RF Adapter 31 N-QMA-50-1/1-- NE Huber & Suhner “N” female to “QMA” female
RF Adapter 33_716-N-50-1/---_UE Huber & Suhner “N” female to DIN 7-16 male

Recommended Parts
Table 4-11 lists the recommended parts for installation. These are not included as part of the MTS shipment
and must be procured locally. All model numbers are Motorola part numbers, unless noted otherwise.

Table 4-11 Recommended Parts for Installation

Part Type/Size Supplier Where Used


Cover or blanket Locally Procured Protection of cabinet
from dust while drilling
Anchor Kit 10 mm Rawl Bolts (concrete Locally Procured MTS cabinet floor
fixing bolts) anchors
Grease anti-oxidant Locally Procured Battery terminal
corrosion control

AC Power Cable 1.3 mm2 (#16 AWG) Locally Procured Mains Supply wiring
minimum size
AC Power Cable 2.1 mm2 (#14 AWG) Locally Procured Mains Supply wiring
maximum size
DC Power Cable 3.3 mm2 (12 AWG) (Length: Locally Procured DC and Backup Battery
more than 3 m) wiring
DC Power Cable 5.3 mm2 (10 AWG) (Length: Locally Procured DC and Backup Battery
more than 3 m) wiring
110-240 VAC Connector Motorola P/N 3166502A01 Supplied with MTS AC Mains Connector
-48 VDC Connector MTS 2: Supplied with MTS DC Connector Backup
Motorola P/N 3166501A01 Battery connector
MTS4:
Motorola P/N 3166501A02

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-73


Recommended Torque Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Recommended Torque
Table 4-12 lists the recommended torque for RF connectors, screws, nuts, and bolts.

Table 4-12 Recommended Torque for RF Connectors, Screws, and Nuts

Item Torque Nm Torque lbfin


“N” Coupling Nuts 0.68 – 1.13 6.02 – 10
“SMA” Coupling Nuts 1.0 9
Screws up to M 3.5 0.6 5.31
Nuts up to M 3.5 1.2 for class 80 steel, 0.9 for class 70 11 for class 80 steel, 8 for class
steel, and 0.4 for class 50 steel 70 steel, and 3.5 for class 50 steel
Screws from M4 to M 6 4.5 40
(Torx 20, Torx 30)
Nuts from M4 to M 6 4.5 40
M 10 Screw 6.8 60
DIN 7–16 25 – 30 221 – 266

Screws
The screws used for mounting modules in MTS 2 and MTS 4 cabinets are listed in Table 4-13. See the
positions of screws for the most popular configurations in Figure 4-70 for MTS LiTE, Figure 4-71 for MTS 2
and Figure 4-72 for MTS 4. For more details, see chapters dedicated to specific modules.

4-74 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Screws

Avoid cold welding:


When screwing in a stainless steel screw, do not apply any
pressure to the power tool!

Table 4-13 Screws for Mounting Modules and Parts Within MTS2/4 and Expansion Cabinets

Module Part Screws/Washers Part Number Tool


Site Controller and XHUB 2 pcs M4X10/captivated star washer 0310909C61 Torx 20
Power Supply Unit 2 pcs M4X10/captivated star washer 0310909C60 Torx 20
Base Radio 2 pcs M4X10/captivated star washer 0310909C60 Torx 20
Filters in MTS 2 3 pcs M4X10/captivated star washer 0310909C60 Torx 20
Filters in MTS 4 Mounting on the filter bracket:
2 pcs M4X10/captivated star washer 0310909C60 Torx 20
1 pc. M4X8 countersunk 0310913A35 Torx 20
Mounting filter bracket in the cabinet:
2 pcs M4X10/captivated star washer 0310909C60 Torx 20
Cavity Combiners 3 pcs M6X16, captivated star washer 0310909C92 Torx 30
Hybrid Combiner 2 pcs M4X10, captivated star washer 0310913A35 Torx 20
Fan Kit 1 pc M3X8, captivated star washer 0310909C32 Torx 10

RFDS front cover – 4 pcs M6X16, captivated star washer 0310909C92 Torx 30
MTS4/Expansion Cabinet
Toplids (front and rear) – 2 x 4 pcs M6X16, captivated star washer 0310909C92 Torx 30
MTS4/Expansion Cabinet
Rx Splitter 2 pcs M6X16, captivated star washer 0310909C92 Torx 30

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-75


Screws Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Figure 4-70 MTS LiTE Screws Positions

4-76 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Screws

Figure 4-71 MTS 2 Screws Positions

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-77


Screws Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

Figure 4-72 MTS 4 Screws Positions

4-78 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Screws

Figure 4-73 Expansion Cabinet Screw Positions

6802800U74-T January 2011 4-79


Screws Chapter 4: Hardware Installation

This page intentionally left blank.

4-80 6802800U74-T January 2011


Chapter

5
Interconnection and Internal Cabling
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

This chapter covers the following topics:


• "AC/DC Power Cabling"
• "User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS Cabling"
• "E1 and Ethernet Cabling"
• "RF Cabling"
• "CAN Bus Cabling"

AC/DC Power Cabling


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

AC power cabling refers to the connection between the Junction Panel and the Power Supply Unit.
DC power cabling refers to the power connections between the Junction Panel and the Power Supply
Unit and between the Power Supply Unit and other modules within the cabinet.
Table 5-1, Table 5-2 and Table 5-3 identify and Figure 5-1, Figure 5-2 and Figure
5-3 show the AC/DC power connections.
Table 5-1 AC/DC Power Cabling for MTS LiTE

Cable Part From Unit/ To Unit/ Connection


Notes
Index Number Connection Name Name
Power Supply Unit/ DC In
1 3066550B01 Junction Panel/ DC N/A
Battery
Junction Panel/ Power Supply Unit/
2 3066556B01 N/A
Bat Temp. Battery Temp. Sens.
3 3066552B02 Junction Panel/ AC In Power Supply Unit/ AC In With retaining clip
Pins: 1, 2, 3, 8, 10, and
4a Power Supply Unit/ DC Base Radio 1/ DC In
3066545B02 11
Out
4b Site Controller/ Power 1 Pins: 7 and 14

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-1


AC/DC Power Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Figure 5-1 AC/DC Power Cabling Diagram for MTS LiTE

Table 5-2 AC/DC Power Cabling for MTS 2

Cable Part From Unit/ To Unit/ Connection


Notes
Index Number Connection Name Name
Power Supply Unit/ DC In
1 3066550B01 Junction Panel/ DC N/A
Battery
Junction Panel/ Power Supply Unit/
2 3066556B01 N/A
Bat Temp. Battery Temp. Sens.
3 3066552B01 Junction Panel/ AC In Power Supply Unit/ AC In With retaining clip
Pins: 1, 2, 3, 8, 10, and
4a Base Radio 1/ DC In
11
3066545B01 Junction Panel/ AC In 2 Pins: 4, 5, 6, 9, 12, and
4b Base Radio 2/ DC In
13
4c Site Controller/ Power Pins: 7 and 14

5-2 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual AC/DC Power Cabling

Figure 5-2 AC/DC Power Cabling Diagram for MTS 2

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-3


AC/DC Power Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Table 5-3 AC/DC Power Cabling for MTS 4

Cable Part From Unit/ To Unit/ Connection


Notes
Index Number Connection Name Name
Power Supply Unit 1/
1a Junction Panel/ DC1 N/A
DC In Battery
3066551B01
Power Supply Unit 2/
1b Junction Panel/ DC2 N/A
DC In Battery
Power Supply Unit 1/
2 3066553B01 Junction Panel/ AC In 1 With retaining clip
AC In
Power Supply Unit 2/
3 3066553B01 Junction Panel/ AC In 2 With retaining clip
AC In

Pins: 1, 2, 3, 8, 10, and


4a Base Radio 1/ DC In
11
Power Supply Unit 1/
3066545B01 Pins: 4, 5, 6, 9, 12, and
4b DC Out Base Radio 2/ DC In
13
4c Y Splitter Pins: 7 and 14
Site Controller 1/ Power 1
4d 3066574B01 Y Splitter
Site Controller 2/ Power 2
Pins: 1, 2, 3, 8, 10, and
5a Base Radio 3/ DC In
11
Power Supply Unit 2/
3066545B01 Pins: 4, 5, 6, 9, 12, and
5b DC Out Base Radio 4/ DC In
13
5c Y Splitter Pins: 7, 14
Site Controller 1/ Power 2
5d 3066574B01 Splitter
Site Controller 2/ Power 1
Junction Panel/ Power Supply Unit 1/
6 3066556B02 N/A
Bat Temp. 1 Battery Temp. Sens.
Junction Panel/ Power Supply Unit 2/
7 3066556B02 N/A
Bat Temp. 2 Battery Temp. Sens.
Power Supply Unit 1/ Only for configuration
8 3066557B01 ATCC 1/ DC In
ATCC DC Out with ATCC
Power Supply Unit 2/ Only for configuration
9 3066557B01 ATCC 2/ DC In
ATCC DC Out with two ATCCs
ATCC 1/Inside ATCC ATCC 2/Inside ATCC Only for configuration
10 306659B01
Interconnection Interconnection with two ATCCs

5-4 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual AC/DC Power Cabling

Figure 5-3 AC/DC Power Cabling Diagram for MTS 4

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-5


AC/DC Power Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Table 5-4 AC/DC Power Cabling for Expansion Cabinet

Cable Part
Index From Unit To Unit Notes
Number
1a Junction Panel / DC1 Power Supply Unit 3/DC N/A
In Battery
3066551B01
1b Junction Panel / DC2 Power Supply Unit 4/DC N/A
In Battery
2 3066553B01 Junction Panel / AC In 1 Power Supply Unit 3 / With retaining clip
AC In
3 3066553B01 Junction Panel / AC In 2 Power Supply Unit 4 / With retaining clip
AC In
4a Base Radio 5 / DC In Pins: 1, 2, 3, 8, 10, and
11
Power Supply Unit 3 /
4b 3066545B01 Base Radio 6 / DC In Pins: 4, 5, 6, 9, 12, and
DC Out
13
4c Y Splitter Pins: 7 and 14
4d 3066574B01 Y Splitter XHUB 1 / Power 3
XHUB 2 / Power 3
5a Base Radio 7 / DC In Pins: 1, 2, 3, 8, 10, and
11
Power Supply Unit 4 /
5b 3066545B01 Base Radio 8 / DC In Pins: 4, 5, 6, 9, 12, and
DC Out
13
5c Y Splitter Pins: 7 and 14
5d 3066574B01 Y Splitter XHUB1 / Power 4
XHUB 2 / Power 4
6 3066556B02 Junction Panel / Bat Power Supply Unit 3 / N/A
Temp 1 Battery Temp Sens.
7 3066556B02 Junction Panel / Bat Power Supply Unit 4 / N/A
Temp 2 Battery Temp Sens.
8 3066557B01 Power Supply Unit 3 / ATCC 3 / DC In Only for configuration
ATCC DC Out with ATCC
9 3066557B01 Power Supply Unit 4 / ATCC 4 / DC In Only for configuration
ATCC DC Out with two ATCCs
10 3066559B01 ATCC 3 / Inside ATCC ATCC 4 / Inside ATCC Only for configuration
Interconnection Interconnection with two ATCCs

5-6 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual AC/DC Power Cabling

Figure 5-4 AC/DC Power Cabling Diagram for Expansion Cabinet

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-7


User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS Cabling


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

X.21 cabling refers to the cabling between the Site Controller and the X.21 connector on the Junction Panel.

Either X.21 or E1 cabling is used, depending on which option is ordered.

User Alarms/Controls cabling refer to the cabling between the Site Controller and
the connector on the Junction Panel.
RGPS and GPS cabling refer to the cabling between the Site Controller and the connectors on the Junction Panel.
Table 5-5, Table 5-6 and Table 5-7 identify and Figure 5-5, Figure 5-6 and Figure 5-7 show
the User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS cabling.

X.21 and RGPS cabling depends on ordered configuration.


Table 5-5 User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS Cabling for MTS LiTE

To Unit/
Cable Part From Unit/
Connection Notes
Number Connection Name
Index Name
MTS LiTE with RGPS and E1 or RGPS and X.21
2a Junction Panel/ X.21 Site Controller/ 15 pin D male connector type
3066546B09
2b Junction Panel/ RGPS X.21/Remote GPS 15 pin D female connector type
3a Junction Panel/ User 25 pin D female connector type
Alarms/Controls Site Controller/
3066549B03
Alarm/Controls
3b Door Alarm Molex connector type
MTS LiTE with Internal GPS and X.21
1 3066543B23 Junction Panel/ GPS Site Controller/ GPS Coax cable
2a 3066546B10 Junction Panel/ X.21 Site Controller/ N/A
X.21/Remote GPS
3a Junction Panel/ User 25 pin D female connector type
Alarms/Controls Site Controller/
3066549B03
Alarm/Controls
3b Door Alarm Molex connector type
MTS LiTE with Internal GPS and E1
1 3066543B23 Junction Panel/ GPS Site Controller/ GPS Coax cable

5-8 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS Cabling

Table 5-5 User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS Cabling for MTS LiTE (Continued)
To Unit/
Cable Part From Unit/
Connection Notes
Number Connection Name
Index Name
3a Junction Panel/ User 25 pin D female connector type
Alarms/Controls Site Controller/
3066549B03
Alarm/Controls
3b Door Alarm Molex connector type

Figure 5-5 User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS Cabling Diagram for MTS LiTE

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-9


User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Table 5-6 User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS Cabling for MTS 2

To Unit/
Cable Part From Unit/
Connection Notes
Number Connection Name
Index Name
MTS 2 with RGPS and E1 or RGPS and X.21
2a Junction Panel/ X.21 Site Controller/ 15 pin D male connector type
3066546B01
2b Junction Panel/ RGPS X.21/Remote GPS 15 pin D female connector type
3a Junction Panel/ User 25 pin D female connector type
Alarms/Controls Site Controller/
3066549B01
Alarm/Controls
3b Door Alarm Molex connector type
MTS 2 with Internal GPS and X.21
1 3066543B07 Junction Panel/ GPS Site Controller/ GPS Coax cable
2a 3066546B02 Junction Panel/ X.21 Site Controller/ N/A
X.21/Remote GPS
3a Junction Panel/ User 25 pin D female connector type
Alarms/Controls Site Controller/
3066549B01
Alarm/Controls
3b Door Alarm Molex connector type
MTS 2 with Internal GPS and E1
1 3066543B07 Junction Panel/ GPS Site Controller/ GPS Coax cable
3a Junction Panel/ User 25 pin D female connector type
Alarms/Controls Site Controller/
3066549B01
Alarm/Controls
3b Door Alarm Molex connector type

5-10 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS Cabling

Figure 5-6 User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS Cabling Diagram for MTS 2

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-11


User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Table 5-7 User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS Cabling for MTS 4

Cable Part From Unit/ To Unit/


Notes
Index Number Connection Name Connection Name
MTS 4 with RGPS and E1 or RGPS and X.21
1c Junction Panel/ RGPS 1 Site Controller 1/ 15 pin D male connector type
1a X.21/Remote GPS 15 pin D female connector
3066546B03 Junction Panel/ X.21 type
1b Site Controller 2/
1d Junction Panel/ RGPS 2 X.21/Remote GPS 15 pin D male connector type
4a Junction Panel/ User 25 pin D female connector
Alarms/Controls Site Controller 1 and type
3066547B01
2/ Alarm/Controls
4b Door Alarm Molex connector type
MTS 4 with Internal GPS and X.21
1a Junction Panel/ X.21 Site Controller 1 and N/A
3066546B04
1b 2/ X.21/Remote GPS
2 3066543B10 Junction Panel/ GPS 1 Site Controller 1/ Coax cable
GPS
3 3066543B10 Junction Panel/ GPS 2 Site Controller 2/ Coax cable
GPS Only for configuration with
redundant Site Controller
4a Junction Panel/ User 25 pin D female connector
Alarms/Controls type
Only for configuration with
Site Controller 1 and redundant Site Controller
3066547B01
2/ Alarm/Controls
4b Door Alarm Molex connector type
Only for configuration with
redundant Site Controller
MTS 4 with Internal GPS and E1
2 3066543B10 Junction Panel/ GPS 1 Site Controller 1/ Coax cable
GPS
3 3066543B10 Junction Panel/ GPS 2 Site Controller 2/ Coax cable
GPS Only for configuration with
redundant Site Controller
4a Junction Panel/ User 25 pin D female connector
Alarms/Controls Site Controller 1 and type
3066547B01
2/ Alarm/Controls
4b Door Alarm Molex connector type

5-12 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS, and GPS Cabling

Figure 5-7 User Alarms/Controls, X.21, RGPS and GPS Cabling Diagram for MTS 4

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-13


E1 and Ethernet Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

E1 and Ethernet Cabling


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

E1 cabling refers to the cabling between Site Controller and the E1 connector on the Junction Panel.
Ethernet cabling refers to the cabling between Site Controller and Base Radios.

Either E1 or X.21 cabling is used, depending on which option is ordered.


Table 5-8, Table 5-9 and Table 5-10 identify and Figure 5-8, Figure 5-9 and Figure
5-10 show E1 and Ethernet cabling.
Table 5-8 E1 and Ethernet Cabling for MTS LiTE

From Unit/
Cable Part To Unit/ Connection
Connection Notes
Number Name
Index Name
1 3066544B24 Base Radio 1 / SC1 Site Controller/ BR1 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
2 3066567B03 Site Controller/ E1 Junction Panel/ E1 E1 link/ Green cable

Figure 5-8 E1 and Ethernet Cabling Diagram for MTS LiTE

5-14 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual E1 and Ethernet Cabling

Table 5-9 E1 and Ethernet Cabling for MTS 2

From Unit/
Cable Part To Unit/ Connection
Connection Notes
Number Name
Index Name
1 3066544B01 Base Radio 1 / SC1 Site Controller/ BR1 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
2 3066544B02 Base Radio 2/ SC1 Site Controller/ BR2 Ethernet link/ Black cable
3 3066567B01 Site Controller/ E1 Junction Panel/ E1 E1 link/ Green cable

Figure 5-9 E1 and Ethernet Cabling Diagram for MTS 2

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-15


E1 and Ethernet Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Table 5-10 E1 and Ethernet Cabling for MTS 4

From Unit/
Cable Part To Unit/ Connection
Connection Notes
Number Name
Index Name
1 3066544B01 Base Radio 1 / SC1 Site Controller 1/ BR1 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
2 3066544B02 Base Radio 2/ SC1 Site Controller 1/ BR2 Ethernet link/ Black cable
3 3066544B04 Base Radio 3/ SC1 Site Controller 1/ BR3 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
4 3066544B05 Base Radio 4/ SC1 Site Controller 1/ BR4 Ethernet link/ Black cable
5 3066544B15 Base Radio 1 / SC2 Site Controller 2/ BR1 Ethernet link/ Grey cable,
only for configuration with
redundant Site Controller
6 3066544B16 Base Radio 2/ SC2 Site Controller 2/ BR2 Ethernet link/ Black cable,
only for configuration with
redundant Site Controller
7 3066544B01 Base Radio 3/ SC2 Site Controller 2/ BR3 Ethernet link/ Grey cable,
only for configuration with
redundant Site Controller
8 3066544B02 Base Radio 4/ SC2 Site Controller 2/ BR4 Ethernet link/ Black cable,
only for configuration with
redundant Site Controller
9 3066567B02 Junction Panel/ E1 Y-splitter E1 link/ Green cable
3066560B01 Y-splitter Site Controller 1 Y-splitter, 8-pin, 2-jack to 1-
plug
9b 3066567B02 Y-splitter Site Controller 2 E1 link/ Green cable, only for
configuration with redundant
Site Controller
10 3066544B17 Site Controller 2/ Site Controller 1/ Red. Ethernet link/ Blue cable,
Red. Out In only for configuration with
redundant Site Controller
11 3066544B17 Site Controller 1/ Site Controller 2/ Red. Ethernet link/ Blue cable,
Red. Out In only for configuration with
redundant Site Controller

5-16 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual E1 and Ethernet Cabling

Figure 5-10 E1 and Ethernet Cabling Diagram for MTS 4

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-17


E1 and Ethernet Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Table 5-11 E1 and Ethernet Cabling for Expansion Cabinet

From Unit/
Cable Part To Unit/ Connection
Connection Notes
Number Name
Index Name
1 3066544B01 Base Radio 5 / SC 1 XHUB 1 / BR5 Ethernet link / Grey cable
2 3066544B02 Base Radio 6 / SC 1 XHUB 1 / BR6 Ethernet link / Black cable
3 3066544B04 Base Radio 7 / SC 1 XHUB 1 / BR7 Ethernet link / Grey cable
4 3066544B05 Base Radio 8 / SC 1 XHUB 1 / BR8 Ethernet link / Black cable
5 3066544B15 Base Radio 5 / SC 2 XHUB 2 / BR5 Ethernet link / Grey cable,
Only for configuration with
redundant Site Controller
6 3066544B16 Base Radio 6 / SC 2 XHUB 2 / BR6 Ethernet link / Black cable,
Only for configuration with
redundant Site Controller
7 3066544B01 Base Radio 7 / SC 2 XHUB 2 / BR7 Ethernet link / Grey cable,
Only for configuration with
redundant Site Controller
8 3066544B02 Base Radio 8 / SC 2 XHUB 2 / BR8 Ethernet link / Black cable,
Only for configuration with
redundant Site Controller
9 3066544B12 Site Controller 1 / XHUB 1 / Prime Cab Routed through conjunction
Exp Cab hole at the side of the cabinet
10 3066544B12 Site Controller 2 / XHUB 2 / Prime Cab Routed through conjunction
Exp Cab hole at the side of the cabinet

5-18 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual E1 and Ethernet Cabling

Figure 5-11 E1 and Ethernet Cabling for MTS 4 with Expansion Cabinet (to the Right)

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-19


Ethernet Site Link Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Ethernet Site Link Cabling

If an older version of the MTS Junction panel is used, containing only a E1 output (and AUX
output on MTS4 Junction Panel) and no Ethernet Site Link outputs (Link1 and Link2), use a
MTS Ethernet Site Link Retrofit kit in order to get Ethernet Site-link functionality. For more
information, see "Ethernet Site Link Retrofit Kit" on page 4-61.
With such in place, see tables and figures below for configuration.
Table 5-12 Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS LiTE

From Unit/
Cable Part To Unit/ Connection
Connection Notes
Number Name
Index Name
1 3066544B24 Base Radio 1 / SC1 Site Controller/ BR1 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
2 30015009009 Site Controller/ Red Junction Panel/ Link1 Ethernet link
In
3 30015009010 Site Controller/ Exp Junction Panel/ Link2 Ethernet link / Only in Dual
Cab Enet Configuration

Figure 5-12 Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS LiTE

5-20 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Ethernet Site Link Cabling

Table 5-13 Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 2

From Unit/
Cable Part To Unit/ Connection
Connection Notes
Number Name
Index Name
1 3066544B01 Base Radio 1 / SC1 Site Controller/ BR1 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
2 3066544B02 Base Radio 2/ SC1 Site Controller/ BR2 Ethernet link/ Black cable
3 30015009005 Site Controller/ Red Junction Panel/ Link1 Ethernet link
In
4 30015009006 Site Controller/ Exp Junction Panel/ Link2 Ethernet link / Only in Dual
Cab Enet Configuration

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-21


Ethernet Site Link Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Figure 5-13 Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 2

5-22 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Ethernet Site Link Cabling

Table 5-14 Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 4 with Single Site Controller

From Unit/
Cable Part To Unit/ Connection
Connection Notes
Number Name
Index Name
1 3066544B01 Base Radio 1 / SC1 Site Controller 1/ BR1 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
2 3066544B02 Base Radio 2/ SC1 Site Controller 1/ BR2 Ethernet link/ Black cable
3 3066544B04 Base Radio 3/ SC1 Site Controller 1/ BR3 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
4 3066544B05 Base Radio 4/ SC1 Site Controller 1/ BR4 Ethernet link/ Black cable
3066562B01 Junction Panel/ RJ45 coupler Bend Link breakout and insert
5 Link1 RJ45 coupler.
30015009001 RJ45 coupler Site Controller 1/ Red In Ethernet link
3066562B01 Junction Panel/ RJ45 coupler Bend Link breakout and insert
Link2 RJ45 coupler.
6
30015009003 RJ45 coupler Site Controller 1/ Exp Ethernet link / Only in Dual
Cab Enet Configuration

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-23


Ethernet Site Link Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Figure 5-14 Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 4 with Single Site Controller

5-24 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Ethernet Site Link Cabling

Table 5-15 Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 4 with Dual Site Controller

From Unit/
Cable Part To Unit/ Connection
Connection Notes
Number Name
Index Name
1 3066544B01 Base Radio 1 / SC1 Site Controller 1/ BR1 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
2 3066544B02 Base Radio 2/ SC1 Site Controller 1/ BR2 Ethernet link/ Black cable
3 3066544B04 Base Radio 3/ SC1 Site Controller 1/ BR3 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
4 3066544B05 Base Radio 4/ SC1 Site Controller 1/ BR4 Ethernet link/ Black cable
5 3066544B15 Base Radio 1 / SC2 Site Controller 2/ BR1 Ethernet link/ Grey cable,
only for configuration with
redundant Site Controller
6 3066544B16 Base Radio 2/ SC2 Site Controller 2/ BR2 Ethernet link/ Black cable,
only for configuration with
redundant Site Controller
7 3066544B01 Base Radio 3/ SC2 Site Controller 2/ BR3 Ethernet link/ Grey cable,
only for configuration with
redundant Site Controller
8 3066544B02 Base Radio 4/ SC2 Site Controller 2/ BR4 Ethernet link/ Black cable,
only for configuration with
redundant Site Controller
3066562B01 Junction Panel/ RJ45 coupler Bend Link breakout and insert
Link1 RJ45 coupler.
9
30015009002 RJ45 coupler Site Controller 1/ Exp Ethernet link
Cab
3066562B01 Junction Panel/ RJ45 coupler Bend Link breakout and insert
Link2 RJ45 coupler.
10
30015009003 RJ45 coupler Site Controller 2/ Exo Ethernet link / Only in Dual
Cab Enet Configuration

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-25


Ethernet Site Link Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Figure 5-15 Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 4 with Dual Site Controller

5-26 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Ethernet Site Link Cabling

Table 5-16 Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet with Single Site Controller

From Unit/
Cable Part To Unit/ Connection
Connection Notes
Number Name
Index Name
1 3066544B01 Base Radio 1 / SC1 Site Controller 1/ BR1 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
2 3066544B02 Base Radio 2/ SC1 Site Controller 1/ BR2 Ethernet link/ Black cable
3 3066544B04 Base Radio 3/ SC1 Site Controller 1/ BR3 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
4 3066544B05 Base Radio 4/ SC1 Site Controller 1/ BR4 Ethernet link/ Black cable
3066562B01 Junction Panel/ RJ45 coupler Bend Link breakout and insert
5 Link1 RJ45 coupler.
30015009001 RJ45 coupler Site Controller 1/ RedIn Ethernet link/ Blue cable
3066562B01 Junction Panel/ RJ45 coupler Bend Link breakout and insert
Link2 RJ45 coupler.
30015009003 RJ45 coupler 3066562B01 Ethernet link/ Beige cable
6
RJ45 coupler
30015009004 RJ45 coupler XHUB Controller 1/ Ethernet link/ Beige cable
AUX
7 3066544B12 Site Controller 1/ XHUB Controller 1/ Ethernet link
Exp Cab Prime Cab

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-27


Ethernet Site Link Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Figure 5-16 Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet with Single Site Controller

5-28 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Ethernet Site Link Cabling

Table 5-17 Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet with Dual Site Controller

From Unit/
Cable Part To Unit/ Connection
Connection Notes
Number Name
Index Name
1 3066544B01 Base Radio 1 / SC1 Site Controller 1/ BR1 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
2 3066544B02 Base Radio 2/ SC1 Site Controller 1/ BR2 Ethernet link/ Black cable
3 3066544B04 Base Radio 3/ SC1 Site Controller 1/ BR3 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
4 3066544B05 Base Radio 4/ SC1 Site Controller 1/ BR4 Ethernet link/ Black cable
5 3066544B15 Base Radio 1 / SC2 Site Controller 2/ BR1 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
6 3066544B16 Base Radio 2/ SC2 Site Controller 2/ BR2 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
7 3066544B01 Base Radio 3/ SC2 Site Controller 2/ BR3 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
8 3066544B02 Base Radio 4/ SC2 Site Controller 2/ BR4 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
9 3066544B01 Base Radio 5/ SC1 XHUB 1/ BR5 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
10 3066544B02 Base Radio 6/ SC1 XHUB 1/ BR6 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
11 3066544B04 Base Radio 7/ SC1 XHUB 1/ BR7 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
12 3066544B05 Base Radio 8/ SC1 XHUB 1/ BR8 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
13 3066544B15 Base Radio 5/ SC2 XHUB 2/ BR5 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
14 3066544B16 Base Radio 6/ SC2 XHUB 2/ BR6 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
15 3066544B01 Base Radio 7/ SC2 XHUB 2/ BR7 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
16 3066544B02 Base Radio 8/ SC2 XHUB 2/ BR8 Ethernet link/ Grey cable
17 3066544B12 Site Controller 1 / XHUB 1 / Prime Cab Routed through conjunction
Exp Cab hole at the side of the cabinet
18 3066544B12 Site Controller 2 / XHUB 1 / Prime Cab Routed through conjunction
Exp Cab hole at the side of the cabinet
3066562B01 Junction Panel/ RJ45 coupler Bend Link breakout and insert
Link1 RJ45 coupler.
30015009002 RJ45 coupler 3066562B01 Ethernet link/ Beige cable
19
RJ45 coupler
30015009004 RJ45 coupler XHUB Controller 1/ Ethernet link/ Beige cable
AUX1
3066562B01 Junction Panel/ RJ45 coupler Bend Link breakout and insert
Link2 RJ45 coupler.
30015009003 RJ45 coupler 3066562B01 Ethernet link/ Beige cable
20
RJ45 coupler
30015009004 RJ45 coupler XHUB Controller 2/ Ethernet link/ Beige cable
AUX1

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-29


Ethernet Site Link Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Figure 5-17 Ethernet Site Link Cabling for MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet with Dual Site Controller

5-30 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual RF Cabling

RF Cabling
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

RF cabling refers to the cable connections among antenna connectors, the RF Distribu-
tion System (RFDS), and the Base Radios.

RF cabling depends on filter configuration.


RF Cabling diagrams and details for different RF configuration types are presented below:
• MTS LiTE - TX on 1 ant., RX on 1 ant. with No Diversity, see Table 5-18 and Figure 5-18
• MTS LiTE - TX/RX on 1 ant., see Table 5-19 and Figure 5-19
• MTS LiTE - TX on 1 ant., RX on 2 ant., see Table 5-20 and Figure 5-20
• MTS 2 - No diversity, see Table 5-21 and Figure 5-21
• MTS 2 - TX on 1 ant., see Table 5-22 and Figure 5-22
• MTS 2 - TX/RX on 1 ant., see Table 5-23 and Figure 5-23
• MTS 2 - TX/RX on 2 ant., see Table 5-24 and Figure 5-24
• MTS 4 - No diversity, see Figure 5-25 and Figure 5-25
• MTS 4 - TX/RX on 1 ant., see Table 5-26 and Figure 5-26
• MTS 4 - TX/RX on 2 ant., see Table 5-28 and Figure 5-27
• MTS 4 - TX on 1 ant., see Table 5-29 and Figure 5-28
• MTS 4 - TX on 2 ant., see Table 5-30 and Figure 5-29
• Expansion Cabinet – TX/RX on 1 ant., see Table 5-31
• Expansion Cabinet – TX/RX on 2 ant., see Table 5-33
• Expansion Cabinet – TX on 1 ant., see Table 5-34
• Expansion Cabinet – TX on 2 ant., see Table 5-35

Each configuration type described by the table and figure represents a few configurations. Not
all Base Radios and not all filters and associated cables are present in each configuration.

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-31


RF Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Table 5-18 RF Cabling/Connections for MTS LiTE with One TX and One RX ant. No Diversity

To Unit /
Cable Part From Unit /
Index Connection Notes
Number Connection Name
Name
MTS LiTE with One TX and One RX ant. No Diversity
1 3066543B05 Base Radio 1/ TX Duplexer/ TX TX path
2 3066543B18 Preselector/ BR1 Base Radio 1/ RX1 RX path on ANT 2
Base Radio 1/ RX2 Terminator
Base Radio 1/ RX3 Terminator
2866544A01
Duplexer/ BR2 Terminator
Preselector/ BR2 Terminator

Figure 5-18 RF Cabling/Connections for MTS LiTE with One TX and One RX ant. No Diversity

5-32 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual RF Cabling

Table 5-19 RF Cabling/Connections for MTS LiTE with One TX/RX ant.

To Unit /
Cable Part From Unit /
Index Connection Notes
Number Connection Name
Name
MTS LiTE with One TX/RX ant.
1 3066543B05 Base Radio 1/ TX Duplexer/ TX TX path
2 3066543B01 Duplexer/ BR1 Base Radio 1/ RX1 RX path on ANT 1
Base Radio 1/ RX2 Terminator
2866544A01 Base Radio 1/ RX3 Terminator
Duplexer/ BR2 Terminator

Figure 5-19 RF Cabling/Connections for MTS LiTE with One TX/RX ant.

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-33


RF Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Table 5-20 RF Cabling/Connections for MTS LiTE with One TX/RX ant. and One Additional
RX ant.

To Unit /
Cable Part From Unit /
Index Connection Notes
Number Connection Name
Name
MTS LiTE with One TX/RX ant. and One Additional RX ant.
1 3066543B05 Base Radio 1/ TX Duplexer/ TX TX path
2 3066543B01 Duplexer/ BR1 Base Radio 1/ RX1 RX path on ANT 1
3 3066543B18 Preselector/ BR1 Base Radio 1/ RX2 RX path on ANT 2
4 30015023001 Preselector/ RX Junction Panel/ Ant.
2
Base Radio 1/ RX3 Terminator
2866544A01 Duplexer/ BR2 Terminator
Preselector/ BR2 Terminator

Figure 5-20 RF Cabling/Connections for MTS LiTE with One TX/RX ant. and One Additional
RX ant.

5-34 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual RF Cabling

Table 5-21 RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 2 with no diversity

To Unit /
Cable Part From Unit /
Index Connection Notes
Number Connection Name
Name
MTS 2 - No diversity
1 3066543B01 Duplexer/ BR1 Base Radio 1/ RX1 RX path/ RX on 1 or 2 ant.
2 3066543B01 Duplexer/ BR2 Base Radio 2/ RX1 RX path/ RX on 1 or 2 ant.
3 3066543B06 Hybrid Combiner/ Duplexer/ TX TX path
TX Out
4 3066543B12 Base Radio 1/ TX Hybrid Combiner/ TX path
TX A
5 3066543B05 Base Radio 2/ TX Hybrid TX path
Combiner/TX B

The connectors on the top of the filters are directly fitted into appropriate holes in the Junction Panel.

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-35


RF Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Figure 5-21 RF Cabling Diagram for MTS 2 with No Diversity

5-36 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual RF Cabling

Table 5-22 RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 2 with One TX ant. and up to Two Additional RX ant.

To Unit /
Cable Part From Unit /
Index Connection Notes
Number Connection Name
Name
MTS 2 - TX/RX on 1 ant.
1 3066543B01 Preselector 2/ BR1 Base Radio 1/ RX2 RX path / RX on ANT 3

2 3066543B01 Preselector 2/ BR2 Base Radio 2/ RX2 RX path / RX on ANT 3.

3 3066543B01 Preselector 1/ BR1 Base Radio 1/ RX1 RX path / RX on ANT 2

4 3066543B01 Preselector 1/ BR2 Base Radio 2/ RX1 RX path / RX on ANT 2

5 2866544A01 Duplexer/ BR1 terminate duplexed rx

6 2866544A01 Duplexer/ BR2 terminate duplexed rx

7 3066543B06 Hybrid Combiner/ Duplexer/ TX TX path


TX Out
8 3066543B12 Base Radio 1/ TX Hybrid Combiner/ TX path on ANT 1
TX A
9 3066543B05 Base Radio 2/ TX Hybrid TX path on ANT 1
Combiner/TX B
10 2866544A01 Base Radio 1/ RX3 terminate BR RX3
11 2866544A01 Base Radio 2/ RX3 terminate BR RX3

The connectors on the top of the filters are directly fitted into appropriate holes in the Junction Panel.

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-37


RF Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Figure 5-22 RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 2 with One TX ant. and up to Two Additional RX ant.

5-38 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual RF Cabling

Table 5-23 RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 2 with One TX/RX ant. and up to Two Additional
RX ant.

To Unit /
Cable Part From Unit /
Index Connection Notes
Number Connection Name
Name
MTS 2 - TX/RX on 1 ant.
1 3066543B01 Duplexer/ BR1 Base Radio 1/ RX1 RX path on tx/rx ANT 1

2 3066543B01 Duplexer/ BR2 Base Radio 2/ RX1 RX path on tx/rx ANT 1

3 3066543B01 Preselector 1/ BR1 Base Radio 1/ RX2 RX path on ANT 2

4 3066543B01 Preselector 1/ BR2 Base Radio 2/ RX2 RX path on ANT 2

5 3066543B01 Preselector 2/ BR1 Base Radio 1/ RX3 RX path on ANT 3

6 3066543B01 Preselector 2/ BR2 Base Radio 2/ RX3 RX path on ANT 3

7 3066543B06 Hybrid Combiner/ Duplexer/ TX TX path


TX Out
8 3066543B12 Base Radio 1/ TX Hybrid Combiner/ TX path
TX A
9 3066543B05 Base Radio 2/ TX Hybrid TX path
Combiner/TX B

The connectors on the top of the filters are directly fitted into appropriate holes in the Junction Panel.

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-39


RF Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Figure 5-23 RF Cabling Diagram for MTS 2 with One TX/RX ant. and Up to Two Additional RX ant.

5-40 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual RF Cabling

Table 5-24 RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 2 with Two TX/RX ant. and Up to One Additional
RX ant.

Cable Part From Unit / To Unit /


Index Notes
Number Connection Name Connection Name

MTS 2 - TX/RX on 2 ant.


1 3066543B01 Duplexer 1/ BR1 Base Radio 1/ RX1 RX path/ no RX or RX on 1 ant.
2 3066543B01 Duplexer 1/ BR2 Base Radio 2/ RX1 RX path/ no RX or RX on 1 ant.
3 3066543B01 Duplexer 2/ BR1 Base Radio 1/ RX2 RX path/ no RX or RX on 1 ant.
4 3066543B01 Duplexer 2/ BR2 Base Radio 2/ RX2 RX path/ no RX or RX on 1 ant.
5 3066543B01 Preselector 1/ BR1 Base Radio 1/ RX3 RX path/ RX on 1 ant.
6 3066543B01 Preselector 1/ BR2 Base Radio 2/ RX3 RX path/ RX on 1 ant.
7 3066543B05 Base Radio 1/ TX Duplexer 1/ TX TX path
8 3066543B05 Base Radio 2/ TX Duplexer 2/ TX TX path

The connectors on the top of the filters are directly fitted into appropriate holes in the Junction Panel

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-41


RF Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Figure 5-24 RF Cabling Diagram for MTS 2 with Two TX/RX ant. and Up to One Additional RX ant.

5-42 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual RF Cabling

Table 5-25 RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 4 with No Diversity

Cable Part From Unit / To Unit /


Index Notes
Number Connection Name Connection Name
MTS 4 - No Diversity
1 3066543B02 Base Radio 1/ Rx1 Duplexer/ BR1 RX path/ RX on 1 or 2 ant.
2 3066543B02 Base Radio 2/ Rx1 Duplexer/ BR2 RX path/ RX on 1 or 2 ant.
3 3066543B03 Base Radio 3/ Rx1 Duplexer/ BR3 RX path/ RX on 1 or 2 ant.
4 3066543B03 Base Radio 4/ Rx1 Duplexer/ BR4 RX path/ RX on 1 or 2 ant.
5 3066543B08 Base Radio 1/ Tx ATCC 1/ TX A TX path, Coax cable, low loss
6 3066543B08 Base Radio 2/ Tx ATCC 1/ TX B TX path, Coax cable, low loss
7 3066543B09 Base Radio 3/ Tx ATCC 2/ TX A TX path, Coax cable, low loss
8 3066543B09 Base Radio 4/ Tx ATCC 2/ TX B TX path, Coax cable, low loss
9 3066543B15 ATCC (1, 2) Duplexer/ TX TX path, Duplexer Tx cable
10 See Table ATCC 1/ TX OUT ATCC (1, 2) TX path, Interconnect harness
5-27 ATCC 2/ TX OUT

The connectors on the top of the filters are directly fitted into appropriate holes in the Junction Panel.
When Hybrid Combiner (HC) or Manual Tune Cavity Combiner (MTCC) are used instead of
Auto Tune Cavity Combiner (ATCC), connect the cables to corresponding inputs and outputs.

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-43


RF Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Figure 5-25 RF Cabling Diagram for MTS 4 with No Diversity

5-44 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual RF Cabling

Table 5-26 RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 4 with One TX/RX ant. and Up to Two Additional
RX ant.

Cable Part From Unit / To Unit /


Index Notes
Number Connection Name Connection Name
MTS 4 - TX/RX on 1 ant.
1 3066543B02 Base Radio 1/ Rx1 Duplexer/ BR1 RX path/ RX on 1 or 2 ant.
2 3066543B02 Base Radio 2/ Rx1 Duplexer/ BR2 RX path/ RX on 1 or 2 ant.
3 3066543B03 Base Radio 3/ Rx1 Duplexer/ BR3 RX path/ RX on 1 or 2 ant.
4 3066543B03 Base Radio 4/ Rx1 Duplexer/ BR4 RX path/ RX on 1 or 2 ant.
5 3066543B02 Base Radio 1/ Rx2 Preselector 1/ BR1 RX path/ RX on 1 or 2 ant.
6 3066543B02 Base Radio 2/ Rx2 Preselector 1/ BR2 RX path/ RX on 1 or 2 ant.
7 3066543B03 Base Radio 3/ Rx2 Preselector 1/ BR3 RX path/ RX on 1 or 2 ant.
8 3066543B03 Base Radio 4/ Rx2 Preselector 1/ BR4 RX path/ RX on 1 or 2 ant.
9 3066543B02 Base Radio 1/ Rx3 Preselector 2/ BR1 RX path/ RX on 2 ant.
10 3066543B02 Base Radio 2/ Rx3 Preselector 2/ BR2 RX path/ RX on 2 ant.
11 3066543B03 Base Radio 3/ Rx3 Preselector 2/ BR3 RX path/ RX on 2 ant.
12 3066543B03 Base Radio 4/ Rx3 Preselector 2/ BR4 RX path/RX on 2 ant.
13 3066543B08 Base Radio 1/ Tx ATCC 1/ TX A TX path, Coax cable, low loss
14 3066543B08 Base Radio 2/ Tx ATCC 1/ TX B TX path, Coax cable, low loss
15 3066543B09 Base Radio 3/ Tx ATCC 2/ TX A TX path, Coax cable, low loss
16 3066543B09 Base Radio 4/ Tx ATCC 2/ TX B TX path, Coax cable, low loss
17 3066543B15 ATCC (1, 2) Duplexer/ TX TX path, Duplexer Tx cable
18 See Table ATCC 1/ TX OUT ATCC (1, 2) TX path, Interconnect harness
5-27 ATCC 2/ TX OUT

The connectors on the top of the filters are directly fitted into appropriate holes in the Junction Panel.
When Hybrid Combiner (HC) or Manual Tune Cavity Combiner (MTCC) are used instead of
Auto Tune Cavity Combiner (ATCC), connect the cables to corresponding inputs and outputs.

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-45


RF Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Table 5-27 TX ATCC Interconnect Harness Part Numbers

Part Number Frequency Band


0166501N60 360 MHz – 370 MHz
0166501N61 380 MHz – 390 MHz
0166501N62 390 MHz – 400 MHz
0166501N63 420 MHz – 430 MHz
0166501N64 460 MHz – 470 MHz
91015008001 260 MHz – 275 MHz
0166502N38 851 MHz – 870 MHz

5-46 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual RF Cabling

Figure 5-26 RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 4 with one TX/RX ant. and Up to Two Additional
RX ant.

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-47


RF Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Table 5-28 RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 4 with Two TX/RX ant. and Up to One Additional
RX ant.

To Unit /
Cable Part From Unit /
Index Connection Notes
Number Connection Name
Name
MTS 4 - TX/RX on 2 ant.
1 3066543B02 Base Radio 1/ Rx1 Duplexer 1/ BR1 RX path/ no RX or RX on 1 ant.
2 3066543B02 Base Radio 2/ Rx1 Duplexer 1/ BR2 RX path/ no RX or RX on 1 ant.
3 3066543B03 Base Radio 3/ Rx1 Duplexer 1/ BR3 RX path/ no RX or RX on 1 ant.
4 3066543B03 Base Radio 4/ Rx1 Duplexer 1/ BR4 RX path/ no RX or RX on 1 ant.
5 3066543B02 Base Radio 1/ Rx2 Duplexer 2/ BR1 RX path/ no RX or RX on 1 ant.
6 3066543B02 Base Radio 2/ Rx2 Duplexer 2/ BR2 RX path/ no RX or RX on 1 ant.
7 3066543B03 Base Radio 3/ Rx2 Duplexer 2/ BR3 RX path/ no RX or RX on 1 ant.
8 3066543B03 Base Radio 4/ Rx2 Duplexer 2/ BR4 RX path/ no RX or RX on 1 ant.
9 3066543B02 Base Radio 1/ Rx3 Preselector/ BR1 RX path/ RX on 1 ant.
10 3066543B02 Base Radio 2/ Rx3 Preselector/ BR2 RX path/ RX on 1 ant.
11 3066543B03 Base Radio 3/ Rx3 Preselector/ BR3 RX path/ RX on 1 ant.
12 3066543B03 Base Radio 4/ Rx3 Preselector / BR4 RX path/RX on 1 ant.
13 3066543B08 Base Radio 1/ Tx ATCC 1/ TX A TX path, Coax cable, low loss
14 3066543B08 Base Radio 2/ Tx ATCC 1/ TX B TX path, Coax cable, low loss
15 3066543B09 Base Radio 3/ Tx ATCC 2/ TX A TX path, Coax cable, low loss
16 3066543B09 Base Radio 4/ Tx ATCC 2/ TX B TX path, Coax cable, low loss
17 See Table ATCC 1/ TX OUT ATCC (1, 2) TX path, Interconnect Harness
5-27 ATCC 2/ TX OUT
18 3066543B15 ATCC (1, 2) Duplexer 1/ TX TX path
19 2866544A01 Duplexer 2/ TX - QMA Terminator

The connectors on the top of the filters are directly fitted into appropriate holes in the Junction Panel.
When Hybrid Combiner (HC) or Manual Tune Cavity Combiner (MTCC) is used instead of Auto
Tune Cavity Combiner (ATCC), connect the cables to the corresponding inputs and outputs.

5-48 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual RF Cabling

Figure 5-27 RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 4 with Two TX/RX ant. and Up to One Additional
RX ant.

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-49


RF Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Table 5-29 RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 4 with One TX ant. and up to Three Additional RX ant.

To Unit /
Cable Part From Unit /
Index Connection Notes
Number Connection Name
Name
MTS 4 - TX on 1 ant.
1 3066543B02 Base Radio 1/ Rx1 Preselector 1/ BR1 RX path/ RX on 2 or 3 ant.
2 3066543B02 Base Radio 2/ Rx1 Preselector 1/ BR2 RX path/ RX on 2 or 3 ant.
3 3066543B03 Base Radio 3/ Rx1 Preselector 1/ BR3 RX path/ RX on 2 or 3 ant.
4 3066543B03 Base Radio 4/ Rx1 Preselector 1/ BR4 RX path/ RX on 2 or 3 ant.
5 3066543B02 Base Radio 1/ Rx2 Preselector 2/ BR1 RX path/ RX on 2 or 3 ant.
6 3066543B02 Base Radio 2/ Rx2 Preselector 2/ BR2 RX path/ RX on 2 or 3 ant.
7 3066543B03 Base Radio 3/ Rx2 Preselector 2/ BR3 RX path/ RX on 2 or 3 ant.
8 3066543B03 Base Radio 4/ Rx2 Preselector 2/ BR4 RX path/ RX on 2 or 3 ant.
9 3066543B02 Base Radio 1/ Rx3 Preselector 3/ BR1 RX path/ RX on 3 ant.
10 3066543B02 Base Radio 2/ Rx3 Preselector 3/ BR2 RX path/ RX on 3 ant.
11 3066543B03 Base Radio 3/ Rx3 Preselector 3/ BR3 RX path/ RX on 3 ant.
12 3066543B03 Base Radio 4/ Rx3 Preselector 3/ BR4 RX path/ RX on 3 ant.
13 3066543B08 Base Radio 1/ Tx ATCC 1/ TX A TX path, Coax cable, low loss
14 3066543B08 Base Radio 2/ Tx ATCC 1/ TX B TX path, Coax cable, low loss
15 3066543B09 Base Radio 3/ Tx ATCC 2/ TX A TX path, Coax cable, low loss
16 3066543B09 Base Radio 4/ Tx ATCC 2/ TX B TX path, Coax cable, low loss
17 3066543B15 ATCC (1, 2) Post Filter/ TX TX path, Post Filter cable
18 See Table ATCC 1/ TX OUT ATCC (1, 2) TX path, Interconnect Harness
5-27 ATCC 2/ TX OUT

The connectors on the top of the filters are directly fitted into appropriate holes in the Junction Panel.
When Hybrid Combiner (HC) or Manual Tune Cavity Combiner (MTCC) is used instead of Auto
Tune Cavity Combiner (ATCC), connect the cables to the corresponding inputs and outputs.

5-50 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual RF Cabling

Figure 5-28 RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 4 with One TX ant. and Up to Three Additional
RX ant.

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-51


RF Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Table 5-30 RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 4 with Two TX ant. and Up to Three Additional
RX ant.

Cable Part From Unit / To Unit /


Index Notes
Number Connection Name Connection Name
MTS 4 - TX on 2 ant.
1 3066543B02 Base Radio 1/ Rx1 Preselector 1/ BR1 RX path/ RX on 2 or 3 ant.
2 3066543B02 Base Radio 2/ Rx1 Preselector 1/ BR2 RX path/ RX on 2 or 3 ant.
3 3066543B03 Base Radio 3/ Rx1 Preselector 1/ BR3 RX path/ RX on 2 or 3 ant.
4 3066543B03 Base Radio 4/ Rx1 Preselector 1/ BR4 RX path/ RX on 2 or 3 ant.
5 3066543B02 Base Radio 1/ Rx2 Preselector 2/ BR1 RX path/ RX on 2 or 3 ant.
6 3066543B02 Base Radio 2/ Rx2 Preselector 2/ BR2 RX path/ RX on 2 or 3 ant.
7 3066543B03 Base Radio 3/ Rx2 Preselector 2/ BR3 RX path/ RX on 2 or 3 ant.
8 3066543B03 Base Radio 4/ Rx2 Preselector 2/ BR4 RX path/ RX on 2 or 3 ant.
9 3066543B02 Base Radio 1/ Rx3 Preselector 3/ BR1 RX path/ RX on 3 ant.
10 3066543B02 Base Radio 2/ Rx3 Preselector 3/ BR2 RX path/ RX on 3 ant.
11 3066543B03 Base Radio 3/ Rx3 Preselector 3/ BR3 RX path/ RX on 3 ant.
12 3066543B03 Base Radio 4/ Rx3 Preselector 3/ BR4 RX path/ RX on 3 ant.
13 3066543B08 Base Radio 1/ Tx ATCC 1/ TX A TX path, Coax cable, low loss
14 3066543B08 Base Radio 2/ Tx ATCC 1/ TX B TX path, Coax cable, low loss
15 3066543B09 Base Radio 3/ Tx ATCC 2/ TX A TX path, Coax cable, low loss
16 3066543B09 Base Radio 4/ Tx ATCC 2/ TX B TX path, Coax cable, low loss
17 3066543B15 ATCC 1/ TX OUT Post Filter 1/ TX TX path, Post Filter cable
18 3066543B15 ATCC 2/ TX OUT Post Filter 2/ TX TX path, Post Filter cable

The connectors on the top of the filters are directly fitted into appropriate holes in the Junction Panel.
When Hybrid Combiner (HC) or Manual Tune Cavity Combiner (MTCC) are used instead of
Auto Tune Cavity Combiner (ATCC), connect the cables to corresponding inputs and outputs.

5-52 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual RF Cabling

Figure 5-29 RF Cabling/Connections for MTS 4 with Two TX ant. and Up to Three Additional
RX ant.

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-53


RF Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Table 5-31 RF Cabling/Connections for Expansion Cabinet with One TX/RX ant. and Up to
Two Additional RX ant.

Cable Part
Index From Unit To Unit Notes
Number

1 3066543B02 Base Radio 5 / RX-S 1 RX-S 1 / BR 5 RX path / RX on 1 or 2 ant.


2 3066543B02 Base Radio 6 / RX-S 1 RX-S 1 / BR 6 RX path / RX on 1 or 2 ant.
3 3066543B03 Base Radio 7 / RX-S 1 RX-S 1 / BR 7 RX path / RX on 1 or 2 ant.
4 3066543B03 Base Radio 8 / RX-S 1 RX-S 1 / BR 8 RX path / RX on 1 or 2 ant.
5 3066543B02 Base Radio 5 / RX-S 2 RX-S 2 / BR 5 RX path / RX on 1 or 2 ant.
6 3066543B02 Base Radio 6 / RX-S 2 RX-S 2 / BR 6 RX path / RX on 1 or 2 ant.
7 3066543B03 Base Radio 7 / RX-S 2 RX-S 2 / BR 7 RX path / RX on 1 or 2 ant.
8 3066543B03 Base Radio 8 / RX-S 2 RX-S 2 / BR 8 RX path / RX on 1 or 2 ant.
9 3066543B02 Base Radio 5 / RX-S 3 RX-S 3 / BR 5 RX path / RX on 2 ant.
10 3066543B02 Base Radio 6 / RX-S 3 RX-S 3 / BR 6 RX path / RX on 2 ant.
11 3066543B03 Base Radio 7 / RX-S 3 RX-S 3 / BR 7 RX path / RX on 2 ant.
12 3066543B03 Base Radio 8 / RX-S 3 RX-S 3 / BR 8 RX path / RX on 2 ant.
13 3066543B08 Base Radio 5 / Tx ATCC 3 / TX A TX path, Coax cable, low loss
14 3066543B08 Base Radio 6 / Tx ATCC 3 / TX B TX path, Coax cable, low loss
15 3066543B09 Base Radio 7 / Tx ATCC 4 / TX A TX path, Coax cable, low loss
16 3066543B09 Base Radio 8 / Tx ATCC 4 / TX B TX path, Coax cable, low loss
17 See Table ATCC 3 / TX Out ATCC (3, 4) TX path, Interconnect Harness
5-27 ATCC 4 / TX Out
18 See Table ATCC (3, 4) ATCC (1, 2) TX path, Phasing Harness routed
5-32 Prime Cabinet through conjunction hole at side of
cabinet
19 3066543B11 RX Splitter 1 / Prime Duplexer / Exp RX path/ RX on 1 or 2 ant.
Cab Cab (in MTS 4
Prime Cabinet)
20 3066543B11 RX Splitter 2 / Prime Preselector 1 RX path/ RX on 1 or 2 ant.
Cab / Exp Cab (in
MTS 4 Prime
Cabinet)
21 3066543B11 RX Splitter 3 / Prime Preselector 2 RX path/ RX on 2 ant.
Cab / Exp Cab (in
MTS 4 Prime
Cabinet)

5-54 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual RF Cabling

In the Prime Cabinet, detach the Duplexer Tx cable in the prime cabinet from the T connector
on the Interconnect Harness in the prime. Connect the free end of the Phasing Harness
from the expansion cabinet to the T connector on the Interconnect Harness in the prime
cabinet and connect the Duplexer Tx cable to the T connector in the Phasing Harness.
This way all eight channels are connected to a single Duplexer.
When Manual Tune Cavity Combiner (MTCC) is used instead of Auto Tune Cavity Combiner
(ATCC), connect the cables to corresponding inputs and outputs.
RX cables from Filters in Prime Cabinet to RX Splitters in the Expansion Cabinet
are routed through holes on the back side of the top-lid.

Figure 5-30 Holes in Top Lid for Rx Cables

Table 5-32 TX ATCC Phasing Harness Part Numbers

Part Number Description Frequency Band


0166502N09 Phasing harness, 8Ch 361 MHz – 366 MHz
0166502N10 Phasing harness, 8Ch 363 MHz – 368 MHz
0166502N11 Phasing harness, 8Ch 382 MHz – 387 MHz
0166502N12 Phasing harness, 8Ch 384 MHz – 389 MHz
0166502N13 Phasing harness, 8Ch 390 MHz – 395 MHz
0166502N14 Phasing harness, 8Ch 392 MHz.5-397.5 MHz
0166502N15 Phasing harness, 8Ch 395 MHz – 400 MHz
0166502N16 Phasing harness, 8Ch 420 MHz – 425 MHz
0166502N17 Phasing harness, 8Ch 422.5 MHz – 427.5 MHz
0166502N18 Phasing harness, 8Ch 425 MHz – 430 MHz
0166502N19 Phasing harness, 8Ch 460 MHz – 465 MHz

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-55


RF Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Table 5-32 TX ATCC Phasing Harness Part Numbers (Continued)


Part Number Description Frequency Band
0166502N22 Phasing harness, 8Ch 462.5 MHz – 467.5 MHz
0166502N23 Phasing harness, 8Ch 465 MHz – 470 MHz
0166502N36 Phasing harness, 8Ch 800 MHz band (851 – 870
MHz)

5-56 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual RF Cabling

Figure 5-31 RF Cabling/Connections for Expansion Cabinet with One TX/RX ant. and Up to
Two Additional RX ant.

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-57


RF Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Table 5-33 RF Cabling/Connections for Expansion Cabinet with Two TX/RX ant. and Up to One
Additional RX ant.

In- Cable Part


From Unit To Unit Notes
dex Number
1 3066543B02 Base Radio 5 / RX-S 1 RX-S 1 / BR 5 RX path / no RX or RX on 1 ant.
2 3066543B02 Base Radio 6 / RX-S 1 RX-S 1 / BR 6 RX path / no RX or RX on 1 ant.
3 3066543B03 Base Radio 7 / RX-S 1 RX-S 1 / BR 7 RX path / no RX or RX on 1 ant.
4 3066543B03 Base Radio 8 / RX-S 1 RX-S 1 / BR 8 RX path / no RX or RX on 1 ant.
5 3066543B02 Base Radio 5 / RX-S 2 RX-S 2 / BR 5 RX path / no RX or RX on 1 ant.
6 3066543B02 Base Radio 6 / RX-S 2 RX-S 2 / BR 6 RX path / no RX or RX on 1 ant.
7 3066543B03 Base Radio 7 / RX-S 2 RX-S 2 / BR 7 RX path / no RX or RX on 1 ant.
8 3066543B03 Base Radio 8 / RX-S 2 RX-S 2 / BR 8 RX path / no RX or RX on 1 ant.
9 3066543B02 Base Radio 5 / RX-S 3 RX-S 3 / BR 5 RX path / RX on 1 ant.
10 3066543B02 Base Radio 6 / RX-S 3 RX-S 3 / BR 6 RX path / RX on 1 ant.
11 3066543B03 Base Radio 7 / RX-S 3 RX-S 3 / BR 7 RX path / RX on 1 ant.
12 3066543B03 Base Radio 8 / RX-S 3 RX-S 3 / BR 8 RX path / RX on 1 ant.
13 3066543B08 Base Radio 5 / Tx ATCC 3 / TX A TX path, Coax cable, low loss
14 3066543B08 Base Radio 6 / Tx ATCC 3 / TX B TX path, Coax cable, low loss
15 3066543B09 Base Radio 7 / Tx ATCC 4 / TX A TX path, Coax cable, low loss
16 3066543B09 Base Radio 8 / Tx ATCC 4 / TX B TX path, Coax cable, low loss
17 See Table ATCC 3 / TX OUT ATCC (3, 4) TX path, Interconnect Harness
5-27 ATCC 4 / TX OUT
18 3066543B16 ATCC (3, 4) Duplexer 2 / TX TX path, Duplexer TX cable routed
in Prime Cabinet through conjunction hole at side of the
cabinet
19 3066543B11 RX Splitter 1 / Prime Duplexer 1/ Exp RX path/ RX on 1 or 2 ant.
Cab Cab (in MTS 4
Prime Cabinet)
20 3066543B11 RX Splitter 2 / Prime Duplexer 2 / Exp RX path/ RX on 1 or 2 ant.
Cab Cab (in MTS 4
Prime Cabinet)
21 3066543B11 RX Splitter 3 / Prime Preselector / Exp RX path/ RX on 2 ant.
Cab Cab (in MTS 4
Prime Cabinet)

In the Prime Cabinet, the cables from ATCC 1/TX OUT to Duplexer 1/TX and from ATCC
2/TX to Duplexer 2/TX needs to be combined with a T Cable and connected to Duplexer
1/TX, allowing Expansion Cabinet channels to be connected to Duplexer 2/TX.
When MTCC is used instead of ATCC, connect the cables to corresponding inputs and outputs.
RX cables from Filters in Prime Cabinet to RX Splitters in the Expansion Cabinet
are routed through holes on the back side of the top-lid.

5-58 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual RF Cabling

Figure 5-32 RF Cabling/Connections for Expansion Cabinet with Two TX/RX ant. and Up to
One Additional RX ant.

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-59


RF Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Table 5-34 RF Cabling/Connections for Expansion Cabinet with One TX ant. and Up to Three
Additional RX ant.

In- Cable Part


From Unit To Unit Notes
dex Number
1 3066543B02 Base Radio 5 / RX-S 1 RX-S 1 / BR 5 RX path / RX on 2 or 3 ant.
2 3066543B02 Base Radio 6 / RX-S 1 RX-S 1 / BR 6 RX path / RX on 2 or 3 ant.
3 3066543B03 Base Radio 7 / RX-S 1 RX-S 1 / BR 7 RX path / RX on 2 or 3 ant.
4 3066543B03 Base Radio 8 / RX-S 1 RX-S 1 / BR 8 RX path / RX on 2 or 3 ant.
5 3066543B02 Base Radio 5 / RX-S 2 RX-S 2 / BR 5 RX path / RX on 2 or 3 ant.
6 3066543B02 Base Radio 6 / RX-S 2 RX-S 2 / BR 6 RX path / RX on 2 or 3 ant.
7 3066543B03 Base Radio 7 / RX-S 2 RX-S 2 / BR 7 RX path / RX on 2 or 3 ant.
8 3066543B03 Base Radio 8 / RX-S 2 RX-S 2 / BR 8 RX path / RX on 2 or 3 ant.
9 3066543B02 Base Radio 5 / RX-S 3 RX-S 3 / BR 5 RX path / RX on 3 ant.
10 3066543B02 Base Radio 6 / RX-S 3 RX-S 3 / BR 6 RX path / RX on 3 ant.
11 3066543B03 Base Radio 7 / RX-S 3 RX-S 3 / BR 7 RX path / RX on 3 ant.
12 3066543B03 Base Radio 8 / RX-S 3 RX-S 3 / BR 8 RX path / RX on 3 ant.
13 3066543B08 Base Radio 5 / Tx ATCC 3 / TX A TX path, Coax cable, low loss
14 3066543B08 Base Radio 6 / Tx ATCC 3 / TX B TX path, Coax cable, low loss
15 3066543B09 Base Radio 7 / Tx ATCC 4 / TX A TX path, Coax cable, low loss
16 3066543B09 Base Radio 8 / Tx ATCC 4 / TX B TX path, Coax cable, low loss
17 See Table ATCC 3 / TX Out ATCC (3, 4) TX path, Interconnect Harness
5-27 ATCC 4 / TX Out
18 See Table ATCC (3, 4) ATCC (1, 2) in TX path, Phasing Harness routed
5-32 Prime Cabinet through conjunction hole at side of
the cabinet
19 3066543B11 RX Splitter 1 / Prime Duplexer 1/ Exp RX path/ RX on 1 or 2 ant.
Cab Cab (in MTS 4
Prime Cabinet)
20 3066543B11 RX Splitter 2 / Prime Duplexer 2 / Exp RX path/ RX on 1 or 2 ant.
Cab Cab (in MTS 4
Prime Cabinet)
21 3066543B11 RX Splitter 3 / Prime Preselector / Exp RX path/ RX on 2 ant.
Cab Cab (in MTS 4
Prime Cabinet)

5-60 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual RF Cabling

When MTCC is used instead of ATCC, connect the cables to corresponding inputs and outputs.
In the Prime Cabinet, detach the Post Filter cable in the prime cabinet from the T connector
on the Interconnect Harness in the prime. Connect the free end of the Phasing Harness
from the expansion cabinet to the T connector on the Interconnect Harness in the prime
cabinet and connect the Post Filter cable to the T connector in the Phasing Harness. This
ensures that all eight channels are connected to a single Post Filter.
RX cables from Filters in Prime Cabinet to RX Splitters in the Expansion Cabinet
are routed through holes on the back side of the top-lid.

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-61


RF Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Figure 5-33 RF Cabling/Connections for Expansion Cabinet with One TX ant. and Up to Three
Additional RX ant.

5-62 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual RF Cabling

Table 5-35 RF Cabling/Connections for Expansion Cabinet with Two TX ant. and Up to Three
Additional RX ant.

In- Cable Part


From Unit To Unit Notes
dex Number
1 3066543B02 Base Radio 5 / RX-S 1 RX-S 1 / BR 5 RX path / RX on 2 or 3 ant.
2 3066543B02 Base Radio 6 / RX-S 1 RX-S 1 / BR 6 RX path / RX on 2 or 3 ant.
3 3066543B03 Base Radio 7 / RX-S 1 RX-S 1 / BR 7 RX path / RX on 2 or 3 ant.
4 3066543B03 Base Radio 8 / RX-S 1 RX-S 1 / BR 8 RX path / RX on 2 or 3 ant.
5 3066543B02 Base Radio 5 / RX-S 2 RX-S 2 / BR 5 RX path / RX on 2 or 3 ant.
6 3066543B02 Base Radio 6 / RX-S 2 RX-S 2 / BR 6 RX path / RX on 2 or 3 ant.
7 3066543B03 Base Radio 7 / RX-S 2 RX-S 2 / BR 7 RX path / RX on 2 or 3 ant.
8 3066543B03 Base Radio 8 / RX-S 2 RX-S 2 / BR 8 RX path / RX on 2 or 3 ant.
9 3066543B02 Base Radio 5 / RX-S 3 RX-S 3 / BR 5 RX path / RX on 3 ant.
10 3066543B02 Base Radio 6 / RX-S 3 RX-S 3 / BR 6 RX path / RX on 3 ant.
11 3066543B03 Base Radio 7 / RX-S 3 RX-S 3 / BR 7 RX path / RX on 3 ant.
12 3066543B03 Base Radio 8 / RX-S 3 RX-S 3 / BR 8 RX path / RX on 3 ant.
13 3066543B08 Base Radio 5 / Tx ATCC 3 / TX A TX path, Coax cable, low loss
14 3066543B08 Base Radio 6 / Tx ATCC 3 / TX B TX path, Coax cable, low loss
15 3066543B09 Base Radio 7 / Tx ATCC 4 / TX A TX path, Coax cable, low loss
16 3066543B09 Base Radio 8 / Tx ATCC 4 / TX B TX path, Coax cable, low loss
17 See Table ATCC 3 / TX Out ATCC (3, 4) TX path, Interconnect Harness
5-27 ATCC 4 / TX Out
18 3066543B16 ATCC (3, 4) Post Filter 2 / TX TX path, Post Filter cable routed
in Prime Cabinet through conjunction hole at side of
the cabinet
19 3066543B11 RX Splitter 1 / Prime Duplexer 1/ Exp RX path/ RX on 1 or 2 ant.
Cab Cab (in MTS 4
Prime Cabinet)
20 3066543B11 RX Splitter 2 / Prime Duplexer 2 / Exp RX path/ RX on 1 or 2 ant.
Cab Cab (in MTS 4
Prime Cabinet)
21 3066543B11 RX Splitter 3 / Prime Preselector / Exp RX path/ RX on 2 ant.
Cab Cab (in MTS 4
Prime Cabinet)

In the Prime Cabinet, the cables from ATCC 1/TX OUT to Post Filter 1/TX and from ATCC
2/TX to Post Filter 2/TX needs to be combined with a T Cable and connected to Post Filter
1/TX, allowing Expansion Cabinet channels to be connected to Post Filter 2/TX.
When MTCC is used instead of ATCC, connect the cables to corresponding inputs and outputs.
RX cables from Filters in Prime Cabinet to RX Splitters in the Expansion Cabinet
are routed through holes on the back side of the top-lid.

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-63


RF Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Figure 5-34 RF Cabling/Connections for Expansion Cabinet with Two TX ant. and up to Three
Additional RX ant.

5-64 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual CAN Bus Cabling

CAN Bus Cabling


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

The CAN Bus is integrated in the Site Controller. There is one CAN Bus in the cabinets. The CAN
Bus can be connected to the Site Controllers, PSUs, DPMs, and ATCCs.

The pinout has been designed so that an accidental mis-connection by one or into one of the
other RJ45 connectors (Ethernet, Service port, or E1) does not damage any circuitry.

The CAN Bus is a 120Ω twisted line with termination at the ends.

MTS LiTE CAN Bus Cabling


The Site Controller contains the internal termination in one end of the CAN Bus, and the
last Duplexer in the CAN Bus has a terminator in one connector. Table 5-36 identify and
Figure 5-35 show the CAN Bus cabling in MTS LiTE.
Table 5-36 CAN Bus Cabling for MTS LiTE

Cable Part From Unit / Connection To Unit / Connection


Index Notes
Number Name Name
MTS LiTE
1 3066575B01 Site Controller/ CAN Power Supply Unit/ CAN1 Red cable
2 3066544B25 Power Supply Unit/ CAN2 Duplexer/ CAN1 Red cable
3 0966513A01 Duplexer/ CAN2 CAN Bus termination

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-65


MTS 2 CAN Bus Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Figure 5-35 CAN Bus Cabling Diagram for MTS LiTE

MTS 2 CAN Bus Cabling


The Site Controller contains the internal termination in one end of the CAN Bus, and the last
Duplexer in the CAN Bus has a terminator in one connector. Table 5-37 and Table 5-38 identify
and Figure 5-36 and Figure 5-37 show the CAN Bus cabling in MTS 2.

CAN Bus cabling depends on filter configuration.


Table 5-37 CAN Bus Cabling for MTS 2 with TX/RX on 1 ant. RX on 2 ant.

Cable Part From Unit / Connection To Unit / Connection


Index Notes
Number Name Name
MTS 2 (TX/RX on 1 ant. RX on 2 ant.)
1 3066575B01 Site Controller/ CAN Power Supply Unit/ CAN1 Red cable
2 3066544B10 Power Supply Unit/ CAN2 Duplexer/ CAN1 Red cable
3 0966513A01 Duplexer/ CAN2 CAN Bus termination

5-66 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS 2 CAN Bus Cabling

Figure 5-36 CAN Bus Cabling Diagram for MTS 2 with TX/RX on 1 ant. RX on 2 ant.

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-67


MTS 2 CAN Bus Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Table 5-38 CAN Bus Cabling for MTS 2 with TX/RX on 1 ant. RX on 2 ant.

Cable Part From Unit / Connection To Unit / Connection


Index Notes
Number Name Name
MTS 2 (TX/RX on 2 ant. RX on 1ant.)
1 3066575B01 Site Controller/ CAN Power Supply Unit/ CAN1 Red cable
2 3066544B10 Power Supply Unit/ CAN2 Duplexer1/ CAN1 Red cable
3 3066544B03 Duplexer1/ CAN2 Duplexer2/ CAN1 Red cable
4 0966513A01 Duplexer2/ CAN2 CAN Bus termination

Figure 5-37 CAN Bus Cabling Diagram for MTS 2 with TX/RX on 2 ant. RX on 1ant.

5-68 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS 4 CAN Bus Cabling

MTS 4 CAN Bus Cabling


The Site Controller contains the internal termination in one end of the CAN Bus, and the last
Duplexer in the CAN Bus has a terminator in one connector. Table 5-39 and Table 5-40 identify
and Figure 5-38 and Figure 5-39 show the CAN Bus cabling in MTS 4.

CAN Bus cabling depends on filter configuration.


Table 5-39 CAN Bus Cabling for MTS 4 with TX/RX or TX on 1 ant.

Cable Part From Unit / Connection


Index To Unit / Connection Name Notes
Number Name
MTS 4 (TX/RX or TX on 1 ant. with ATCCs)
1 3066575B01 Site Controller 1/ CAN Power Supply Unit 1/ CAN1 Red cable
2 3066544B06 Power Supply Unit 1/ CAN2 Duplexer or Post Filter/ CAN1 Red cable
3 3066544B03 Duplexer or Post Filter/ CAN2 ATCC 1/ CAN1 Red cable
4 3066544B09 ATCC 1/ CAN2 ATCC 2/ CAN1 Red cable
5 3066544B06 ATCC 2/ CAN2 Power Supply Unit 2/ CAN1 Red cable
6 3066575B01 Power Supply Unit 2/ CAN2 Site Controller 2/ CAN With
redundant Site
Controller/
red cable
7 0966513A01 Power Supply Unit 2/ CAN2 CAN Bus termination Without
redundant Site
Controller

When MTCCs or HCs are used instead of ATCCs, the CAN Bus is connected directly from
Duplexer or Post Filter/ CAN2 connector to Power Supply Unit 2/ CAN1 connector.

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-69


MTS 4 CAN Bus Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Figure 5-38 CAN Bus Cabling Diagram for MTS 4 with TX/RX or TX on 1 ant.

5-70 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS 4 CAN Bus Cabling

Table 5-40 CAN Bus Cabling for MTS 4 with TX/RX or TX on 2 ant. with ATCCs

Cable Part From Unit / Connection To Unit / Connection


Index Notes
Number Name Name

MTS 4 (TX/RX or TX on 2 or ant. with ATCCs)


1 3066575B01 Site Controller 1/ CAN Power Supply Unit 1/ Red cable
CAN1
2 3066544B06 Power Supply Unit 1/ Duplexer 1 or Post Filter Red cable
CAN2 1/ CAN1
3 3066544B09 Duplexer 1 or Post Filter1/ Duplexer 2 or Post Filter Red cable
CAN2 2/ CAN1
4 3066544B03 Duplexer 2 or Post Filter 2 ATCC 1/ CAN1 Red cable
/ CAN2
5 3066544B09 ATCC 1/ CAN2 ATCC 2/ CAN1 Red cable
6 3066544B06 ATCC 2/ CAN2 Power Supply Unit 2/ Red cable
CAN1
7 0966513A01 Power Supply Unit 2/ CAN Bus termination without redundant
CAN2 TCS
8 3066575B01 Power Supply Unit 2/ Site Controller 2/ CAN with redundant Site
CAN2 Controller/ red cable

When MTCCs or HCs are used instead of ATCCs, the CAN Bus is connected directly from
Duplexer 2 or Post Filter 2/ CAN2 connector to Power Supply Unit 2/ CAN1 connector.

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-71


MTS 4 CAN Bus Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Figure 5-39 CAN Bus Cabling Diagram for MTS 4 with TX/RX or TX on 2 ant. with ATCCs

5-72 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Expansion Cabinet CAN Bus Cabling

Expansion Cabinet CAN Bus Cabling


Table 5-41 lists the CAN Bus Cabling for MTS 4 with Expansion Cabinet.
Table 5-41 CAN Bus Cabling for MTS 4 with Expansion Cabinet

Cable Part
Index From Unit To Unit Notes
Number

A 3066544B09 Duplexer or PostFilter / ATCC 2 / CAN1 Prime Cabinet


CAN2
H 3066544B09 ATCC 2 / CAN2 ATCC 1 / CAN1 Prime Cabinet
F 3066544B03 ATCC 1 / CAN2 PSU 2 / CAN1 Prime Cabinet
F 3066544B08 PSU 2 / CAN 2 (Prime PSU 3 / CAN1 (Exp In all configurations
Cab) Cab)
PSU 3 / CAN2 (Exp Cab) Joint 1 If only one PSU and no
ATCC in Exp Cab
F 3066544B06 PSU 3 / CAN2 (Exp Cab) PSU 4 / CAN1 If two PSUs in Exp Cab
PSU 3 / CAN2 (Exp Cab) ATCC 3 / CAN1 If one PSU and ATCC in
Exp Cab
F 3066544B06 PSU 4 / CAN2 (Exp Cab) Joint 1 If no ATCC in Exp Cab
PSU 4 / CAN2 (Exp Cab) ATCC 3 / CAN1 If ATCC in Exp Cab
F ATCC 3 / CAN2 Joint 1 If one ATCC in Exp Cab
3066544B09
H ATCC 3 / CAN2 ATCC 4 / CAN1 If two ATCC in Exp Cab
F 3066544B06 ATCC 4 / CAN2 Joint 1 If two ATCC in Exp Cab
Joint 1 CAN Bus Without redundant Site
termination Controller
3066544B03
Joint 1 SC 2/ CAN With redundant Site
Controller / red cable

CAN Bus cables from Prime Cabinet to Expansion Cabinet are routed through
the conjunction hole on the side of the cabinets.

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-73


Expansion Cabinet CAN Bus Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

Figure 5-40 CAN Bus Cabling Diagram for MTS4 and Expansion Cabinet with ATCCs

5-74 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Expansion Cabinet CAN Bus Cabling

Figure 5-41 CAN Bus Cabling Diagram for MTS4 and Expansion Cabinet with MTCCs and
Redundant Site Controller

6802800U74-T January 2011 5-75


Expansion Cabinet CAN Bus Cabling Chapter 5: Interconnection and Internal Cabling

This page intentionally left blank.

5-76 6802800U74-T January 2011


Chapter

6
Configuration and Testing
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

The setup and testing procedures covered in this manual are intended to be used in conjunction with
the information provided in Chapter 13, "MTS Troubleshooting" and “MMI Commands Manual”.
Together, the troubleshooting solutions and testing procedures, provide the necessary information to
isolate failures to a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) or replaceable part. This helps to keep the system
down time to a minimum by quickly returning the site to normal operation.

All suspected faulty FRUs should be shipped to a Motorola depot facility for servicing or repair.
For a list of available FRUs, see Appendix A, "Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)".

Setup and Testing Overview


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

The setup and test procedures in this manual are used to test the functionality of the
MTS and help isolate failures to the module level.
The setup and testing procedures are divided into the following sections:
• "Preparation"
• "Site Controller Configuration and Verification"
• "CAN Bus Configuration"
• "Base Radio Configuration and Verification"

6802800U74-T January 2011 6-1


Preparation Chapter 6: Configuration and Testing

Preparation
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Please carefully go through preparation section before proceeding with configuration and testing.
Process 6-1 Preparation Procedures

1 "MMI Commands and MTS Modes of Operation" - briefly describes the usage of Man Machine
Interface Commands.
2 "Test Equipment" - Identifies all recommended test equipment for the Site Controller and Base
Radio Verification.
3 "Service Terminal Setup" - Describes how to connect a service terminal.

MMI Commands and MTS Modes of Operation

You must be familiar with Man-Machine Interface (MMI) commands and their
usage prior to performing procedures in this chapter. Improperly applying
MMI commands can cause damage to the equipment.

The “MTS MMI Commands” manual serves as an introduction and reference for using
the software commands. If you are not totally familiar with using the commands,
read the “MTS MMI Commands” manual before proceeding.
Service technicians can communicate with the MTS through the use of MMI commands and a service
terminal (laptop). MMI commands provide testing capabilities with access to alarm log files and
various diagnostic tests. MMI commands also provide a means to configure the site controller and
base radio(s) for intended operation, and to enable various system tests.
The testing of the MTS by using the MMI can be done in Test Application Mode or with sets
of commands available for Site Controller and Base Radio.
A selected number of MMI commands are used in the procedures within this chapter. The
complete set of MMI commands, including both Site Controller and base radio commands,
is defined in the “MTS MMI Commands” manual.

6-2 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Test Equipment

The MTS Site Controller has the following modes of operation:


• BOOT1 - to access this mode, interrupt the booting process by pressing the
ESC key or Ctrl+C combination when the appropriate message appears. A
password may be required to enter this mode.
• Test Application - to access this mode, type the testapp command when in the BOOT1
mode. To return to the normal Site Controller Application, type reset -oplatform
command. This action reboots and resumes the normal operation.
• Site Controller Application - if the boot process is not interrupted, this
is the default mode of operation.

The MTS Base Radio has the following modes of operation:


• BOOT1 - to access this mode, interrupt the booting process by pressing the ESC key or Ctrl+C
combination when appropriate message appears. A password may be required to enter this mode.
• Test Application - to access this mode, type the testapp command when in BOOT1
mode. To return to the normal Base Radio Application, type reset -oplatform
command. This action reboots and resumes the normal operation.
• Base Radio Application - if the boot process is not interrupted, this is
the default mode of operation.

Each of these modes contains a different set of Man Machine Interface Commands, which
are described in the “MTS MMI Commands” manual.

The Test Application mode is a powerful mode. Inappropriate use of


the Test Application MMI can lead to a permanent hardware failure.
Please proceed with extreme caution.

Test Equipment
Table 6-1 lists the recommended test equipment for the Equipment Cabinet proce-
dures. Equivalent equipment is acceptable.

Ensure that the test equipment is connected to the same ground system as the
equipment under test before any other connections are made to the test equipment.

6802800U74-T January 2011 6-3


Service Cable and Connector Box Description Chapter 6: Configuration and Testing

Table 6-1 Equipment for Cabinet Testing

Equipment Model/Type Manufacturer Description


Service Terminal Locally Procured Used to access and interface with
Site Controller and BR MMI
Service Connector Box 0166502N05 Motorola Used for measuring receiver
sensitivity
Basic Service Cable 3066565B01 Motorola
Coaxial Directional 3041-20 Narda Used for receive test signal
Coupler injection into duplex TX/RX
antenna port
Circulator, 260 MHz band Partnumber needed Ferrocom
Circulator, 360 MHz– 9C30-41 Ferrocom
405 MHz
Circulator, 800 MHz– 9C78 Ferrocom
900 MHz
Load 375 BNM Narda
RF Attenuator, 10dB minimum 100 W Motorola Used to attenuate transmit signals
for testing
RF Adapter 33 QMA-N-50- 1/133 Huber & Suhner “N” female to “QMA” male
NE
RF Adapter 31 N-QMA- 1/1-- NE Huber & Suhner “N” female to “QMA” female
RF Adapter 33_716-N-50-1/---_UE Huber & Suhner “N” female to DIN 7-16 male
Rubidium Frequency PRFS (or 2008) Ball/Efratom Used as a frequency standard for
Standard (UCT) receive test
TETRA Signal Generator Rhode & Schwarz: Used for checking receive and
SMU200A + SMX-K8 transmit operation
TETRA Analyzer Agilent E4443A Used for checking receive and
(optional) transmit operation
Miscellaneous Cabling Locally Procured Used to connect the signal
and Connectors generator to the antenna ports

Service Cable and Connector Box Description


The Basic Service Cable (3066565B01) is used to connect the Service Terminal RS-232 port (DB9M)
to the Site Controller or Base Radio RJ45 Service Port to run the MMI commands.
The TESS MTS configuration application must be connected to the Site Controller using an Ethernet patch
cord between the Service Terminal network port and the Site Controller service port through a telnet session.

6-4 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Service Cable and Connector Box Description

The Basic Service cable can be used with a DB9M to DB9M gender changer for the loading of infrastructure
keys (Ki) from a Key Variable Loader (KVL) into Site Controllers and Base Radios of encrypted MTSs.
A specially crafted Service Connector Box is used for measuring receiver sensitivity; see Figure 6-2 and
Figure 6-3. This box has two additional trigger connectors that allow the MTS to connect to a TETRA Test
set and requires a standard RS-232 DB9M to DB9F cable to connect it to the Service Terminal.

Figure 6-1 Basic Service Cable

Only the D-SUB 9 Female PINs that are connected are presented in the table
below. The rest are not connected (NC).
Table 6-2 Basic Service Cable Pinout

RJ45 PIN D-SUB 9 Female PIN Description


1 (NC)
2 (NC)
3 (NC)
4 3 RX
5 5 GND
6 (NC)
7 2 TX
8 5 GND

The Service Connector Box (0166502N05) is used for connecting a PC to the Base Radio. It has
additional functionality for measuring receiver sensitivity, see Figure 6-3.

6802800U74-T January 2011 6-5


Service Cable and Connector Box Description Chapter 6: Configuration and Testing

Figure 6-2 Service Connector Box

Figure 6-3 Service Connector Box Pinout

6-6 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Service Terminal Setup

Table 6-3 Site Controller Service Port Pinout

RJ45 PIN Description

1 FE Rx+
2 FE Rx-
3 FE Tx+
4 RxD
5 NC
6 FE Tx-
7 TxD
8 GND

Service Terminal Setup


In the following procedures, whenever there is an instruction to enter software commands, the
commands are presented in bold. Type all the commands exactly as they appear. The command
prompt precedes the command, as in the following example:
Example: SC> help
1. Configure the service terminal’s RS-232 port with the parameters listed in Table 6-4.

2. Connect an RS-232 cable from the serial port on the service terminal to the RJ45
service port on the front of the Site Controller.
Table 6-4 RS-232 Port Configuration

Description Setting
Baud Rate 19200
Parity Bit none
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1

6802800U74-T January 2011 6-7


CAN Bus Configuration Chapter 6: Configuration and Testing

CAN Bus Configuration


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

CAN Bus interconnects units in the BTS. It is used for signalling, configuration and troubleshooting.
CAN Bus configuration and diagnosis in done through use of MMI Commands from the Site Controller.
To use the commands connect the Service Terminal ("Service Terminal Setup") to the Site Controller
using the Service Cable ("Service Cable and Connector Box Description").

All the CAN Bus related Commands are covered in detail in the “MMI Commands” manual.
Using CAN Bus MMI Commands it is possible to diagnose the state of all the devices connected to the CAN Bus:
• "PSU CAN Bus Commands"
• "Fans CAN Bus Commands"
• "DPM CAN Bus Commands"
• "ATCC CAN Bus Commands"
• "Other CAN Bus Commands"

PSU CAN Bus Commands


The PSU CAN Bus Commands are used to verify the state of the Power Supply Unit:
• psu # get alarm - if any of the 'fail' fields indicates YES it means a problem.
Examples:
DC in fail: YES - indicates battery failure. For an MTS not equipped with backup
battery it is normal behaviour and does not indicate any mulfunction.
AC in fail: YES - indicates no or too low AC input voltage.
• psu # get status - shows the status of all power sources (AC/DC, in/out).
• psu # get battery_voltage - shows the battery voltage.
• psu # get battery_current - battery current.
• psu # get battery_temperature - battery temperature.

# in PSU CAN bus commands above denotes the number of the PSU, i.e. PSU 1 or PSU 2.

6-8 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Fans CAN Bus Commands

Fans CAN Bus Commands


The Fans CAN Bus Commands are used to verify the state of the Cooling Fans connected through CAN Bus.:
• Use psu # get fan_config or psu # get status to verify the number of fans installed in the system.
• If psu # get alarm indicates that any of FAN fail (1/2/3) fields equals
YES, this means that a fan is failing.
• psu # get psu_temperature - if the temperature is too hot this also in-
dicates a problem with cooling.
• psu # get alarm will also show Over temp. alarm showing YES if the temperature is too high.

During initial commissioning, verify that fan configuration match the actual number of fans in the
system. If needed, use the psu # set fan_config command to change the fan configuration.
Examples:
psu 1 set fan_config 1 1 1 to define three fans present on PSU1.
psu 1 set fan_config 1 1 0 to define fans present on PSU1 Fan 1
and 2, and no fan present on PSU 1 Fan 3
psu 2 set fan_config 0 0 0 to define no fans present on PSU2.

DPM CAN Bus Commands


The DPM CAN Bus Commands are used to verify the state of the Digital Power Meter:
• dpm # get alarm - shows all the alarms related to the DPM
VSWR alarm: YES - may indicate a broken antenna.
• dpm # get fwd_power - if the reading is too low, it may indicate a broken
connection between the DPM and Base Radio.

ATCC CAN Bus Commands


The ATCC CAN Bus Commands are used to verify the state of the Cavity Combiners:
• atc # get alarm - if there is at least oneCavities VSWR Alarm, it indicates
a problem with the Cavity Combiner.
• atc # get cav_status <cav_number> - use this command for each Cavity Combiner.
Cavity VSWR Alarm - this Cavity Combiner is unable to tune. An ac-
tual value of VSWR is shown.
Channel Spacing Alarm - means that frequency of one Base Radio
is tuned too close to another.
atc # get cav_status <cav_number> will also list the frequencies of each Cavity Combiner,
this can be compared to the setting of the corresponding Base radio for verification.

6802800U74-T January 2011 6-9


Other CAN Bus Commands Chapter 6: Configuration and Testing

Other CAN Bus Commands


Other CAN Bus Commands for mapping Track IDs are described in the appropriate
chapters as a part of a replacement procedure.:
can check_mapping lists the registered, unregistered and unknown devices connected through CAN Bus.
Example:
SC> can check_mapping
Units are present:
Device Track ID
DPM 1 JTH0500101
PSU 1 JTH0500200
Units are not present:
DPM 2 JTH0500105
Track ID not mapped
JTH0500102

• If there are no devices present, this means the cabling is possibly corrupted.
• All not mapped devices should be mapped.

6-10 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Site Controller Configuration and Verification

Site Controller Configuration and Verification


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

The Site controller (SC) setup and checkout procedures specify steps that verify operation within
the Site Controller. The Site Controller verification consists of:
Process 6-2 The Site controller (SC) setup and checkout procedures.

1 "Site Controller Setup" - Describes how to verify the Site Controller Configuration
2 "E1 Connection Test" "X.21 Connection Test" - Describes how to perform E1 (X.21) Loopback
to test E1 (X.21) interface and cabling
3 "Site Reference Check" - Describes how to check for proper SRI functioning.

Site Controller Setup

If an MTS or Site Controller is moved, it is important to clear the site location


memory to force the stored position data to be re-initialized.
To clear the site location enter the following command on the Site Controller
terminal whilst the MTS is running in application mode:
site_location -reset
Then restart the Site Controller to allow calculation of it’s new
location to commence (site survey)

Procedure 6-1 Site Controller Setup

1 Switch the Power Supply Unit ON.


2 Start-up the service terminal.
3 There will be a series of self-tests. By default, after a few seconds, the Site Controller will
launch the Site Controller Application. Other modes are described in "MMI Commands and
MTS Modes of Operation".
4 At the prompt, enter status sc –all. The command displays preliminary diagnostics information
on the Site Controller. This includes the health of the Site Controller, the trunking state, the
internal state and the site link status.

If all details for the status is needed, use the Status bts –l command.

6802800U74-T January 2011 6-11


E1 Connection Test Chapter 6: Configuration and Testing

Procedure 6-1 Site Controller Setup (Continued)


5 If any device drivers are reported as “failed to initialize”, then this indicates a problem with that
peripheral. However, successful initialization of a device does not guarantee that it is fully
functional; further tests are necessary to ensure this. The above tests are carried out upon
power-up or reset. The command simply reports the last status of the test. To actually re-run the
tests, it is necessary to reset the Site Controller. Further Site Controller commands are available
as described in the manual “MTS MMI Commands”. These may also be listed by typing help
at the prompt.

This procedure may be halted and restarted at any time by pressing the RESET push
button for at least 2 seconds on the Site Controller front panel.

For Site controller indicators refer to Chapter 8, "Site Controller".

E1 Connection Test

The E1 connection test requires that the Site Controller is connected to an active E1 line.

The E1 tests the connection between the Site Controller and the CNE core router. All applications that
communicate with the CNE utilize the Internet Protocol (IP). The current state and statistics for IP may be
obtained using the netstat and netstat -s commands. The correct functioning of the IP layer may be determined
through careful use of the ping command. For more information refer to “MTS MMI Commands” manual.
Enter the following loopback test command in Site Controller Test Application: e1el. MMI
modes are described in "MMI Commands and MTS Modes of Operation".

X.21 Connection Test

The X.21 connection test requires the Site Controller to be connected to a Network
Terminating Unit (NTU) which supports the X.21 loop 3 command.

Enter the following loopback test command in Site Controller Test Application: e1el. MMI
modes are described in "MMI Commands and MTS Modes of Operation".

6-12 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Site Reference Check

Site Reference Check


The SRI status is checked from the Site Controller Application. MMI modes are described
in "MMI Commands and MTS Modes of Operation".
Verify the GPS Receiver status as follows:
At the prompt, type: status sri
Verify that:
• GPS State is "GPS 3D FIX" or "GPS POSITION HOLD" depending on
the type of GPSR (internal/external)
• GPS Operating OK is "YES"

The GPS LED will flash satellite tracking commences and will be fully on once GPS is fully trained.
If satellite tracking is NOT ADEQUATE, make sure:
• The GPS receiver has been allowed enough time to locate the satellites (in
extreme cases this may take up to 2 hours).
• The GPS antenna cable is properly connected. If it is not, reconnect the cable
properly and then reset the Site Controller. If cable is found to be properly
connected, the GPS antenna is possibly faulty.

Refer to Chapter 13, "MTS Troubleshooting" for more information on troubleshooting GPS.

Do not attempt to make a resistance check of the GPS antenna. Damage to


the active devices within the antenna element may result.

6802800U74-T January 2011 6-13


Base Radio Configuration and Verification Chapter 6: Configuration and Testing

Base Radio Configuration and Verification


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For the Base Radio, there are a number of procedures that you must follow to ensure that it is up and running.
All module specific information is programmed in the factory prior to shipment. Base
Radio specific parameters (for example, receive and transmit frequencies) are downloaded
to the Base Radio from the network/Site Controller.
Process 6-3 Base Radio Configuration

1 "Base Radio Startup Sequence" - verification of the BRC state using the front panel LEDs.
2 "Selecting Base Radio Position and Receivers" :
• "Setting and Accessing Base Radio Position" - setting the position of the BRC in the
Cabinet.
• "Setting Base Radio IP".
• "Base Radio Receiver Configuration" - setting the receiver diversity configuration.
3 "Station Verification Procedures":
• "Base Radio Software Revision Verification"
• "Transmitter Verification"
• "Receiver Verification"
4 "Displaying Base Radio Alarms"

6-14 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Base Radio Startup Sequence

Base Radio Startup Sequence


The following procedure describes starting the base radio controller (BRC) and using
test software resident in the BRC flash memory.
Procedure 6-2 Base Radio LED Verification

1 Verify the following LED conditions on the base radio controller according to Table 6-5.

Table 6-5 Base Radio LEDs: Normal Startup Sequence

Tx
Status (Transmit) Alarm Description
off off off No power / initial
LED test (flashing multicolor)
off off Red Booting
Amber off Red Waiting for SWDL – this is where the BR will wait if no Site
Controller is present.
Green off Red BRC main application is running
Green off off No active alarms
Green Green off BR is keyed

Table 6-6 Base Radio LEDs: Hardware Failure

Tx
Status (Transmit) Alarm Description
off off off No power / initial
LED test (flashing multicolor)
off off Red Booting
Amber off Red Waiting for SWDL – this is where the BR will wait if no Site
Controller is present.
Green off Red BRC main application is running but an alarm is preventing the BRC
from keying

Refer to the Controls and Indicators section in the Chapter 10, "Base Radio" for
conditions relating to the LEDs listed above.

6802800U74-T January 2011 6-15


Selecting Base Radio Position and Receivers Chapter 6: Configuration and Testing

Figure 6-4 BRC Indicators

Selecting Base Radio Position and Receivers


The new Base Radio needs to be assigned a position identifier and is performed from the Service port.
MMI commands are used to:
• Set the position identifier of the Base Radio within the cabinet.
• Set the number of active receivers (diversity) of the new Base Radio.

These operations are described in the following procedures. Use the MMI commands as outlined in the
“MTS MMI Commands” manual for detailed information on using the MMI commands.

6-16 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Setting and Accessing Base Radio Position

Setting and Accessing Base Radio Position

Figure 6-5 Base Radios Cabinet Positions and Numbering

The MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet Base Radio Positions and Numbering are exactly
the same as in Figure 6-5. Only Cabinet ID differs.

6802800U74-T January 2011 6-17


Setting and Accessing Base Radio Position Using Test Application Chapter 6: Configuration and Testing

Setting and Accessing Base Radio Position Using Test Application


In order to configure BR cabinet id in the Test Application, use the following command at the command
prompt:
ci -oplatform -c<n>
where <n> is a number between 1 and 8 corresponding to the cabinet id of the Base Radio.
In order to configure BR position id in the Test Application, use the following command at the command
prompt:
pi -oplatform -p<n>
where <p> is a number between 1 and 8 corresponding to the position id of the Base Radio.

Setting and Accessing Base Radio Position Using Boot1


There are two ways of setting the position number of a Base Radio within a selected cabinet using Boot1:
• "Using CCCP Command"
• "Using SPW Command"

The cccp command support configurations with up to 8 Base Radios while the spw
command support configurations with an unlimited number of Base Radios.
Make sure only to use either of the two commands when setting the Base Radio position.

Using CCCP Command


The cccp <cabinet> <position> command programs the position number of where
a Base Radio is mounted within a selected cabinet.
The Base Radio designation starts with the left Base Radio designated as “1”. For example, a Prime cabinet with
two Base Radios would have the left Base Radio being designated as “1”, and the right being designated as “2”.
To set BR Position ID to 2 and Cabinet ID to 1 by using BRC Boot1:
boot1>
cccp 1 2
To set Base Radio position for base radio(s) in MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet by using BRC Boot1, follow the
example below:
boot1>
cccp 2 2

Setting Base Radio position using the cccp command automatically sets the Base Radio
IP Address wherefore "Setting Base Radio IP" should be omitted.

6-18 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Using SPW Command

Using SPW Command


The spw br_id "cabinet:X position:Y" command programs the position number
of where a Base Radio is mounted within a selected cabinet.
The Base Radio designation starts with the left Base Radio designated as “1”. For example, a Prime cabinet with
two Base Radios would have the left Base Radio being designated as “1”, and the right being designated as “2”.
To get current BR Position ID and BR Cabinet ID by using BRC Boot1:
boot1>
spr br_id
"br_id="cabinet:1 position:1

To set BR Position ID to 2 and Cabinet ID to 1 by using BRC Boot1:


boot1>
spw br_id "cabinet:1 position:2"

To set Base Radio position for base radio(s) in MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet by using
BRC Boot1, follow the example below:
boot1>

spw br_id “cabinet:2 position:2”

6802800U74-T January 2011 6-19


Setting Base Radio IP Chapter 6: Configuration and Testing

Setting Base Radio IP

Omit this section if you were setting Base Radio Position using the Boot1
command cccp (see "Using CCCP Command").
To get at read-out of current IP configuration of the Base radios using Boot1:
boot1> spr inet/if/eth0
boot1> spr inet/if/eth1

SUGGESTION

Note down the Ethernet configuration displayed for later use.


To configure the IP address of the Base Radio in the Test Application, use one of the following commands:
• cpp -olan1 -i<IP>
• cpp -olan2 -i<IP>

It is not allowed to change the original MAC addresses of the Base Radio.

The <IP> in commands above is the new IP address (for example 10.0.253.11)
To change and update IP configuration of the Base radio(s) by using Boot1:
boot1> spw inet/if/eth0 “dhcp:no addr:10.0.253.[XY] mask:255.255.255.0
dev_name:FCCETH dev_unit:1 ethaddr:yy:yy:yy:yy:yy:yy mtu:1500”
where [X = Cabinet number; Y = Position number] and yy:yy:yy:yy:yy:yy is the
MAC or Ethernet address of eth0.
To change and update IP configuration of the Base radio(s) by using Boot1:
boot1> spw inet/if/eth1 “dhcp:no addr:10.0.254.[XY] mask:255.255.255.0
dev_name:FCCETH dev_unit:2 ethaddr:yy:yy:yy:yy:yy:yy mtu:1500”
where [X = Cabinet number; Y = Position number] and yy:yy:yy:yy:yy:yy is the
MAC or Ethernet address of eth1.

6-20 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Base Radio Receiver Configuration

Base Radio Receiver Configuration


The procedure below can be done locally as well as remotely. The commands to check and
change the BR parameters require the use of BRC Application MMI.
Procedure 6-3 How to Verify Base Radio Parameters

1 Log in to the Base Radio in application mode.


2 Type get nvm_param rx1 atten_default and press Enter.
Result: The correct setting should be 0 for MTS 4 and 4 for MTS 2.

If no returned parameter value is observed then the parameter is missing. See Table 6-7 to add
the parameter.
3 Type get nvm_param pa dekey_limit and press Enter.
Result: The correct setting should be 6.

If no returned parameter value is observed then the parameter is missing. See Table 6-7 to add
the parameter.
4 Type get nvm_param rx1 rx_dc_inj_usl and press Enter.
Result: The correct setting should be 2.5.

If no returned parameter value is observed then the parameter is missing. See Table 6-7 to add
the parameter.
5 Type get nvm_param rx1 rx_dc_inj_lsl and press Enter.
Result: The correct setting should be 0.
6 Type get nvm_param rx1 ad1_scaling6 and press Enter.
Result: The correct setting should be 28.9.

If no returned parameter value is observed then the parameter is missing. See Table 6-7 to add
the parameter.
7 Type get nvm_param rx1 rx_fru_config and press Enter.
Result: The setting will depend on the receiver diversity required for the site.

If no returned parameter value is observed then the parameter is missing. See Table 6-7 to add
the parameter.

6802800U74-T January 2011 6-21


Base Radio Receiver Configuration Chapter 6: Configuration and Testing

Table 6-7 Corrective Actions for Missing or Bad Base Radio Parameters

Missing or Bad
Corrective Action
Parameter
atten_default • For MTS 4, type set nvm_param rx1 atten_default 0
and press Enter.
• For MTS 2, type set nvm_param rx1 atten_default 4
and press Enter.
• If the parameter is missing for MTS 4, add it by typing set
nvm_miss_param rx1 atten_default 0 and press Enter.
• If the parameter is missing for MTS 2, add it by typing set
nvm_miss_param rx1 atten_default 4 and press Enter.
dekey_limit Type set nvm_param pa dekey_limit 6 and press Enter.
rx_dc_inj_usl Type set nvm_param rx1 rx_dc_inj_usl 2.5 and press Enter.
rx_dc_inj_lsl Type set nvm_param rx1 rx_dc_inj_lsl 0 and press Enter.
ad1_scaling6 Type set nvm_param rx1 ad1_scaling6 28.9 and press Enter.
rx_fru_config Type set nvm_param rx1 rx_fru_config [X] where the values
for [X] are:
• 1 - Receiver branch 1 enabled
• 2 - Receiver branch 2 enabled
• 3 - Receiver branches 1 and 2 enabled
• 4 - Receiver branch 3 enabled
• 5 - Receiver branches 1 and 3 enabled
• 6 - Receiver branches 2 and 3 enabled
• 7 - Receiver branches 1, 2 and 3 enabled

Press Enter.

After the parameter(s) has been updated the following is needed for the
configuration changes to take effect:
Type reset , press Enter and then type y to verify the reset.

6-22 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Configuring the pm_config

Configuring the pm_config


Procedure 6-4 explains how to configure pm_config on the Site Controller.
For more information about how to use the pm_config command, refer to MTS Man
Machine Interface Commands Manual.

Pm_configuration defines the relationship between RFDS components and Base Radios. If one
cavity in an ATCC measures a high Voltage Standing Wave Radio (VSWR), it results in the decay
of the corresponding Base Radio. A broken antenna or failure on a feeder cable indicates a
bad VSWR on the DPM. It also results in the decay of Base Radios using this DPM.
Procedure 6-4 How to Configure pm_config

1 To set up pm_config for MTS-4 with ATCC and one TX antenna, use the
following commands:
• pm_config br 1 dpm 1
• pm_config br 1 atcc 1 cav 1
• pm_config br 2 dpm 1
• pm_config br 2 atcc 1 cav 2
• pm_config br 3 dpm 1
• pm_config br 3 atcc 2 cav 1
• pm_config br 4 dpm 1
• pm_config br 4 atcc 2 cav 2

To get help, use the following command:SC: pm_config -


If Expansion cabinet is used, pm_config needs to be setup accordingly.
By default, the following commands could be used:
• pm_config br 5 dpm 2
• pm_config br 5 atcc 3 cav 1
• pm_config br 6 dpm 2
• pm_config br 6 atcc 3 cav 2
• pm_config br 7 dpm 2
• pm_config br 7 atcc 4 cav 1
• pm_config br 8 dpm 2
• pm_config br 8 atcc 4 cav 2
To set up pm_config for MTS-2 with one TX antenna, use the following
commands:
• pm_config br 1 dpm 1
• pm_config br 2 dpm 1

6802800U74-T January 2011 6-23


Station Verification Procedures Chapter 6: Configuration and Testing

Procedure 6-4 How to Configure pm_config (Continued)


2 To configure the DPM and ATCC mapping to BR, use the following command:
pm_config [-?]
3 To configure the ATCC (cavity) to BR mapping, use the following command:
br <br> atcc <atcc> cav <cavity>
4 To configure the DPM to BR mapping, use the following command:
br <br> dpm <dpm>
5 To clear the mapping for a given BR, use the following command:
-invalidate <br>
6 To clear all mapping, use the following command:
-invalidate
7 To print all mapping, use the following command:
-print

Station Verification Procedures


Station Verification Procedures cover methods to verify transmit and receive operations after a Base Radio
module has been installed or replaced. Each section contains the equipment setup and the procedure.

Base Radio Software Revision Verification


Procedure 6-5 How to Verify the Base Radio Software Version Number

1 Connect one end of the console cable to the service computer.


2 Connect the other end of the console cable to the Service Access port, located on the front
panel of the Base Radio (BR).
3 In normal application mode, login and enter command ver - to display Application Software
version, Boot0 version and Boot1 version.
4 Enter the test application mode:
1. Reset the BR. When resetting the Base Radio, press the ESC key when prompted to
interrupt the start up sequence.
2. Type testapp and press Enter.
3. Log on by typing login -ufactory and press Enter. When prompted, enter factory
for password.

6-24 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Base Radio Test Application Software Upgrade (optional)

Procedure 6-5 How to Verify the Base Radio Software Version Number (Continued)
5 Collect revision numbers from the BR by typing: fv -oplatform. Note down the test application
software version and then please refer to the System Software Release Note for correct software
version number.

If software version number does not match, perform "Base Radio Test Application
Software Upgrade (optional)" on page 6-25 after completion of this procedure.
6 To exit BR Test Application mode, reset the BR, by using the following command from the
MMI: reset -oplatform

Base Radio Test Application Software Upgrade (optional)

It is important to make sure that this procedure never is used to downgrade the Test Application.
Procedure 6-6 How to Upgrade to Latest Test Application Software

1 Point 3COM server to the folder containing the BRC Test App software.
2 Connect a RJ45 cable to the serial port of the PC and the Service port on the Base Radio.
3 Connect a crossed Ethernet cable to the PC and the SC1 port on BR
4 Reset BR and enter boot1 mode.

Do not enter testapp mode from here


5 Type ferase 0x10100000 4M and press Enter.
6 When prompt returns type ifconfig eth0 address 10.0.253.<CAB><POS> and
press Enter.
7 When prompt returns type finstall testapp
/tftp/10.0.253.100/R064020ROM.srec and press Enter.

R064020ROM.srec in command above is used as an example. Please indicate


latest released file when entering command.
Result: BRC will reset itself at the end
8 Enter boot1 mode and then enter test app mode.
9 Login as factory user in test app mode, type fv -oplatform and press Enter.
On the last line of the output check that the version is R064020 or which ever version was
upgraded to in step 7.
10 Reset the BR by typing reset -oplatform and press Enter.

6802800U74-T January 2011 6-25


Transmitter Verification Chapter 6: Configuration and Testing

Procedure 6-6 How to Upgrade to Latest Test Application Software (Continued)


11 Disconnect the service cable from the BR and reconnect the Ethernet cable to LAN 1.
12 Rerun Procedure 6-5, "How to Verify the Base Radio Software Version Number," on page 6-24
to verify that the latest versions have been installed correctly.

Transmitter Verification
The transmitter verification procedure verifies the transmitter operation and the integrity of the transmit
path. This verification procedure is recommended after replacing the Base Radio module.

The following procedure requires the MTS 2 or MTS 4 to be out of service. Unless it is
already out of service, Motorola recommends performing this procedure during off-peak
hours. This minimizes or eliminates disruption of service to system users.

In order to avoid the risk of causing a high bit error rate to occur, do not use 385.572MHz
and 419.175MHz as receiving frequencies in the Base Radios of the MTS.
This procedure provides commands and responses to verify proper operation of the
transmit path for the Power Amplifier.
Procedure 6-7 How to Verify the Transmitter

1 Connect the Service Cable between the service terminal and the Service port. Log in to the
Base Radio.

Contact your local Motorola representative or Technical Support to obtain password.


2 At the prompt, type power -otxch1 -a0. This command dekeys the transmitter.
3

The following commands, keys the transmitter. Make sure that transmission only
occurs on licensed frequencies or into an RF dummy load. To ask for the current
transmitter frequency, type: freq -otxch1. To change the transmit frequency, type:
vco -otx_all -fXXX.XXXX. For example, to set the transmit frequency to 410.0125
MHz, type: vco -otx_all -f410.0125.
To key the transmitter with a T2 type channel type these three commands:
• enable -otx_all –son
• ptm -orx_all -mTx_T2 -s15 -tNo_Trigger -d0
• power -otxch1 -aXX

6-26 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Transmitter Verification

Procedure 6-7 How to Verify the Transmitter (Continued)

These commands set the transmitter to a specified power (in Watts) without altering any
programmed parameters. For example, to key the Power Amplifier to 36W, type power -otxch1
-a36.

To transmit a TCH 7.2 channel type, type: ptm -orx_all -mTCH_72 -s15
-tNo_Trigger -d0.

The measurement equipment setting for MCC, MNC and BCC:0.


Burst Type: NCDB.
4 At the prompt, type these three commands:
• meter –opa1 –mpa_pwr_fwd. This command returns the current value of forward power
from the RF Power Amplifier.
• At the prompt, type: meter –opa1 –mpa_pwr_rev. This command returns the current value
of reflected power from the RF Power Amplifier.
• At the prompt, type: meter –opa1 –mpa_vswr. This command calculates the current
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) from the RF Power Amplifier.
5 At the prompt, type: alarms –ofault_hndlr. This command returns all active alarms of the
Base Radio.
6 At the prompt, type: power –otxch1 –a0. This command stops all transmitter activity.
7 Replace the existing cable from the Base Radio TX connector with a test cable to the TX
connector. Connect a 40 dB attenuator to the other end of the cable.
8 From the attenuator, connect a cable to the RF IN/OUT connector on the TETRA Analyzer.
9 Switch off the TETRA Analyzer. Connect the Rubidium Frequency Standard to a 10 dB
attenuator. Switch on the TETRA Analyzer.
10 Connect the other end of 10 dB attenuator to the 10 MHz REFERENCE OSCILLATOR IN/OUT
connector on TETRA Analyzer.
11 Set the TETRA Analyzer to the EXT REF mode. Set TETRA Analyzer to ON and to the proper
channel type.

Table 6-8 Transmitter Verification Specifications

Lower Side Upper Side


Parameter Typical
Limit Limit
MTS 2 low power, RMS W 10 13
power out on Antenna port dbm 40 41
EVM, RMS average % 10
EVM, Peak confidence % 30
Carrier feed through / % 5
Residual carrier
TX frequency error Hz -80 80

6802800U74-T January 2011 6-27


Receiver Verification Chapter 6: Configuration and Testing

Receiver Verification
The receiver verification procedure sends a known test signal to the Base Radio to verify the receive
path. This verification procedure is recommended after replacing a Base Radio.

The following procedure requires the Base Radio to be out of service. Unless the Base Radio
is currently out of service, Motorola recommends performing this procedure during off-peak
hours. This minimizes or eliminates disruption of service to system users.

Equipment Setup for Receiver Verification


To set up the equipment, use the following procedure.

In order to avoid the risk of causing a high bit error rate to occur, do not use 385.572MHz
and 419.175MHz as receiving frequencies in the Base Radios of the MTS.
Procedure 6-8 How to set up the Equipment for Receiver Verification

1 Connect one end of the Service cable to the service computer.


2 Connect the other end of the Service cable to the Service Access port located on the front panel
of the BR.
3 Disconnect the existing cables from the Base Radio TX and RX connectors (or the connector
corresponding to the receiver under test).
4 Connect a test cable to the TX and RX connectors.
5 Connect the other end of the test cable to the RF output on a TETRA Signal Generator.
6 Connect Frequency Standard 10 MHz OUTPUT to a 10 dB attenuator.
7 Connect other end of the attenuator to the 10 MHz REFERENCE OSCILLATOR IN/OUT
connector on the TETRA Signal Generator.
8 Connect the Trigger Output connector on the Service Port Cable to the External Trigger Input
on the TETRA Signal Generator.
9 Set the TETRA Signal Generator to EXT REF mode.
10 Set TETRA Signal Generator to ON.
11 Set the TETRA Signal Generator to the receive frequency of the Base Radio under test. (All
receivers within a single Base Radio have the same receive frequency.)
12 Configure the generator for a TCH 7.2 TETRA channel.
13 Set the TETRA Signal Generator to generate the test signal at an output level of -110 dBm.

6-28 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Receiver Verification Procedure

Receiver Verification Procedure


This procedure provides commands and responses to verify proper operation of the Base Radio receive path.
The Bit Error Rate (BER) measurement meets specifications at less than 0.01% (1.0e-02%) to pass the process.
Procedure 6-9 How to Verify the Receiver

1 Switch on the power of the Base Radio.


2 Enter the Test Application mode and login.

Contact your local Motorola representative or Technical Support to obtain password.


3 At the prompt, type: freq -orxch1. This command displays the receive frequency for the current
Base Radio. Record the result.

To set the receive frequency, use the command freq -orx_all -fXXX.XXXX.
For example, to set the receive frequency to 401.0125MHz, type freq -orx_all
-f401.0125.
4 Use following commands to change TX and RX frequency if necessary. If you read the frequency
you want to use in the previous step, skip this step:
• freq -otx_all -f394.0125
• freq -orx_all -f384.0125
5 Type sge -orx_all -son and press Enter to enable system gain alignment.
6 At the prompt, type: ptm -orx_all -mTCH_72 -s15 -tMulti_Frame_Trigger
–d-6.
For Stabilock 4031/4032 use single slot only and delay 0:
ptm -orx_all -mTCH_72 -s8 –tFrame_Trigger –d0

It may be necessary to adjust the trigger delay set by the -d option.


7 At the prompt, type: enable -orxch1 -dbr1 -son. This command enables the receiver branch
under test and should enable br1, br2, or br3 respectively depending on the branches that you
are testing.
8 Set the signal generator to generate a T1 signal and inject to the relevant antenna port.

6802800U74-T January 2011 6-29


Displaying Base Radio Alarms Chapter 6: Configuration and Testing

Procedure 6-9 How to Verify the Receiver (Continued)


9 Type ppr -orxch1 -a1000 –r1 to analyze the received RF signal quality of the Base
Radio. Record the results.Example readout is below with expected results/ specifications:

Receiver Number = 1 2 3
SGC Attenuation (dB) = 4 4 4
Sync Location (1/10 symb)= 50 42 27
Sync. Amplitude (dB) = -83 -94 -104
Total Bits/Msgs = 4320 4320 4320
Bits/Msgs in Error = 4 1965 1904
BER/MER (%) = 1.593 45.486 44.074
RSSI (dBm) = -117 -121 -131

BER value is below 4% and RSSI is within the acceptable range.


10 Type ppr –orxch1 –a1 –r200 to check for small peaks of interference. Record the results.
11 Repeat the two previous steps for all receiver branches.
12 Disconnect the equipment.
13 Repeat procedure for all remaining Base Radios.

Displaying Base Radio Alarms


In the Site Controller procedures, the base radios were connected to the Site Controller and received
downloaded test software through the BR-Site Controller Ethernet link. If necessary, reset the base
radio to obtain the password prompt, or enter the Test Application mode of the BR.
Procedure 6-10 Display Outstanding Base Radio Alarm Conditions

1 When prompted, type the proper password. After entering the correct password, the prompt is
displayed on the service terminal.
2 • BR Application:
Type get alarms
This command displays all alarms for this Base Radio together with its current states
(active/inactive).
• BR Test Application:
Type alarms -ofault_hndlr
This command displays all the all active alarms on the Base Radio.

When using Test Application, the fault management engine can be disabled.
In such case no alarms will be visible.
• To display current FM state:
dev> fme -ofault_hndlr
• To enable FM:
dev> fme -ofault_hndlr -son
• To disable FM:
dev> fme -ofault_hndlr -soff

6-30 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Viewing the Transmit Spectrum (optional)

Viewing the Transmit Spectrum (optional)


The transmit spectrum can be viewed on the Spectrum Analyzer. Perform the following
procedure to view the transmitted signal spectrum.

The following command keys the transmitter. Make sure that transmission
only occurs on licensed frequencies or into a dummy load.

At the Test Application prompt, type: power -otxch1 -a35


This command sets the transmitter output to maximum rated output.
Figure 6-6 shows the transmitted signal on the Spectrum Analyzer.

Figure 6-6 Spectrum Analyzer Display of Transmitted Signal


0.0

-10.0

-20.0

-30.0

-40.0

-50.0
dB

-60.0

-70.0

-80.0

-90.0

-100.0

-110.0

-120.0
394.950

394.962

394.975

394.987

395.000

395.012

395.025

395.037

395.050

Frequency, MHz
RBW = 300 Hz Span = 0.10 MHz

TEBTS062
012297JNM

At the prompt, type: power -otxch1 -a0


This command stops RF transmission
Repeat this procedure for each base radio.

6802800U74-T January 2011 6-31


Synchronizing Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) Regions Chapter 6: Configuration and Testing

Synchronizing Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) Regions


After introducing major changes in the Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) settings it is recommended to
synchronize NVM regions using the commands described below. Each physical NVM object has two
copies of its contents called the working region and the default region. The working region is used
for normal operation, while the default region is a backup from where the settings are recovered in
case of a memory fault (incorrect checksum) detected in the working region.
In order to synchronize the default region with the working region, use the following
commands at the command prompt:
• sfcp -ocontrol -sworking -ddefault
• sfcp -oex1 -sworking -ddefault
• sfcp -opa1 -sworking -ddefault
• sfcp -orxch1 -sworking -ddefault

6-32 6802800U74-T January 2011


Chapter

7
Radio Frequency Distribution System
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

This chapter contains the following topics:


• "RFDS Theory of Operation"
• "MTS LiTE and MTS 2 RFDS"
• "MTS 4 RFDS"
• "Expansion Cabinet RFDS"

The Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) distributes and manages the communications
network frequencies and mitigates interference between multiple radios, allowing them to
operate simultaneously. This results in improved radio reception performance across the
frequency ranges where multiple transmitters are broadcasting.

RFDS Theory of Operation


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

The RFDS module is made up of the following subcomponents:


• Preselector (MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4)
• Duplexer (MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4)
• Cavity Combiners (MTS 4 and Expansion Cabinet)
• Hybrid Combiner (MTS 2, MTS 4 uses either HC or CC)
• Post Filter (MTS 4 only)
• RX Splitter (Expansion Cabinet only)

The RFDS module supports the combining and filtering of multiple Base Radio transmitters to one or more
antenna outputs. The RFDS module supports up to triple receive diversity. Signals are filtered by either the
Duplexer or the Preselector, then amplified and distributed by the integrated Receiver Multicoupler (RMC). In
configurations with an Expansion Cabinet, the RX-splitter is used to distribute the received signal.
The RFDS also conditions the transmit and receive signal using filters. After combining the Base Radio
transmitters in the Hybrid Combiner (or in the Cavity Combiner in the case of the MTS 4), the transmit signals
are filtered in the transmit path of the Duplexer, which supplies the antenna connector on the cabinet.

6802800U74-T January 2011 7-1


CAN Bus Chapter 7: Radio Frequency Distribution System

MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4, with or without Expansion Cabinet configuration, use different
types of RFDS modules. The following are the distinct differences:
• MTS 2 supports Hybrid Combiners
• MTS 4 supports Cavity Combiners or Hybrid Combiners
• MTS LiTE/MTS 2 and MTS 4 do not use the same filters and mechanics for the filter tray
• MTS LiTE support one RF channel
• MTS 2 supports up to two RF channels
• MTS 4 supports up to four RF channels
• Expansion Cabinet supports eight RF channels (four in MTS 4 Prime Cabinet
and four in MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet)
MTS 2 only has up to two carriers (the frequency that it sends out) and, as a result there are no Post Filters
for a non-duplexed operation. A non-duplexed operation is achieved using a Duplexer as the Post Filter and
not using the receive path of the Duplexer. This configuration does not allow room for a third Preselector
inside the cabinet; however, it is possible to situate one outside the cabinet, for example, on the wall.

CAN Bus
The intercommunication between the RFDS units (the Duplexers, Post Filters, and Cavity Combiners) and the
Site Controller is carried out through the CAN Bus at 125 kB/second. The connectors for the CAN Bus are RJ45
connectors. The CAN Bus is terminated at each end, either by the Site Controller or by an RJ45 terminator.
Each unit is registered at the Site Controller (SC), which specifies the particular channel for each
unit. Every 30 seconds, each unit on the CAN Bus transmits status and alarm information. Alarms are
triggered when any thresholds are exceeded, (failure alarms, software revisions, and so on). The following
common information is available from the CAN Bus: serial number, TrackID, software revisions, and
the Motorola kit number. For each unit, specific information is available, for example, voltage standing
wave ratio (VSWR) for DPMs and tuning information for Cavity Combiners.
The receive path of the Preselector or Duplexer is not connected to the CAN Bus. Because the supply
voltage is supplied from the Base Radio, the Base Radio can withstand a short or 50 ohms connection
to the RX input without the Base Radio or the Power Supply Unit (PSU) being damaged.
For more information on CAN Bus, see "Site Controller - CAN Bus".

RFDS Frequency Band and Bandwidth


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 are available in the 350 MHz– 470 MHz range. The bandwidth
of the filters is 5 MHz and the duplex spacing is 10 MHz.
MTS 2 and MTS 4 are available in the 260 MHz– 275 MHz range. The bandwidth of the
filters is 6 MHz and the duplex spacing is 9 MHz.
MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 are also available in the 851MHz – 870 MHz range. The bandwidth
of the filters is 19 MHz and the duplex spacing is 45 MHz.

7-2 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS LiTE and MTS 2 RFDS

MTS LiTE and MTS 2 RFDS


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

In terms of RFDS, MTS 2 uses a low-power, cost effective RFDS placed on top of a card cage, intended for up
to 2 Base Radios. For MTS LiTE, the RFDS is placed beside the card cage intended for only 1 Base Radio.
The RFDS in MTS LiTE and MTS 2 is made up of the following:
• One or two Preselectors with integrated high performance low noise amplifier (LNA).
The supply voltage for the LNA is supplied through the RX out connected to the
Base Radios. The Preselector has two outlets for two Base Radios. The dimensions
of the filter are: 85 x 280 x 70 mm, excluding connectors. The antenna connectors
are DIN 7–16, the receive side is connected with QMA connectors. See the block
schematic of the MTS LiTE/MTS 2 Preselector in Figure 7-8.

MTS LiTE supports up to one Preselector.


• One or two Duplexers rated for up to two TETRA modulated carriers. The antenna connectors
are DIN 7–16, the transmit side is connected with QN connectors. The Duplexer has an
integrated digital VSWR meter. The supply voltage for the digital VSWR meter is supplied
through the CAN Bus interface. The receive side has integrated LNA as for the Preselector
and two RX outputs (QMA). The supply voltage for the LNA is supplied through the RX
ports. The filter dimensions are approximately: 170 x 280 x 70 mm excluding connectors.
See the block schematic of the MTS LiTE/MTS 2 Duplexer in Figure 7-10.

MTS LiTE supports one Duplexer.


Because the MTS 2 has only up to two carriers, there is no need for Post Filters
for non-duplexed operation (you can achieve non-duplexed operation by using the
Duplexer as the Post Filter and not using the receive path of the Duplexer).
• Hybrid Combiner. MTS 2 can have either a Hybrid Combiner for transmission on one
antenna, or without combining for transmission on two separate antennas.
MTS 2 is equipped with a digital voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) monitor to ensure site availability at
remote low-traffic sites and for public safety customers. The digital VSWR monitor can make a quite accurate
VSWR reading because the measurement is relative between the forward and reverse power.
The VSWR monitor does not have the same accuracy in power reading as the digital power monitor (DPM)
in the MTS 4, but it still allows a cost-effective monitoring of the integrity of the antenna.

MTS LiTE and MTS 2 Filter Tray


The MTS LiTE filter tray can carry one Duplexer and one Preselector or one Duplexer and no Preselector. The
antenna connectors from the Duplexer extend from the MTS LiTE junction panel while antenna connection
from the Preselector is connected via the use of cable. Antenna cables are connected directly onto the filters.

6802800U74-T January 2011 7-3


MTS LiTE and MTS 2 Filter Tray Chapter 7: Radio Frequency Distribution System

In Table 7-1, Low Power is valid for 400 MHz, while High Power is valid
for both 400 MHz and 800MHz.
The numbers illustrated are applicable for TETRA.
The MTS 2 filter tray can carry up to two Duplexers and one Preselector or one Duplexer and two
Preselectors. There is also room for a Hybrid Combiner. The antenna connectors extend from the
MTS 2 junction panel and antenna cables are connected directly onto the filters.

In Table 7-2, Low Power is valid for 400 MHz and 260 MHz, while High Power is valid for both
400 MHz and 800 MHz.
The numbers illustrated are applicable for TETRA with TEDS numbers within parentheses.
Table 7-1 lists all filters configurations for MTS LiTE and Figure 7-2 and Figure 7-2
show the positions of filters in the filter tray.
Table 7-1 MTS LiTE RF Configurations

Max Power [W]


RF Configuration Duplexer Preselector
Low Pwr High Pwr
TX/RX on 1 ant. 25 40 1 -
TX/RX on 1 ant., RX on 1 ant. 25 40 1 1

Figure 7-1 MTS LiTE TX/RX on 1 ant. - Filter Configuration

7-4 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS LiTE and MTS 2 Filter Tray

Figure 7-2 MTS LiTE TX/RX on 1 ant., RX on 1 ant - Filter Configuration

Table 7-2 lists all filters configurations for MTS 2 and Figure 7-3 to Figure 7-6 show
the positions of filters in the filter tray.
Table 7-2 MTS 2 RF Configurations

Max Power [W] Hybrid


RF Configuration Duplexer Preselector
Low Pwr High Pwr Combiner
TX/RX on 2 ant. 25 40 (20) - 2 -
TX/RX on 2 ant., RX on 1 ant. 25 40 (20) - 2 1
TX/RX on 1 ant., RX on 1 ant. 10 25 (10) 1 1 1
TX/RX on 1 ant., RX on 2 ant. 10 25 (10) 1 1 2

6802800U74-T January 2011 7-5


MTS LiTE and MTS 2 Filter Tray Chapter 7: Radio Frequency Distribution System

Figure 7-3 MTS 2 TX/RX on 2 ant. - Filter Configuration

Figure 7-4 MTS 2 TX/RX on 2 ant., RX on 1 ant - Filter Configuration

Figure 7-5 MTS 2 TX/RX on 1 ant., RX on 1 ant - Filter Configuration

7-6 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS LiTE / MTS 2 Preselector

Figure 7-6 MTS 2 TX/RX on 1 ant., RX on 2 ant - Filter Configuration

MTS LiTE / MTS 2 Preselector


The MTS LiTE/MTS 2 Preselector is a bandpass filter, which only allows the receiver
signals to pass. With a bandwidth of:
• 5 MHz for 400 MHz version
• 6 MHz for 260 MHz version (MTS 2 only)
• 19 MHz for 800 MHz version
The filter’s bandwidth is designed to block transmitter frequencies. The receive and
transmit bandpass are 10 MHz apart for 400 MHz and 45 MHz apart for 800 MHz. The
Preselector incorporates an LNA followed by an RMC.

The MTS LiTE Preselector FRU is common with the MTS 2 Preselector.

6802800U74-T January 2011 7-7


MTS LiTE / MTS 2 Preselector Chapter 7: Radio Frequency Distribution System

Figure 7-7 MTS LiTE / MTS 2 Preselector

Unused RX outputs should be terminated.


The MTS LiTE/MTS 2 Preselector only has two RX outputs and no expansion output. In MTS LiTE/MTS
2 the Preselector has an integrated high performance low noise amplifier (LNA). The supply voltage for
the LNA is supplied through the RX out connected to the Base Radios. The Preselector has two outlets
for two Base Radios. The antenna connectors are DIN 7–16, the receive side is connected with QMA
connectors. See the block schematic of the MTS LiTE/MTS 2 Preselector in Figure 7-8.

7-8 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual FRU Replacement Process

Figure 7-8 Schematic Diagram of MTS LiTE / MTS 2 Preselector

Unused RX outputs should be terminated.

FRU Replacement Process


For a list of available FRUs, see Appendix A, "Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)".
Process 7-1 Replacing the MTS LiTE / MTS 2 Preselector

1 Remove the Preselector, see Procedure 7-1 or Procedure 7-2.


2 Reinstall the Preselector, see Procedure 7-3 or Procedure 7-4.

6802800U74-T January 2011 7-9


Removing the Preselector Chapter 7: Radio Frequency Distribution System

Removing the Preselector


Procedure 7-1 MTS LiTE - How to Remove the Preselector

1 Remove the door of the cabinet completely.


2 Unscrew the antenna cable on the Preselector.
3 Remove the two fastening screws behind the antenna.
4 Loosen the two fastening screws at the front enough to free the center tab.

Do not remove the screws entirely because the filter will drop.
5 Slide the Preselector out of the cabinet.
6 Remove all RX cable connections on the Preselector.
7 Remove and keep the RF Terminator from the BR2 connector.
8 Remove and keep the bracket at the front.

Procedure 7-2 MTS 2 - How to Remove the Preselector

1 Remove the door of the cabinet completely.


2 Unscrew the antenna cable. Remove all RX cables connected to the Preselector.
3 Remove the fastening screw behind the antenna.
4 Loosen the two fastening screws at the front enough to free the center tab.

Do not remove the screws entirely because the filter will drop.
5 Slide the Preselector out of the cabinet.

Reinstalling the Preselector


Procedure 7-3 MTS LiTE - How to Reinstall the Preselector

1 Assemble the rear bracket at the Preselector.


2 Assemble the front bracket at the antenna connector with a screw.
3 Connect the RF Terminator to the BR2 output of the Preselector.
4 Connect the RX cable to the BR1 connector of the Preselector.
5 Slide the Preselector into the filter tray in the cabinet.
6 While supporting the Preselector fasten the screws at the front bracket.
7 Attach the RF cable on the Preselector antenna connector.
8 Switch ON the Power Supply Unit.

7-10 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS LiTE / MTS 2 Duplexer

Procedure 7-4 MTS 2 - How to Reinstall the Preselector

1 Slide the Preselector into the filter tray in the cabinet. Make sure the rear center tab fits into
the appropriate slot.
2 While supporting the Preselector fasten the two screws at the front.
3 Fasten the screw in the center tab behind the antenna.
4 Attach all RX, TX and signal cables to the Preselector. Fasten the antenna cable.
5 Switch ON the Power Supply Unit.

MTS LiTE / MTS 2 Duplexer


The Duplexer is a Preselector with Integrated Receiver Multicoupler (RMC) and a Post Filter with
a digital power monitor (DPM) combined into one unit. These form the two bandpass filters that
make up the Duplexer; one is a receive filter and the other a transmit filter.

The MTS LiTE Duplexer is common with the MTS 2 Duplexer.

6802800U74-T January 2011 7-11


MTS LiTE / MTS 2 Duplexer Chapter 7: Radio Frequency Distribution System

Figure 7-9 MTS 2 Duplexer

Unused RX outputs should be terminated.


The duplex spacing between a transmit frequency and the corresponding receive frequency is
10 MHz, with the transmit frequency highest. This leaves a 5 MHz spacing between the lowest
possible transmit frequency and the highest possible receive frequency.
For MTS 2 260 MHz, the duplex spacing between a transmit frequency and the corresponding
receive frequency is 9 MHz, and leaves a 3 MHz spacing between the lowest possible transmit
frequency and the highest possible receive frequency.
For 800 MHz, the duplex spacing between a transmit frequency and the corresponding receive
frequency is 45 MHz, and leaves a 19 MHz spacing between the lowest possible transmit
frequency and the highest possible receive frequency.
The MTS LiTE/MTS 2 Duplexer has 2 RX outputs and can handle a maximum power of 60 watts.

Unused RX outputs should be terminated.


The receiver LNA and splitter provides multiple receive signal ports. An amplified output is
provided for connection to the other cabinet in an expansion configuration.

7-12 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual FRU Replacement Process

The digital power monitor (DPM) is a directional coupler that measures forward and reverse Power.
Power and VSWR information can be read through the CAN bus.

Figure 7-10 Schematic Diagram of MTS LiTE / MTS 2 Duplexer

Unused RX outputs should be terminated.

FRU Replacement Process


For a list of available FRUs, see Appendix A, "Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)".
Process 7-2 Replacing the MTS LiTE / MTS 2 Duplexer

1 Remove the Duplexer, see Procedure 7-5.


2 Insert the Duplexer into the filter tray, see Procedure 7-6.
3 Update the mapping list with the new unit TrackID, see Procedure 7-7.

6802800U74-T January 2011 7-13


Removing the Duplexer Chapter 7: Radio Frequency Distribution System

Removing the Duplexer

RF energy hazard and potential equipment damage precaution: Turn off all
power to the Power Supply Unit before performing the following procedures to
prevent accidental contact with high energy and injury to personnel.

Procedure 7-5 How to Remove the MTS LiTE / MTS 2 Duplexer

1 Switch OFF the Power Supply Unit.


2 Unscrew the antenna cable. Remove all RX, TX and signal cables connected to the Duplexer.
3 Remove the fastening screw behind the antenna.
4 Loosen the two fastening screws at the front enough to free the center tab.

Do not remove the screws entirely because the filter will drop.
5 Slide the Duplexer out of the cabinet.

Reinstalling the Duplexer


To install the FRU, follow:
• Procedure 7-6 to insert the Duplexer into the filter tray.
• Procedure 7-7 to update the mapping list with the new unit TrackID.

Procedure 7-6 How to Insert the Duplexer into the Filter Tray.

1 Slide the Duplexer into the filter tray in the cabinet. Make sure the rear center tab fits in the
appropriate slot.
2 While supporting the Duplexer fasten the two screws at the front.
3 Fasten screw in the center tab behind the antenna.
4 Attach all RX, TX and signal cables to be connected to the Duplexer. Fasten the antenna cable.
5 Switch ON the Power Supply Unit.

7-14 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Reinstalling the Duplexer

Procedure 7-7 How to Update the Mapping List with the New Unit TrackID

1 Log in to the Site Controller.


2 Use the following MMI command to view the mapping list:can check_mapping
See example below:
SC> can check_mapping
Units are present:
Device Track ID
DPM 1 JTH0500101
PSU 1 JTH0500200
Units are not present:
DPM 2 JTH0500105
Track ID not mapped:
JTH0500102
3 On the list, locate the unit that you have removed and that is indicated as Units are not
present.
4 Delete old CAN Bus unit from the CAN Bus unit mapping list. Use can remove_mapping
<Device>, where <Device> is the old unit name. See example below:
SC> can remove_mapping dpm 2
5 Add new CAN Bus unit to the CAN Bus unit mapping list.

The new unit Track ID is present on the replaced unit label and indicated as Track
ID not mapped in the list shown in step 2.
Use can add_mapping <Device> <TrackID>, where <TrackID> is a TrackID of
the new unit and <Device> is the new unit name: dpm X, where X denotes a digit between 0
and 3). See example below:
SC> can add_mapping dpm 2 JTH0500102
6 View the updated mapping list using the can check_mapping command and check that
there are no units labelled as Track ID not mapped or Units are not present.

6802800U74-T January 2011 7-15


Hybrid Combiner in MTS 2 Chapter 7: Radio Frequency Distribution System

Hybrid Combiner in MTS 2


The Hybrid Combiner is a part of the transmitter path in the RF Distribution System. The Hybrid
Combiner provides very reliable combining of up to two transmitters. The Hybrid Combiner
has no limitations in respect to channel spacing of the TX channels, however for frequency
planning and interference reasons at least 50kHz is recommended.

Figure 7-11 Hybrid Combiner

The TX signals from two Base Radios are attached to the respective Hybrid Combiner inputs. The
combined signal at the Hybrid Combiner outport port is then applied to the Duplexer.
The Hybrid Combiner contains one printed circuit board.

FRU Replacement Process


For a list of available FRUs, see Appendix A, "Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)".
Process 7-3 Replacing the Hybrid Combiner

1 Remove the Hybrid Combiner, see Procedure 7-8.


2 Insert the Hybrid Combiner into the filter tray, see Procedure 7-9.

7-16 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Removing the Hybrid Combiner

Removing the Hybrid Combiner

The Hybrid Combiner may be HOT. Allow to cool before servic-


ing to avoid personal injury.

RF energy hazard and potential equipment damage precaution. Turn off the
Power Supply Unit before performing the following procedures to prevent
accidental contact with high energy and injury to personnel.

Procedure 7-8 How to Remove the Hybrid Combiner

1 Switch OFF the Power Supply Unit.


2 Remove the TX and antenna cables.
3 Loosen the two screws that secure the Hybrid Combiner onto the bracket.
4 Slide the Hybrid Combiner froward and pull free from the screws. Slide it out from the bracket.

Reinstalling the Hybrid Combiner


Procedure 7-9 How to Reinstall the Hybrid Combiner

1 Place the Hybrid Combiner on the bracket of the cabinet with the heat sink facing the side
of the cabinet.

In the MTS 2, the heat sink should face inwards towards the center of the cabinet.
2 Slide in the Hybrid Combiner at an angle ensuring that the lip at the back of the Hybrid
Combiner is secured behind the bracket.
3 Fasten the screws to the bracket.
4 Attach the TX and antenna cables.
5 Switch ON the Power Supply Unit.

6802800U74-T January 2011 7-17


MTS 4 RFDS Chapter 7: Radio Frequency Distribution System

MTS 4 RFDS
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

The MTS 4 uses a high-power RFDS intended for up to 4 high power Base Radios.
The RFDS in MTS 4 is made up of the following:
• Up to three Preselectors – low-loss Preselectors with integrated high performance LNA
and RMC. The supply voltage for the LNA is supplied through the RX out connected to
the Base Radios. The Preselectors have outputs for four Base Radios. Dimensions of the
filter are 90 x 180 x 200 mm excluding connectors. The antenna connectors are DIN 7–16.
The RX signals from Base Radios are connected with QMA connectors.
• Up to two Post Filters – low-loss Post Filters rated for up to 8 TETRA modulated
carriers. The antenna connectors are DIN 7–16, the TX signals to Cavity
Combiners are connected with QN connectors.
• Up to two Duplexers – Preselectors with an integrated receiver multicoupler (RMC) and a Post
Filter with a digital power monitor (DPM) combined into one unit. Duplexer is rated for up to
four TETRA modulated carriers. The antenna connectors are DIN 7–16, the transmit site is
connected with QN connectors. The receive side has integrated LNA as for the Preselector and
four RX outputs (QMA). The supply voltage for the LNA is supplied through the RX ports.
• Hybrid Combiner - combining of four carriers on 2 TX antennas. Cavity Combiners
- combining of four carriers on 1 TX antenna.
MTS 4 is equipped with a digital power monitor to ensure diagnostic availability. The digital interface
has the same benefits as described for the MTS 2 digital VSWR monitor.

MTS 4 Filter Tray


The MTS 4 filter tray can carry different filter configurations. The antenna connectors extend from
the cabinet top cover and antenna cables are connected directly onto the filters.
Table 7-3 lists all filters configurations for MTS 4 and Figure 7-12 to Figure 7-19 show
the positions of filters in the filter tray.

In Table 7-2, Low Power is valid for 400 MHz and 260 MHz, while High Power is valid for both
400 MHz and 800 MHz.
The numbers illustrated are applicable for TETRA with TEDS numbers within parentheses.
Table 7-3 MTS 4 RF Configurations

Max Power [W]


Cavity Pre Post
RF Configuration Low High Duplexer
Combiner selector Filter
Pwr Pwr
1 - 2 BRs
TX/RX on 2 ant. 25 40 (20) - 2 - -

7-18 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS 4 Filter Tray

Table 7-3 MTS 4 RF Configurations (Continued)


Max Power [W]
Cavity Pre Post
RF Configuration Low High Duplexer
Combiner selector Filter
Pwr Pwr
TX/RX on 2 ant., RX on 1 ant. 25 40 (20) - 2 1 -
TX on 2 ant., RX on 2 ant. 25 40 (20) - - 2 2
TX on 2 ant., RX on 3 ant. 25 40 (20) - - 3 2
TX/RX on 1 ant., RX on 1 ant. 10 25 (10) 1 1 1 -
TX/RX on 1 ant., RX on 2 ant. 10 25 (10) 1 1 2 -
TX on 1 ant., RX on 2 ant. 10 25 (10) 1 - 2 1
TX on 1 ant., RX on 3 ant. 10 25 (10) 1 - 3 1
3 - 4 BRs
TX/RX on 2 ant. 10 25 (10) 2 2 - -
TX/RX on 2 ant., RX on 1 ant. 10 25 (10) 2 2 1 -
TX on 2 ant., RX on 2 ant. 10 25 (10) 2 - 2 2
TX on 2 ant., RX on 3 ant. 10 25 (10) 2 - 3 2
TX/RX on 1 ant., RX on 1 ant. 10 25 (10) 2 (comb) 1 1 -
TX/RX on 1 ant., RX on 2 ant. 10 25 (10) 2 (comb) 1 2 -
TX on 1 ant., RX on 2 ant. 10 25 (10) 2 (comb) - 2 1
TX on 1 ant., RX on 3 ant. 10 25 (10) 2 (comb) - 3 1

Figure 7-12 MTS 4 TX/RX on 2 ant. - Filter Configuration

6802800U74-T January 2011 7-19


MTS 4 Filter Tray Chapter 7: Radio Frequency Distribution System

Figure 7-13 MTS 4 TX/RX on 2 ant., RX on 1 ant. - Filter Configuration

Figure 7-14 MTS 4 TX on 2 ant., RX on 2 ant. - Filter Configuration

Figure 7-15 MTS 4 TX on 2 ant., RX on 3 ant. - Filter Configuration

7-20 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS 4 Filter Tray

Figure 7-16 MTS 4 TX/RX on 1 ant., RX on 1 ant. - Filter Configuration

Figure 7-17 MTS 4 TX/RX on 1 ant., RX on 2 ant. - Filter Configuration

Figure 7-18 MTS 4 TX on 1 ant., RX on 2 ant. - Filter Configuration

6802800U74-T January 2011 7-21


MTS 4 Preselector Chapter 7: Radio Frequency Distribution System

Figure 7-19 MTS 4 TX on 1 ant., RX on 3 ant. - Filter Configuration

MTS 4 Preselector
The MTS 4 Preselector is a bandpass filter, which only allows the receiver signals to pass. With a bandwidth of:
• 5 MHz for 400 MHz version
• 6 MHz for 260 MHz version
• 19 MHz for 800 MHz version
The filter’s bandwidth is designed to block transmitter frequencies. The receive and transmit
bandpass are 10 MHz apart for 400 MHz, 9 MHz apart for 260 MHz, and 45 MHz apart for 800
MHz. The Preselector incorporates an LNA followed by an RMC.
The MTS 4 Preselector has four RX outputs and one expansion output.

7-22 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS 4 Preselector

Figure 7-20 MTS 4 Preselector

In MTS 4, the Preselector has an integrated high performance LNA and RMC. The supply voltage for the
LNA is supplied through the RX out connected to the Base Radios.The Preselector has outputs for four Base
Radios The antenna connector is DIN 7–16. The receive side is connected by QMA connectors.

Figure 7-21 Schematic Diagram of MTS 4 Preselector

6802800U74-T January 2011 7-23


FRU Replacement Process Chapter 7: Radio Frequency Distribution System

FRU Replacement Process


For a list of available FRUs, see Appendix A, "Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)".
Process 7-4 Replacing the MTS 4 Preselector

1 Remove the Preselector, see Procedure 7-10.


2 Reinstall the Preselector, see Procedure 7-11.

Removing the MTS 4 Preselector


Procedure 7-10 How to Remove the MTS 4 Preselector

1 Remove the door of the cabinet completely.


2 Remove the four screws holding the front panel.
3 Loosen the two screws holding the front section of the top panel and slide off the panel.
4 Loosen the screws fastening the rear section of the top panel and slide off the panel.
5 Unscrew the antenna cable and remove the RX cables connected to the back of the Preselector.
6 Loosen the two fastening screws at the front enough to free the mounting bracket.
7 Slide the Preselector out of the cabinet.
8 Remove the Preselector from the bracket and replace with the new unit.

Reinstalling the MTS 4 Preselector


Procedure 7-11 How to Reinstall the MTS 4 Preselector

1 Fasten the Preselector onto the bracket.


2 Slide the Preselector into the cabinet.
3 Tighten the two fastening screws at the front.
4 Screw on the antenna cable and connect the RX cables to the back of the Preselector.
5 Slide on the top rear and front panels and fasten these with screws.
6 Put the front panel back on and screw this into place.
7 Put the door of the cabinet back on.

7-24 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS 4 Duplexer

MTS 4 Duplexer
The Duplexer is a Preselector with an integrated receiver multicoupler (RMC) and a Post Filter
with a digital power monitor (DPM) combined into one unit. These form the two bandpass
filters that make up the Duplexer; one is a receive filter and the other a transmit filter. See
the block schematic of the MTS 4 Duplexer in Figure 7-23
For 400 MHz, the duplex spacing between a transmitter frequency and the corresponding receive
frequency is 10 MHz, with the transmitter frequency highest. This leaves a 5 MHz spacing between
the lowest possible transmit frequency and the highest possible receive frequency.
For 260 MHz, the duplex spacing between a transmit frequency and the corresponding receive
frequency is 9 MHz, and leaves a 3 MHz spacing between the lowest possible transmit
frequency and the highest possible receive frequency.
For 800 MHz, the duplex spacing between a transmit frequency and the corresponding receive
frequency is 45 MHz, and leaves a 19 MHz spacing between the lowest possible transmit
frequency and the highest possible receive frequency.
The MTS 4 Duplexer has 4 RX outputs and one expansion output. It can handle a maximum power 180 Watts.

Figure 7-22 MTS 4 Duplexer

6802800U74-T January 2011 7-25


FRU Replacement Process Chapter 7: Radio Frequency Distribution System

Figure 7-23 Schematic Diagram of MTS 4 Duplexer

FRU Replacement Process


For a list of available FRUs, see Appendix A, "Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)".
Process 7-5 Replacing the MTS 4 Duplexer

1 Remove the Duplexer, see Procedure 7-12.


2 Insert the Duplexer into the filter tray, see Procedure 7-13.
3 Update the mapping list with the new unit TrackID, see Procedure 7-14.

Removing the Duplexer

RF energy hazard and potential equipment damage precaution: Turn off all
power to the Power Supply Unit before performing the following procedures to
prevent accidental contact with high energy and injury to personnel.

7-26 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Reinstalling the Duplexer

Procedure 7-12 How to Remove the MTS 4 Duplexer

1 Switch OFF the Power Supply Unit.


2 Remove the four screws holding the front panel.
3 Loosen the two screws holding the front section of the top panel and slide off the panel.
4 Loosen the screws fastening the rear section of the top panel and slide off the panel.
5 Unscrew the antenna cable and remove the RX, TX and signal cables.
6 Loosen the two fastening screws at the front enough to free the mounting bracket.
7 Slide the Duplexer out of the cabinet.
8 Remove the Duplexer from the bracket and replace.

Reinstalling the Duplexer


To install the FRU follow:
• Procedure 7-13 to insert the Duplexer into the cabinet,
• Procedure 7-14 to update the mapping list with the new unit TrackID

Procedure 7-13 How to Insert the Duplexer into the Cabinet

1 Fasten the Duplexer onto the bracket with screws.


2 Slide the Duplexer into the cabinet.
3 Tighten the two fastening screws at the front to secure the mounting bracket.
4 Attach the antenna cable and the RX, TX and signal cables.
5 Slide on the top rear and front panels and fasten these with screws.
6 Put the front panel back on and screw this into place.
7 Put the door of the cabinet back on.

Procedure 7-14 How to Update the Mapping List with the New Unit TrackID

1 Log in to the Site Controller.


2 Use the following MMI command to view the mapping list:can check_mapping
See example below:
SC> can check_mapping
Units are present:
Device Track ID
DPM 1 JTH0500101
PSU 1 JTH0500200
Units are not present:
DPM 2 JTH0500105
Track ID not mapped:
JTH0500102

6802800U74-T January 2011 7-27


Hybrid Combiner in MTS 4 Chapter 7: Radio Frequency Distribution System

Procedure 7-14 How to Update the Mapping List with the New Unit TrackID (Continued)
3 On the list, locate the unit that you have removed and that is indicated as Units are not
present.
4 Delete old CAN Bus unit from the CAN Bus unit mapping list. Use can remove_mapping
<Device>, where <Device> is the old unit name. See example below:
SC> can remove_mapping dpm 2
5 Add new CAN Bus unit to the CAN Bus unit mapping list.

The new unit Track ID is present on the replaced unit label and indicated as Track
ID not mapped in the list shown in step 2.
Use can add_mapping <Device> <TrackID>, where <TrackID> is a TrackID of
the new unit and <Device> is the new unit name: dpm X, where X denotes a digit between 0
and 3). See example below:
SC> can add_mapping dpm 2 JTH0500102
6 View the updated mapping list using the can check_mapping command and check that
there are no units labelled as Track ID not mapped or Units are not present.

Hybrid Combiner in MTS 4


For details about the Hybrid Combiner (HC), see the section "Hybrid Combiner in MTS 2".

Post Filter
The Post Filter supports non-duplexed configurations. The Post Filter incorporates a DPM. A Post Filter
is only available for the MTS 4 because the MTS 2 does not support non-duplexed configurations. The
bandwidth is 5 MHz on 400 MHz, 6 MHz on 260 MHz, and 19 MHz on 800 MHz.

7-28 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Post Filter

Figure 7-24 Post Filter

Figure 7-25 Schematic Diagram of Post Filter

6802800U74-T January 2011 7-29


FRU Replacement Process Chapter 7: Radio Frequency Distribution System

FRU Replacement Process


For a list of available FRUs, see Appendix A, "Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)".
Process 7-6 Replacing the Post Filter

1 Remove the Post Filter, see Procedure 7-15.


2 Install the Post Filter into the cabinet, see Procedure 7-16.
3 Update the mapping list with the new unit TrackID, see Procedure 7-17.

Removing the Post Filter

RF energy hazard and potential equipment damage precaution: Turn off all
power to the Power Supply Unit before performing the following procedures to
prevent accidental contact with high energy and injury to personnel.

Procedure 7-15 How to Remove the Post Filter

1 Switch OFF the Power Supply Unit.


2 Remove the four screws holding the front panel.
3 Loosen the two screws holding the front section of the top panel and slide off the panel.
4 Loosen the screws fastening the rear section of the top panel and slide off the panel.
5 Unscrew the antenna cable and remove the TX and signal cables.
6 Loosen the two fastening screws at the front enough to free the mounting bracket.

Note: If a Preselector is mounted on the same bracket, you will have to follow the
procedure for removing the Preselector, see "Removing the MTS 4 Preselector", to
enable you to slide out the filter bracket.
7 Slide the Post Filter out of the cabinet.
8 Remove the Post Filter from the bracket and replace with the new unit.

Reinstalling the Post Filter


To install the FRU follow:
• Procedure 7-16 to insert the Post Filter into the cabinet.
• Procedure 7-17 to update the mapping list with the new unit TrackID.

7-30 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Reinstalling the Post Filter

Procedure 7-16 How to Reinstall the Post Filter


1 Fasten the Post Filter onto the bracket with screws.
2 Slide the Post Filter into the cabinet.
3 Tighten the two fastening screws at the front to secure the mounting bracket.
4 Attach the antenna and the TX and signal cables.
5 Slide on the top rear and front panels and fasten these with screws.
6 Put the front panel back on and screw this into place.
7 Put the door of the cabinet back on.

Procedure 7-17 How to Update the Mapping List with the New TrackerID

1 Log in to the Site Controller.


2 Use the following MMI command to view the mapping list:can check_mapping
See example below:
SC> can check_mapping
Units are present:
Device Track ID
DPM 1 JTH0500101
PSU 1 JTH0500200
Units are not present:
DPM 2 JTH0500105
Track ID not mapped:
JTH0500102
3 On the list, locate the unit that you have removed and that is indicated as Units are not
present.
4 Delete old CAN Bus unit from the CAN Bus unit mapping list. Use can remove_mapping
<Device>, where <Device> is the old unit name. See example below:
SC> can remove_mapping dpm 2
5 Add new CAN Bus unit to the CAN Bus unit mapping list.

The new unit Track ID is present on the replaced unit label and indicated as Track
ID not mapped in the list shown in step 2.
Use can add_mapping <Device> <TrackID>, where <TrackID> is a TrackID of
the new unit and <Device> is the new unit name: dpm X, where X denotes a digit between 0
and 3). See example below:
SC> can add_mapping dpm 2 JTH0500102
6 View the updated mapping list using the can check_mapping command and check that
there are no units labelled as Track ID not mapped or Units are not present.

6802800U74-T January 2011 7-31


Cavity Combiner Chapter 7: Radio Frequency Distribution System

Cavity Combiner

MTS 2 does not support Cavity Combiners.


There are two types of Cavity Combiners available:
• Auto Tune Cavity Combiners (ATCC)
• Manual Tune Cavity Combiners (MTCC)
MTCCs are functionally the same as ATCCs except that they are tuned manually instead of electronically.

260 MHz configurations does not support MTCC.


Minimum channel spacing of the TX channels is 150 kHz while the recommended channel spacing is 250 kHz.

Figure 7-26 Auto Tune Cavity Combiner

Cavity Combiner - Theory of Operation


A minimum of 2 watts is needed at a cavity input. The ATCC will automatically tune in 40
seconds maximum. For more detail, refer to the ATCC specification.
Once an RF signal greater than 2 watts is detected, the ATCC tunes the cavity and continuously
keeps it tuned over humidity, temperature and changing transmit frequency, so long as it
does not sense one of the following alarm conditions:
• Channel Spacing alarm
• VSWR alarm
• Failure to Tune alarm

7-32 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Cavity Combiner - FRU Replacement Process

Being tuned means that a cavity is within the insertion loss specification at the frequency of the applied
PI/4DQPSK or QAM4,16,64 signal that is within the average input power range specified above. Being tuned
also means that the cavity peak response is no greater than 25 kHz away from the TX carrier centre frequency.
If the TX carrier does not change channel or average power level, the auto tune algorithm will not initiate a
re-tuning on its own which exceeds +/- 300 kHz from the carrier frequency. The only exception occurs when
the fine tune timer event happens. The fine tune timer is used to compensate for large variations in humidity
and is default set to 480 Minutes. The Cavity Combiner is temperature compensated but large variations in
humidity can de-tune the cavities up to 150 kHz with the result of an increasing insertion loss.
When the fine tune timer event occurs, all cavities with RF applied will be re-tuned for maximum output
power of each TX carrier. The fine tune timer can be adjusted to compensate for fast humidity variations;
for instance if the MTS 4 is installed in outdoor sites without air-conditioning. The recommended
setting of the fine tune timer, if the MTS 4 is installed in a controlled environment, is 480 Minutes.
For sites where the MTS 4 is exposed to more than +/- 20% variation in RH, the recommended setting
of the fine tune timer is 60-200 minutes depending on the speed of the variation.
Having a second cavity tune up and pass through the desired channel, the desired channel’s insertion
loss dips no more than 3 dB more than the max insertion spec for a period of 0.25 seconds.
The cavity tuning rate should be faster than 1 MHz per second.
The following list contains control and monitoring features available through the CAN Bus:
• Request current tuned position/frequency of a specific cavity.
• Fine tune time feature, to re-tune each cavity with a specified interval.
• Park an individual cavity, but if RF power is still present, cavity will park and then retune again.
• Input power: request current measured input reflected power of a specific cavity.
• VSWR: request input VSWR of an individual cavity.
• Tuning status of each cavity; parked, tuning, tuned, and parking.
• Alarm conditions of each cavity are reported when requested, including : VSWR,
subband, channel spacing and failure to tune.

Cavity Combiner - FRU Replacement Process


For a list of available FRUs, see Appendix A, "Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)".
Process 7-7 Replacing the Cavity Combiner

1 Remove the Cavity Combiner, see Procedure 7-18.


2 Insert the Cavity Combiner into the cabinet, see Procedure 7-19.
3 Update the mapping list with the new unit TrackID, see Procedure 7-20.

6802800U74-T January 2011 7-33


Removing the Cavity Combiner Chapter 7: Radio Frequency Distribution System

Removing the Cavity Combiner

RF energy hazard and potential equipment damage precaution. Turn off power
to all Base Radios in the equipment cabinet being tuned before performing
the following procedures to prevent serious injury.

The RFDS contains static-sensitive modules. Take precautionary measures to


prevent static discharge damage when servicing the RFDS. Refer to Appendix C,
"Static Precautions and ESD Strap" for recommended precautions.

Refer to Chapter 6, "Configuration and Testing" for RFDS cabling diagrams, if required.
Procedure 7-18 How to Remove the Cavity Combiner

1 Switch OFF the Power Supply Unit.


2 Remove the door of the cabinet completely.
3 Remove the three screws (two on the left and one on the right) fastening the Cavity Combiner to
the brackets of the cabinet.
4 Remove all TX and signal cables.

The Cavity Combiner can weigh up to 11.8 kg (26 lbs.). Use caution
when removing or installing Cavity Combiner into equipment rack.
Make sure the combiner is fully supported when free from mounting
rails to avoid injury to personnel and equipment damage.
5 Slide out the Cavity Combiner.

Reinstalling the Cavity Combiner


To install the FRU follow:
• Procedure 7-19 to insert the Cavity Combiner into the cabinet.
• Procedure 7-20 to update the mapping list with the new unit TrackID, only for ATCC.

7-34 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Reinstalling the Cavity Combiner

The Cavity Combiner can weigh up to 11.8 kg (26 lbs.). Use caution when
removing or installing Cavity Combiner into the equipment rack. Make
sure the combiner is fully supported when free from mounting rails to
avoid injury to personnel and equipment damage.

Procedure 7-19 How to Insert the Cavity Combiner into the Cabinet

1 Slide the Cavity Combiner into the cabinet.


2 Attach the TX and signal cables.
3 Fasten the three screws (two on the left and one on the right) that hold the Cavity Combiner onto
the brackets of the cabinet.

4 Put the door of the cabinet back on.


5 Switch on the Power Supply Unit.

Procedure 7-20 How to Update the Mapping List with the New TrackID

1 Log in to the Site Controller.


2 Use the following MMI command to view the mapping list:can check_mapping
See example below:
SC> can check_mapping
Units are present:
Device Track ID
DPM 1 JTH0500101
DPM 2 JTH0500105
PSU 1 JTH0500200
Units are not present:
ATCC 1 JTH0500201
Track ID not mapped:
JTH0500102
3 On the list, locate the unit that you have removed and that is indicated as Units are not
present.
4 Delete old CAN Bus unit from the CAN Bus unit mapping list. Use can remove_mapping
<Device>, where <Device> is the old unit name. See example below:
SC> can remove_mapping atcc 1

6802800U74-T January 2011 7-35


Reinstalling the Cavity Combiner Chapter 7: Radio Frequency Distribution System

Procedure 7-20 How to Update the Mapping List with the New TrackID (Continued)
5 Add new CAN Bus unit to the CAN Bus unit mapping list.

The new unit Track ID is present on the replaced unit label and indicated as Track
ID not mapped in the list shown in step 2.
Use can add_mapping <Device> <TrackID>, where <TrackID> is a TrackID of
the new unit and <Device> is the new unit name: atcc X, where X denotes a digit between 0
and 2). See example below:
SC> can add_mapping atcc 1 JTH0500102
6 View the updated mapping list using the can check_mapping command and check that
there are no units labelled as Track ID not mapped or Units are not present.

7-36 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Expansion Cabinet RFDS

Expansion Cabinet RFDS


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

The Expansion Cabinet uses a high-power RFDS intended for up to four high power Base Radios in addition to
the Base Radios in the MTS 4 Prime cabinet. The RFDS in the Expansion Cabinet is made up of the following:
• Up to three RX Splitters – a passive device functioning as an extension for the Receiver
Multi Coupler function of the Duplexer/Preselector in MTS 4 to support eight Base Radios.
It is connected to the Exp Cabinet connector on the Duplexer/Preselector present in the
MTS 4 Prime Cabinet giving the right signal level for the RX-Splitter.
• Cavity Combiners – combining of eight carriers on 1 TX antenna.

Table 7-4 lists the RF configurations of the MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet.


In Table 7-4, Low Power is valid for both 400 MHz and 260 MHz versions of the Expansion Cabinet, while
High Power is valid for both 400 MHz and 800 MHz versions of the Expansion Cabinet.
Table 7-4 MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet RF Configurations

Max Power (W) Cavity


RF Configuration RX Splitter
Low Pwr High Pwr Combiner
1 – 2 BRs
TX/RX on 2 ant. 10 25 1 2
TX/RX on 2 ant., RX 10 25 1 3
on 1 ant.
TX on 2 ant., RX on 10 25 1 2
2 ant.
TX on 2 ant., RX on 10 25 1 3
3 ant.
TX/RX on 1 ant., RX 8 20 1 + phasing 2
on 1 ant harness
TX/RX on 1 ant., RX 8 20 1 + phasing 3
on 2 ant. harness
TX on 1 ant., RX on 10 20 1 + phasing 2
2 ant. harness
TX on 1 ant., RX on 10 20 1 + phasing 3
3 ant. harness
3 – 4 BRs
TX/RX on 2 ant. 10 25 2 (comb) 2
TX/RX on 2 ant., RX 10 25 2 (comb) 3
on 1 ant.
TX on 2 ant., RX on 10 25 2 (comb) 2
2 ant.
TX on 2 ant., RX on 10 25 2 (comb) 3
3 ant.

6802800U74-T January 2011 7-37


Expansion Cabinet RFDS Chapter 7: Radio Frequency Distribution System

Table 7-4 MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet RF Configurations (Continued)


Max Power (W) Cavity
RF Configuration RX Splitter
Low Pwr High Pwr Combiner
TX/RX on 1 ant., RX 8 20 2 (comb) + 2
on 1 ant. phasing harness
TX/RX on 1 ant., RX 8 20 2 (comb) + 3
on 2 ant. phasing harness
TX on 1 ant., RX on 8 20 2 (comb) + 2
2 ant. phasing harness
TX on 1 ant., RX on 8 20 2 (comb) + 3
3 ant. phasing harness

For 260 MHz version of MTS there are no phasing harness configurations,
so please disregard from these in Table 7-4.

Figure 7-27 Expansion Cabinet with Single Diversity

7-38 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Expansion Cabinet RFDS

Figure 7-28 Expansion Cabinet with Dual Diversity

Figure 7-29 Expansion Cabinet with Triple Diversity

6802800U74-T January 2011 7-39


RX Splitter Chapter 7: Radio Frequency Distribution System

RX Splitter
The RX Splitter is a passive device functioning as an extension for the Receiver Multi Coupler function of the
Duplexer/Preselector in MTS 4 to support eight Base Radios. It is connected to the Exp Cabinet connector on
the Duplexer/Preselector present in the MTS 4 Prime Cabinet giving the right signal level for the RX-Splitter.
There are two types of RX splitters covering the 260 MHz range and the 350–825 MHz range.
Figure 7-30 displays the Expansion Cabinet RX Splitter.

Figure 7-30 Expansion Cabinet RX Splitter

Figure 7-31 Schematic Diagram of RX Splitter

FRU Replacement Process


Process 7-8 outlines the recommended tasks to be performed to replace the Expansion Cabinet RX Splitter.
For a list of available FRUs, see Appendix A, "Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)".

7-40 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Removing the RX Splitter

Process 7-8 Replacing the Expansion Cabinet RX Splitter

1 Remove the RX splitter, see Procedure 7-21 on page 7-41.


2 Reinstall the RX splitter, see Procedure 7-22 on page 7-41.

Removing the RX Splitter


Procedure 7-21 describes how to remove RX Splitter.
Procedure 7-21 How to Remove the RX Splitter

1 Remove the door of the cabinet completely.


2 Remove the four screws holding the front panel.
3 Loosen the two screws holding the front section of the top panel and slide off the panel.
4 Loosen the screws fastening the rear section of the top panel and slide off the panel.
5 Remove the RX cables connected to the back of the RX Splitter.
6 Loosen the two fastening screws at the front enough to free the mounting bracket.
7 Slide the RX Splitter out of the cabinet.
8 Remove the RX Splitter from the bracket and replace with the new unit.

Reinstalling the RX Splitter


Procedure 7-22 describes how to reinstall the RX Splitter.
Procedure 7-22 How to Reinstall the RX Splitter

1 Fasten the RX Splitter onto the bracket.


2 Slide the RX Splitter into the cabinet.
3 Tighten the two fastening screws at the front.
4 Connect the RX cables to the back of the RX Splitter.
5 Slide on the top rear and front panels and fasten these with screws.
6 Place the front panel back on and screw this into place.
7 Put the door of the cabinet back on.

Cavity Combiner
See "Cavity Combiner" on page 7-32.

6802800U74-T January 2011 7-41


Cavity Combiner Chapter 7: Radio Frequency Distribution System

This page intentionally left blank.

7-42 6802800U74-T January 2011


Chapter

8
Site Controller
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

This chapter covers following topics:


• "Site Controller - Theory of Operation"
• "Site Controller - Indicators, Switches, and Connectors"
• "Site Controller - CAN Bus"
• "Site Controller - GPS Module"
• "Checking and Replacing Site Controller Lithium Battery"
• "MTS - Restoration Procedures"

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-1


Cavity Combiner Chapter 8: Site Controller

Figure 8-1 Site Controller - Front View

Figure 8-2 Site Controller - Rear View

8-2 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Site Controller - Theory of Operation

Site Controller - Theory of Operation


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

The Site Controller controls resources within the MTS, including assignment of frequencies and slots to mobile
stations. The Site Controller incorporates a Global Positioning System (GPS) module. The GPS module
provides a high precision timing signal used as reference for the Base Radio receive and transmit functionality.
See "Site Controller Specifications" on page 14-11 for Site Controller hardware specifications.

Figure 8-3 Site Controller - Functional Block Diagram

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-3


Site Controller - Indicators, Switches, and Connectors Chapter 8: Site Controller

Site Controller - Indicators, Switches, and Connectors


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

This section contains following information:


• "Site Controller - Front Panel"
• "Site Controller - Rear Panel"

Site Controller - Front Panel

Figure 8-4 Site Controller - Front Panel

8-4 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Site Controller - Front Panel Indicators (LED)

Site Controller - Front Panel Indicators (LED)


Table 8-1 Site Controller - Front Panel Indicators (LED)

LED/Port
LED Position Controlled by Indication
Name
LED1 Active Front Panel SW Site Controller is active or standby:
• OFF: Site Controller main
application not running.
• GREEN: E1/X.21 relay energized.
• AMBER: E1/X21 relay not
energized.
• RED: Failed Site Controller,
replace FRU.
LED2 Mode Front Panel SW Trunking status:
• OFF: Boot up/No
trunking/Standby.
• GREEN: Wide area trunking.
• AMBER: Local site trunking.
LED3 GPS Front Panel SW • OFF: BTS not configured for GPS
module.
• GREEN: GPS locked and BTS
synchronized.
• AMBER Blinking: In training.
• AMBER Solid: GPS Free run
mode synchronized (ETSI spec).
• RED: No GPS signal, no
connection to remote GPS, or
non-synchronized mode (ETSI
spec).
LED4 BTS Alarm Front Panel SW • OFF: No alarms.
• GREEN: Not used.
• AMBER: CAN Bus problems,
External alarms.
• RED: See Table 13-1, " Site
Controller LED Fault Indications
," on page 13-2
LED5 Port 1 LED1 HW, Enet switch • OFF: Ethernet link not present.
• GREEN: Ethernet link present.
LED6 BR1 Port 1 LED2 HW, Enet switch • OFF: Ethernet activity not present.
• YELLOW: Ethernet activity
present.

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-5


Site Controller - Front Panel Indicators (LED) Chapter 8: Site Controller

Table 8-1 Site Controller - Front Panel Indicators (LED) (Continued)


LED/Port
LED Position Controlled by Indication
Name
LED7 Port 2 LED1 HW, Enet switch • OFF: Ethernet link not present.
• GREEN: Ethernet link present.
LED8 BR2 Port 2 LED2 HW, Enet switch • OFF: Ethernet activity not present.
• YELLOW: Ethernet activity
present.
LED9 Port 3 LED1 HW, Enet switch • OFF: Ethernet link not present.
• GREEN: Ethernet link present.
LED10 BR3 Port 3 LED2 HW, Enet switch • OFF: Ethernet activity not present.
• YELLOW: Ethernet activity
present.
LED11 Port 4 LED1 HW, Enet switch • OFF: Ethernet link not present.
• GREEN: Ethernet link present.
LED12 BR4 Port 4 LED2 HW, Enet switch • OFF: Ethernet activity not present.
• YELLOW: Ethernet activity
present.
LED13 Port 5 LED1 HW, Enet switch • OFF: Ethernet link not present.
• GREEN: Ethernet link present.
LED14 Service Port 5 LED2 HW, Enet switch • OFF: Ethernet activity not present.
• YELLOW: Ethernet activity
present.
Port 6 LED1 Not used.
CAN
Port 6 LED2 Not used.
LED15 Port 7 LED1 • OFF: Primary E1 not configured.
• GREEN: Primary E1 OK (no LOS
(Loss Of Signal)).
• AMBER: Errors FE, CRC, BPV,
PD.
• RED: Primary E1 failure LOS.
E1
LED16 Port 7 LED2 • OFF: Secondary E1 not configured.
• GREEN: Primary E1 OK (no LOS
(Loss Of Signal)).
• AMBER: Errors FE, CRC, BPV,
PD.
• RED: Primary E1 failure LOS.

8-6 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Site Controller - Front Panel Switches

Table 8-1 Site Controller - Front Panel Indicators (LED) (Continued)


LED/Port
LED Position Controlled by Indication
Name
LED17 Port 8 LED1 • OFF: Ethernet link not present.
• GREEN: Ethernet link present.
LED18 Exp.Cab. Port 8 LED2 • OFF: Ethernet activity not present.
• YELLOW: Ethernet activity
present.

Site Controller - Front Panel Switches

Table 8-2 Site Controller - Front Panel Switches

Switch Name Switch Function


Reset The front-panel switch can be used to either generate an interrupt to the processor or
to initiate a Hard Reset.
• Push and hold (<1 second) to generate interrupt.
• Push and hold (>3 seconds) for Hard Reset.

Site Controller - Front Panel Connectors

Table 8-3 Site Controller - Front Panel Connectors

Connector Name Connector Type To/From Comment


POWER SUPPLY MOLEX (2 Pin) PSU 28.5 V DC
BR RJ45 BR Ethernet
CAN RJ45 BR CAN Bus connection
E1 RJ45 Junction Panel Pin connections on the Site
Controller are different from
the ones on the Junction Panel
connector.
Service RJ45 Service Terminal Provides service access. See
Table 8-4 for service cable pinout
information. (Service Cable PN:
3066565B)

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-7


Site Controller - Front Panel Connectors Chapter 8: Site Controller

Table 8-3 Site Controller - Front Panel Connectors (Continued)


Connector Name Connector Type To/From Comment
Exp.Cab. RJ45 XHUB in MTS Only in configurations with MTS 4
4 Expansion Expansion Cabinet
Cabinet
Red In / Red Out RJ45 Redundant Site Ethernet
Controller
GPS Antenna (for Site QMA Junction Panel GPS antenna input. +5V dc bias for
Controller with internal active antenna.
GPS receiver)

Table 8-4 Site Controller - Service Cable Pinouts

RJ45 D-SUB 9 FEMALE Descrip-


PIN PIN tion
1
2
3

4 3 Rx
5 5 GND
6
7 2 Tx
8 5 GND
9

8-8 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Site Controller - Rear Panel

Site Controller - Rear Panel

Figure 8-5 Site Controller - Rear Panel

Site Controller - Rear Panel Connectors

Table 8-5 Site Controller - Rear Panel Connectors

Connector Name Connector Type To/From Comment


Remote GPS/ X.21 IDE 26–pin Junction Panel Connects to remote GPS/X.21
Alarms/Control IDE 34–pin Junction Panel Provides Alarm/Control interface

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-9


Site Controller - CAN Bus Chapter 8: Site Controller

Site Controller - CAN Bus


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

The purpose of the CAN Bus is to make a common communication bus between RFDS equipment, PSU and
the Site Controller. The CAN Bus connects to the Site Controller, PSU, DPM and ATCC. The modules on
the CAN Bus are assigned an address for the CAN Bus. Each node also needs to be assigned a functionality
in MTS when there are more than one modules of the same type. Mapping between track number, CAN
ID and function relies on the fact that the unique track number is available from each unit.
At initialization of the MTS the Site Controller is configured with a relation between track number and the
function of the node. This is done initially in a factory, but it is also possible to modify this in a service situation.
If a node is removed or is defective the Site Controller will know the track number of a FRU which is not
responding and therefore it can make a proper service report which tells exactly what FRU to replace. When
the service is carried out the track number of the defective FRU is replaced with the new track number
in the mapping list. Thus, the new track number is mapped to the function of replaced FRU.

Figure 8-6 Site Controller - CAN Bus

8-10 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Site Controller - CAN Bus

Table 8-6 Site Controller - CAN Bus Functionality

Unit Function
PSU Monitoring:
• PSU temperature: -30 °C to +100 °C, tolerance: 2 °C.
• Battery current: -20 A to +10 A, tolerance: 1%.
• Battery voltage: 30 V to 60 V, tolerance: 1%.
• Battery temperature: -30 °C to +100 °C, tolerance: 2 °C.
• 7 V output voltage: 0 V to 10 V, tolerance: 2%.
• 7 V output current: 0 A to 10 A, tolerance: 2%.
• 28.5 V output voltage: 0 V to 30 V, tolerance: 2%.
• 28.5 V output current: 0 A to 10 A, tolerance: 2%.
• PSU output power: 0 W to 1100 W, tolerance: 2%.
• Fan output voltage: 0 V to 30 V, tolerance: 2%.
• PSU input air temp.: -30 °C to +100 °C, tolerance: 2 °C.
Alarms:
• DC Source Fail: Indicating DC input voltage outside limits (below 43 V).
• DC Out Fail: DC output voltages out of limits.
• AC Source Fail: Early warning, indicating that the AC input is interrupted
and the PSU starts to operate from DC input source in ≥ 15 ms. (if a backup
source is present).
• Software Fail: Indicating software is corrupted or unable to initialize.
• Over Temperature: Indicating over temperature detected 5 °C to 10 °C before
shutdown.
• Fan 1 alarm: Fan 1 not operating (fan has stopped or its running speed is
below specification), PSU has received a high signal (open collector) from
fan tray 1 through fan connector 1.
• Fan 2 alarm: Fan 2 not operating (fan has stopped or its running speed is
below specification), PSU has received a high signal (open collector) from
fan tray 2 through fan connector 2.
• Fan 3 alarm: Fan 3 not operating (fan has stopped or its running speed is
below specification), PSU has received a high signal (open collector) from
fan tray 3 through fan connector 3.

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-11


Site Controller - CAN Bus Chapter 8: Site Controller

Table 8-6 Site Controller - CAN Bus Functionality (Continued)


Unit Function
Controls:
• FORCE – DC: Controls the PSU to force the usage of the DC input if usable,
disregard presence of AC. If DC is outside the usable range for the PSU, the
PSU shall indicate an alarm using the DC-fail output. If DC input voltage
comes below 43 V ±2% and if AC is usable the PSU shall take the input
power from AC, disregarding a Force-DC control input.

Force DC operation on a bad DC supply PSU or Battery: Bad DC


supply is defined as a DC source where the voltage drops below
43 V for a few milliseconds when the PSU is forced to operate on
DC. In case of a force DC command and bad DC supply the 28.5
V output voltage is allowed to drop down to 27 V for a maximum
of 5 second, while the PSU automatically switches back to AC
mode and the 28.5 V rises from 27 V to 28.5 V. During this
sequence the DC out alarm is suppressed.
• Fan supply output voltage is also controlled by the CAN Bus in 5 steps from
24 V to 12 V. The highest value is set by CAN Bus or automatically.
• DC operation only: Prevents AC –fail alarms (and associated LED) from the
PSU on CAN Bus when the PSU is supplied from DC only. If the AC supply
becomes present during DC operation, the AC Source Fail alarm circuit is
automatically be reactivated.
• AC operation only: Prevents DC –fail alarms (and associated LED) from
the PSU on CAN Bus when the PSU is supplied from AC only. If the DC
supply becomes present during AC operation, the DC-Fail alarm circuit
is automatically reactivated.
• No Fan 1: Prevents Fan 1 alarm (and associated LED) when no fan 1 is
connected. If the Fan1 becomes present during operation, the Fan1 alarm
circuit is automatically reactivated.
• No Fan 2: Prevents Fan 2 alarm (and associated LED) when no fan 2 is
connected. If the Fan2 becomes present during operation, the Fan2 alarm
circuit is automatically reactivated.
• No Fan 3: Prevents Fan 3 alarm (and associated LED) when no fan 3 is
connected. If the Fan3 becomes present during operation, the Fan3 alarm
circuit is automatically reactivated.

Refer to MMI Commands manual for additional information on


commands and parameters.

8-12 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Site Controller - CAN Bus

Table 8-6 Site Controller - CAN Bus Functionality (Continued)


Unit Function
ATCC Monitoring:
• Cavity status.
• ATCC Heartbeat signal: heart beat signal is repeated every 30 s.
Alarms:
• Software corrupted.
• Distance between two channels below 150 kHz.
• Cavity VSWR alarm.
• Master Slave communication error.
• Motor alarm.
• Cavity tuning error alarms together.
• VSWR exceeded the specified value.
• Unable to park cavity.
• Cavity unable to tune to the current frequency in 3 attempts.
Controls:
• Cavity tune timeout: establishes a timeout period between a fine-tuning of the
cavities. All cavities must be fine-tuned at the timeout.
• Park a cavity: instructs the ATCC to park the specified cavity. This involves
adjusting the cavity resonance to a frequency outside of the Tx band. If RF
power is present, the cavity parks and then re-tunes to the input frequency.
• VSWR Alarm Threshold: establishes a threshold for enabling a VSWR
Alarm. Valid threshold values are in the range 1.00 to 10.00 where 1.00
means No VSWR. Recommended values for each MTS configuration are:
◦ 400 MHz: 3.00

◦ 260 MHz: 3.00

◦ 800 MHz: 4.00


DPM (Duplexer, Monitoring:
Post Filter)
• Forward power on a digital power monitor: the input power range is from 0
W to 150 W.
• Reverse power on a digital power monitor: the input power range is from 0
W to 40 W.
• VSWR from a DPM.
• DPM temperature.
• DPM Heartbeat signal.
Alarms:
• SW is corrupted or unable to initialize.
• VSWR alarm.

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-13


Site Controller - Updating CAN Bus TrackID Mapping List Chapter 8: Site Controller

Table 8-6 Site Controller - CAN Bus Functionality (Continued)


Unit Function

Controls:
• VSWR Alarm Threshold: establishes a threshold for enabling a VSWR
Alarm. Valid threshold values are in the range 1.00 to 10.00 where 1.00
means No VSWR. Recommended values for each MTS configuration are:
◦ 400 MHz: 3.00

◦ 260 MHz: 3.00

◦ 800 MHz: 4.00

Site Controller - Updating CAN Bus TrackID Mapping List


Procedure 8-1 Site Controller - How to Update the Mapping List with the New Unit TrackID

1 Log in to the Site Controller.


2 Use the following MMI command to view the mapping list:can check_mapping
See example below:
SC> can check_mapping
Units are present:
Device Track ID
DPM 1 JTH0500101
PSU 1 JTH0500200
Units are not present:
DPM 2 JTH0500105
Track ID not mapped:
JTH0500102
3 On the list, locate the unit that you have removed and that is indicated as Units are not
present.
4 Delete old CAN Bus unit from the CAN Bus unit mapping list. Use can remove_mapping
<Device>, where <Device> is the old unit name. See example below:
SC> can remove_mapping dpm 2
5 Add new CAN Bus unit to the CAN Bus unit mapping list.

The new unit Track ID is present on the replaced unit label and indicated as Track
ID not mapped in the list shown in step 2.
Use can add_mapping <Device> <TrackID>, where <TrackID> is a TrackID of the
new unit and <Device> is the new unit name. Units have the following names: psu X, dpm X,
atcc X, where X denotes a digit between 0 and 3. See example below:
SC> can add_mapping dpm 2 JTH0500102
6 View the updated mapping list using the can check_mapping command and check that
there are no units labelled as Track ID not mapped or Units are not present.

8-14 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Site Controller - GPS Module

Site Controller - GPS Module


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

The GPS module generates a highly accurate timing reference signal within the Base Station. To do this a
proper GPS signal must be provided to the QMA input connector on the Site Controller Front Panel. Refer to
the GPS section in the Technical Specifications chapter of this manual. The Site Controller provides a +5 V dc
supply voltage on the QMA connector. It is intended to be used to provide a voltage supply for active antennas.

See Chapter 4, "Hardware Installation" for description of external GPS.


See "MTS - Internal GPS Module Test" on page 8-42 and "MTS - External GPS Module Test"
on page 8-44 for procedures on how to verify the internal and external GPS module.

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-15


Checking and Replacing Site Controller Lithium Battery Chapter 8: Site Controller

Checking and Replacing Site Controller Lithium Battery


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Procedure 8-2 How to Check if Site Controller Lithium Battery Needs Changing

1 In Site Controller Test Application, type cr -ocontroller -crtc_reg -r7 and press
Enter to read the register 7.
2 Type cr -ocontroller -crtc_reg -r7 -v[Val] where [Val] is the value received
in the previous step with bit 7 set to zero and press Enter.
3 Power down and then Power up the MTS.
4 Use the Site Controller Test Application to check the RTC alarm by typing alarms
-ofault_hndlr and press Enter.
5 • If the battery is OK there should be no RTC related alarms reported. There is no need to
change the Site Controller Lithium Battery.
• If the battery still reports RTC related alarms, the battery is not working properly or
not working at all. Proceed to Procedure 8-3, "How to Replace Site Controller Lithium
Battery," on page 8-16.

Danger of explosion if battery is replaced incorrectly. Replace battery only


with the same or equivalent type recommended by manufacturer. Dispose of
used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Please refer to Appendix C, "Static Precautions and ESD Strap" before


proceeding with replacement process.

Procedure 8-3 How to Replace Site Controller Lithium Battery

1 Examine the contents of the flash filling system using the monitor command SC> attrib.
Record the file attributes for each of the files.
2 Switch the MTS Power Supply Unit OFF.

If two PSUs are present switch off the one supplying the Site Controller being
replaced. Do not power down the MTS.

8-16 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Checking and Replacing Site Controller Lithium Battery

Procedure 8-3 How to Replace Site Controller Lithium Battery (Continued)

Shock Hazard. The MTS contains dangerous voltages which can


cause electrical shock or damage to equipment. Turn off the MTS and
remove the power cabling before servicing this equipment. Make sure
all power is off to prevent accidental contact with high energy and
injury to personnel.
3 Wear an ESD strap and connect its cable to a verified good ground. This strap must be worn
to prevent ESD damage to any components.
4 Tag and disconnect any cabling from the Site Controller.
5 Loosen the two M4X10 captive screws securing the Site Controller to the chassis.

Figure 8-7 Site Controller - Captive Screws

6 Use the handle, and gently slide the Site Controller from the slot, removing it from the chassis.

There are cables connected at the rear of the Site Controller. Slide out the Site
Controller carefully, tag and disconnect ribbon cables at the rear.
7 Remove the Site Controller cover. Unscrew 19 screws securing the cover and slide it off gently
to avoid damage to components installed on the board (the cover can harm the springs on the
RJ-45 connectors (front side connectors), when the cover has been slid nearly completely off).

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-17


Checking and Replacing Site Controller Lithium Battery Chapter 8: Site Controller

Procedure 8-3 How to Replace Site Controller Lithium Battery (Continued)


8 Remove the old battery from the socket on the board.

Figure 8-8 Site Controller - Lithium Battery Location

9 Install a replacement battery (Motorola p/n 5185151Y02) in its socket on the board.

Dispose or recycle the used battery according to local regulations.


10 Slide the cover gently on and secure it with 19 screws.
11 Install the Site Controller into the MTS. Use the handle to slide the unit into the chassis.

Connect the ribbon cables at the rear before sliding the unit into the chassis.
12 Secure the Site Controller in the chassis with the captive screws.
13 Except the power cables, reconnect all other cabling to the unit as tagged during the removal.
14 Power up the Site Controller:
1. Reconnect the power cables to the MTS Power Supply Units.
2. Set the power switch to the ON position.
15 Boot up into the boot1 and clear the NV RAM contents. Use SC> resetnvr -all.
16 Restore file attributes in the flash filling system using the attrib -update command again.

8-18 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS - Restoration Procedures

MTS - Restoration Procedures


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

You must be familiar with Man-Machine Interface (MMI) commands and their
usage prior to performing procedures in this chapter. Improperly applying
MMI commands can result in equipment damage.

You must disable Black Ice or any other Firewall application before attempting to transfer
files.you must disable Black Ice or other Firewall application before attempting to transfer files
The MTS Site Controller has the following modes of operation:
• BOOT1 - to access this mode interrupt the booting process by pressing Escape
key or Control-C combination when appropriate message is shown. A
password may be required to enter this mode.
• Test Application - to access this mode enter the testapp command when in
BOOT1 mode. To go back to normal Site Controller Application enter reset
-oplatform command to reboot and resume normal operation.
• Site Controller Application - if the boot process is not interrupted, this
is the default mode of operation.

Table 8-7 MTS - Restoration Impact

Action Service Affected Service Downtime


Replacing a Site Site will be off air, radios have to find Approximately one hour. Does
Controller service on other site. not include Ki’ing of site because
this depends on if the KVL has
to be driven back to the Switch
site where the AuC is located.
If the site is a dual Site
Controller site, a switchover
of Site Controller would cause
outage of approximately 2
minutes. A switch back to the
newly replaced Site Controller
for testing could also introduce
outage of approximately 2
minutes.

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-19


MTS – Replacing Site Controller Chapter 8: Site Controller

MTS – Replacing Site Controller


Process 8-1 MTS – Replacing Site Controller

1 Check the MTS restoration impact. See Table 8-7, "MTS - Restoration Impact," on page 8-19.
2 Back up the Site Controller configuration (if possible). See "MTS - Configuration Backup"
on page 8-20.
3 Replace the Site Controller FRU. See "MTS - Replacing Site Controller FRU" on page 8-22.
4 See "MTS - Restoring the Site Controller Software" on page 8-24.
5 Configure CAN bus. See "MTS - Configuring CAN Bus" on page 8-35.
6 Configure Cooling fans. See "MTS - Configuring Cooling Fans" on page 8-36.
7 Load Ki's into MTS. See "MTS - Loading Ki's Into MTS" on page 8-36.
8 Check the MTS post-restoration checks. See "MTS - Site Controller Post-Restoration Checks"
on page 8-41.

MTS - Configuration Backup


Process 8-2 MTS - Configuration Backup

1 Set up a terminal and TESS application. Connect to MTS. See "MTS - Setting Up a Terminal"
on page 8-20.
2 Back up the Site Controller configuration. See "MTS - Backing Up the Site Controller
Configuration" on page 8-21.
3 If necessary, view and edit configuration file. See "MTS - Viewing and Editing Configuration
File" on page 8-22.

MTS - Setting Up a Terminal


Procedure 8-4 MTS - How to Set Up a Terminal

1 Load appropriate version of MTS Service Software onto PC by double clicking on setup.EXE
and following installation instructions until installation is complete.
2 Open MTS Service Software (TESS) application and when login screen is displayed, check
that the release version is correct.
3 Enter password.

8-20 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS - Backing Up the Site Controller Configuration

Procedure 8-4 MTS - How to Set Up a Terminal (Continued)


4 Connect a Straight Through Ethernet cable between the LAN port on PC and the Service Access
port on the front of the Site Controller. Change your PC IP address to 10.0.253.100, mask
255.255.255.0, gateway 10.0.253.1.

In case of redundant Site Controller configuration where second SC (upper) is active


will use subnet .254.
5 In main window, select Connection and select Connect Telnet New....
Result: The Telnet Connection Settings window is opened.
6 Specify connection settings of 10.0.253.1 in the 'Site IP' box and click OK to establish a
connection.
7 Press Enter and at the User Name prompt, enter any user name consisting of at least three
characters.
8 Enter the field password when prompted.
Result: You should see an SC> prompt.

The higher level engineering password may also be used and will return an SC>
prompt.
9 Continue to "MTS - Backing Up the Site Controller Configuration" on page 8-21.

MTS - Backing Up the Site Controller Configuration


Procedure 8-5 MTS - How to Back Up Current MTS Configuration to PC

1 Select Upload Configuration in TESS application.


Result: Window opens showing the Site Controller configuration files for upload.
2 Ensure that the file that is set to current and next (as indicated by + + ) is highlighted in blue
and click OK.

You may choose to upload the non-current file by selecting it.


3 Observe the Site Controller and BR file transfer and when complete, confirm the window showing
transfer status displays Transferred No Errors for all files transferred then click OK.

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-21


MTS - Viewing and Editing Configuration File Chapter 8: Site Controller

Procedure 8-5 MTS - How to Back Up Current MTS Configuration to PC (Continued)


4 When prompted to save the uploaded configuration file, use an appropriate name and click OK to
save the configuration file in the default folder.

You may use the browser to save the config file to a specific folder if preferred.

MTS - Viewing and Editing Configuration File


Procedure 8-6 MTS - How to View and Edit the Configuration File

1 To view the previously uploaded configuration file, select Close Connection and observe that
your chosen file name is displayed at the top of the menu window.
2 Select Personality menu, select Modify and fill out the Site Title and Version boxes as
applicable (optional).
3 Enter the various config file fields to view the MTS parameters and make any appropriate
changes. Click OK.
4 Under the File menu, select Save.

MTS - Replacing Site Controller FRU


Table 8-8 Site Controller - FRU

Part Number Description


WALN4339 Site Controller - MTS 2/ MTS 4

See Appendix B for list of Periodic Maintenance Inspections.

Please refer to Appendix C, "Static Precautions and ESD Strap" before


proceeding with replacement process.

Procedure 8-7 MTS - How to Replace Site Controller

1 Disconnect the power cables to the MTS Power Supply Units.

If configuration with non-redundant power connection, the MTS Power Supply Unit
can be switched off as an alternative to removing the cables.

8-22 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS - Replacing Site Controller FRU

Procedure 8-7 MTS - How to Replace Site Controller (Continued)

Shock Hazard. The MTS contains dangerous voltages which can cause
electrical shock or damage to equipment. Turn off the MTS and remove
the power cabling before servicing this equipment. Make sure all power
is off to prevent accidental contact with high energy and injury to
personnel.
2 Wear an ESD strap and connect its cable to a verified good ground. This strap must be worn
to prevent ESD damage to any components.
3 Tag and disconnect all other cabling from the Site Controller.
4 Loosen the two M4X10 captive screws securing the Site Controller to the chassis.

Figure 8-9 Site Controller - Captive Screws

5 Use handle, and then gently slide the Site Controller from the slot, slot to remove it from the
chassis.

Cables are connected at the rear of the Site Controller. Slide out the Site Controller
carefully, tag, and then disconnect the ribbon cables at the rear.
6 Install the replacement Site Controller. Use handle to slide the unit into the chassis.

Connect the ribbon cables at the rear before sliding the unit in to the chassis.

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-23


MTS - Restoring the Site Controller Software Chapter 8: Site Controller

Procedure 8-7 MTS - How to Replace Site Controller (Continued)


7 Secure the Site Controller in the chassis with the captive screws.
8 Reconnect all other cabling to the unit as tagged during the removal except the power cables.
9 Reconnect the power cables to the MTS Power Supply Units.
10 Start-up the service terminal.
11 There will be a series of self-tests. By default, after a few seconds, the Site Controller will
launch the Site Controller Application. If application software is not installed proceed to "MTS -
Restoring the Site Controller Software" on page 8-24.
12 At the prompt, enter status sc –all. The command displays preliminary diagnostics
information on the Site Controller. This includes the health of the Site Controller, the trunking
state, the internal state and the site link status.
13 If any device drivers are reported as failed to initialize, then this indicates a problem with that
peripheral. However, successful initialization of a device does not guarantee that it is fully
functional; further tests are necessary to ensure this. The above tests are carried out upon
power-up or reset. The command simply reports the last status of the test. To actually re-run the
tests, it is necessary to reset the Site Controller.

Initialization procedure may be halted and restarted at any time by pressing the
RESET push button for at least 2 seconds on the Site Controller front panel.
14 Restore the Site Controller software. Proceed to "MTS - Restoring the Site Controller Software"
on page 8-24.

MTS - Restoring the Site Controller Software

An assumption is made that the customer has a valid backup of the configuration.

Process 8-3 MTS - Restoring the Site Controller Software

1 Restore the Site Controller and BRC Application and Site Controller Firmware (see "MTS -
Restoring SC and BRC Application and SC Firmware")
1. Download the Site Controller application. See "MTS - Downloading the Site Controller
Application" on page 8-25.
2. Program BRC Application. "MTS - Programming the BRC Application" on page 8-26.

If the Site Controller has correct version of software, go to step 2. Enter command
attrib to verify software version of the Site Controller.

8-24 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS - Restoring SC and BRC Application and SC Firmware

Process 8-3 MTS - Restoring the Site Controller Software (Continued)


2 Change the configuration file. See "MTS - Changing the Site Controller Configuration File"
on page 8-27.

This step applies only to security class 2 and 3 systems.


3 Download the Site Controller configuration. See "MTS - Downloading the Site Controller
Configuration" on page 8-28.
4 Configure CAN bus. Continue to "MTS - Configuring CAN Bus" on page 8-35.

MTS - Restoring SC and BRC Application and SC Firmware

If the Site Controller has correct version of software, go to Procedure 8-11. Enter command
attrib to verify the software version of the Site Controller.

MTS - Downloading the Site Controller Application

Please refer to the Software Release Notes to confirm the appropriate software version.
Procedure 8-8 MTS - How to Download the Site Controller Application

1 Start up the TESS application as described in Procedure 8-4, "MTS - How to Set Up a Terminal,"
on page 8-20.
2 Select Send Files, and then select Send Application Files.
Result: The Files for Transmission window appears.
3 Insert the CD containing the MTS Application Files into the programming PC.
4 Using a combination of Drives and Folders menus, browse to the CD until you find the folder
entitled SWDL. Double-click swdl, double-click xfer, double-click TSC, double-click MTS,
and then double-click APP.
Result: Version of the Site Controller application appears on the left window.
5 Click the Site Controller version, which appears under the File Name window, and then click
Open.
Result: The File Download Properties window appears at the top of the window, showing the
version of the Site Controller application you are about to upload.

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-25


MTS - Programming the BRC Application Chapter 8: Site Controller

Procedure 8-8 MTS - How to Download the Site Controller Application (Continued)
6 Change the S/W version label as required by entering a new name in the filename box.

This is optional and normally is left blank.


7 Click in the Use Next box.
8 Click on Update Selected Items and verify that the Site Controller application version at the top
of the window now has + under the word Next. Click OK.
Result: If there is already an application file in both Site Controller bank 1 and bank 2, a
window appears prompting you to select the file that is to be replaced, that is, overwritten
by the file you are about to upload.
9 Select the file that is NOT currently set to Current and Next i.e. the one that is not currently
being used and generally an older file from a previous upload and click OK.
10 You will now see a Transmission Status window showing the Site Controller application
file transfer status and when complete, verify that the transmission status result is Sent and
Configured then click OK.
11 To confirm that the Site Controller application is loaded into the Site Controller, type the word
attrib (short for attribute) and verify that the file you uploaded is in the bank that you chose.
Keep pressing Enter until you return to the SC> prompt.
12 Continue to "MTS - Programming the BRC Application" on page 8-26.

MTS - Programming the BRC Application


Procedure 8-9 MTS - How to Program the BRC Application

1 Start up the TESS application as described in Procedure 8-4, "MTS - How to Set Up a Terminal,"
on page 8-20.
2 Select Send Files, select Send Application Files.
Result: The Application for Download window should open.
3 Using a combination of Drives and Folders menus, browse to the CD until you find the folder
entitled SWDL. Double-click swdl, double-click xfer, double-click BRC.
Result: The version of BRC application (Typically Rnn.nn.nn.brc) should now be seen in
the left hand window.
4 Click on the BRC version which should now appear under the File Name window and click OK.
Result: File Download Properties window should now open showing the version of BRC
application you are about to upload at the top of the window.
5 Change the S/W version label as required by entering a new label in the box.

This is optional and normally is left blank.


6 Click in the Use Next box.

8-26 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS - Changing the Site Controller Configuration File

Procedure 8-9 MTS - How to Program the BRC Application (Continued)


7 Click on Update Selected Items and verify that the BRC application version at the top of the
window now has + under the Next word then click OK.
Result: If there is already an application file in both BRC bank 1 and bank 2, a window will
open prompting you to select the file that is to be replaced i.e. overwritten by the file you are
about to upload.
8 Select the file that is NOT currently set to Current and Next i.e. the one that is not currently
being used and generally an older file from a previous upload and click OK.
9 You will now see a Transmission Status window showing the BRC application file transfer
status and when complete, verify that the transmission status result is Sent and Configured
then click OK.
10 To confirm that the BRC application is loaded into the Site Controller, type the word attrib
(short for attribute) and verify that the file you uploaded is in the bank that you chose.
11 Continue to "MTS - Changing the Site Controller Configuration File" on page 8-27.

MTS - Changing the Site Controller Configuration File

Procedure 8-10 does not apply to MTS running on System Release D6.1 and forward. Continue
to "MTS - Downloading the Site Controller Configuration" on page 8-28.

Procedure 8-10 applies only to systems with security class 2 and 3.


Procedure 8-10 MTS - How to Change the Site Controller Configuration File

1 Connect PC to the maintenance port on the Site Controller.


2 Open saved configuration file. In TESS application select Personality menu, select Modify and
fill out the Site Title and Version boxes as applicable (optional).
3 Select Edit Serving Cell.
4 Select Security Tab and uncheck the following checkboxes:
• Air Interface Enabled
• Authentication Enabled
• Security Class 3 Supported
5 Exit the Security Tab and serving cell windows.

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-27


MTS - Downloading the Site Controller Configuration Chapter 8: Site Controller

Procedure 8-10 MTS - How to Change the Site Controller Configuration File (Continued)
6 Save the configuration.

These settings will be populated by SwMi when the site is reset at a later stage.
7 Continue to "MTS - Downloading the Site Controller Configuration" on page 8-28.

MTS - Downloading the Site Controller Configuration


Procedure 8-11 MTS - How to Download the Site Controller Configuration

1 Reconnect to the Site Controller and log in.


2 Select Send Files.
3 Select Send Configuration in Download Type window.
4 Browse to folder containing saved Site Controller configuration file.
5 Highlight the file so its name appears in File name box. Select Open.
6 In File Download Properties window click Use next.
7 Click on Update selected items and enter version label, for example date.

There is no preference on which files to overwrite if you are prompted to make


a choice.
8 Check + sign item in Use Next column and select OK.
9 Check files have been sent and configured.
10 Enter attrib in command prompt and confirm SC config is listed.
11 Type reset to exit configuration mode and close connection when the Site Controller begins its
reset task.
12 Perform site location command by typing site_location -reset command.

Enter the command when the command prompt becomes available after the 1st reset
of the Site Controller. You need to be logged in with field access.
13 Reconnect either E1 or X.21 link and wait about one minute.
14 Reset the Site Controller again. Check that MTS returns to Wide Area Trunking and no alarms
are active. Type status sc.

You need to be logged in with field access.

8-28 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS - Configuring E1 Links

Procedure 8-11 MTS - How to Download the Site Controller Configuration (Continued)
15 If site is configured to support SC2 or SC3, the AuC will now report an error, for example:
Decryption failure received on site (12:1). Reprovision necessary
16 Item for site on AuC will be yellow. Return to Process 8-3, "MTS - Restoring the Site Controller
Software," on page 8-24.

MTS - Configuring E1 Links


Syntax for .e1config MMI command:.
.e1config [-portNo -link -crc -ts16Skip -clock -siteLink -channel
-tsPattern -DI -sat -display -?]
• -portNo = assign physical E1 port to channel
• -link = configure options related to physical E1 line/interface
• -crc = enable/disable CRC4
• -ts16Skip = use/not use E1 16-th time slot
• -clock = select Clock source
• -siteLink single|dual = select single E1 or dual E1 sitelink configuration
• -channel = creates and configures Logical E1 circuit by assigning single or
multiple E1 timeslots to a particular physical E1 port
• -tsPattern 1..31 = assign time slots to a proper channel
• -DI on|off = turn of/off Drop & Insert functionality. Is always off for star configuration,
but must be enabled for ring/chain configurations
• -sat on|off = set link as satellite one
• -display 1|2|all = display E1 configuration
• -? = display help for this command

Table 8-9 Slots Configured on the E1

No. of BR's in Site Slots Configured on the E1


1 1
2 2
3 2
4 3
5 3
6 4
7 4
8 5

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-29


MTS - Configuring E1 Links Chapter 8: Site Controller

Procedure 8-12 MTS - How to Configure E1 Links

1 Verify details of the configuration of E1 connection between MTS and CNE core router. In
particular check how many physical links will be used (one for star-like configuration, two for a
ring) and pattern of timeslots to be used. In case of standard configuration (one E1 site link,
timeslots 1 and 2) no further steps are necessary. If not, go to the next step.
2 Log in to the Site Controller.

Contact your local Motorola representative or Technical Support to obtain password.


3 Depending on the configuration, take the following measure:
• 1 MTS connected to infrastructure with 1 E1 link, see step 4
• 1 MTS connected to infrastructure with 2 E1 links, see step 5
• Up to 10 MTSs connected in ring topology, see step 6
• Up to 10 MTSs connected in line topology, see step 7
• 1 MTS connected to the infrastructure by 2 E1 links and the secondary link is a satellite
one, see step 8

For system releases up to R7.0 inclusive, be sure that the infrastructure supports
asymmetric time slot allocation for Base Stations with dual site link configuration. If
not, time slots for both channels of the Base Station must be the same.
4 If MTS is connected to the infrastructure with 1 E1 link, PVC1 carried by timeslots X1, X2,...,
PVC2 carried by timeslots Y1, Y2,..., execute the following sequence of MMI commands, SC>:
.e1config -siteLink single
.e1config -DI off
.e1config -channel 1 -portNo 1
.e1config -channel 2 -portNo 1
.e1config -channel 1 -tsPattern X1 X2 ...
.e1config -channel 2 -tsPattern Y1 Y2 ...

Please note that timeslots assigned to both channels can be identical. Timeslot
pattern can be passed as a list of slot numbers separated with spaces. Several
consecutive timeslots can be also passed in the format X1:XN.
Examples:
.e1config -channel 1 -tsPattern 1:31
assigns all timeslots from 1 to 31 to channel 1
.e1config -channel 1 -tsPattern 1 2 10:15
assigns timeslots 1,2,10,11,12,13,14,15 to channel 1.
Continue with step 9.

8-30 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS - Configuring E1 Links

Procedure 8-12 MTS - How to Configure E1 Links (Continued)


5 If MTS is connected to the infrastructure with 2 E1 links, PVC1 carried by timeslots X1,X2,...,
PVC2 carried by timeslots Y1, Y2,..., execute the following sequence of MMI commands, SC>:
.e1config -siteLink dual
.e1config -DI off
.e1config -channel 1 -portNo 1
.e1config -channel 2 -portNo 2
.e1config -channel 1 -tsPattern X1 X2 ...
.e1config -channel 2 -tsPattern Y1 Y2 ...
Continue with step 9.
6 For up to 10 MTSs connected in the ring topology (i.e. Core Router 1 -----MTS1-----MTS2--
-....-----MTS10-----Core Router 2) execute the following commands on each MTS in the ring:
.e1config -siteLink dual
.e1config -DI on
.e1config -channel 1 -portNo 1
.e1config -channel 2 -portNo 2
.e1config -channel 1 -tsPattern X1 X2 ...
.e1config -channel 2 -tsPattern X1 X2 ...

Timeslots configured for each separate site in the ring should be different.
Continue with step 9.
7 For up to 10 MTSs connected in the line topology (i.e. Core Router 1 -----MTS1-----MTS2---....-
----MTS10(last)) use the following commands on all MTSs execpt for the last one:
.e1config -siteLink single
.e1config -DI on
.e1config -channel 1 -portNo 1
.e1config -channel 2 -portNo 2
.e1config -channel 1 -tsPattern X1 X2 ...
.e1config -channel 2 -tsPattern X1 X2 ...

Timeslots configured for each separate site in the line must be different.
Configure the last MTS in the chain as follows:
.e1config -siteLink single
.e1config -DI off
.e1config -channel 1 -portNo 1
.e1config -channel 1 -tsPattern Y1 Y2 ...

Continue with step 9.

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-31


MTS - Configuring Ethernet Site Link Chapter 8: Site Controller

Procedure 8-12 MTS - How to Configure E1 Links (Continued)


8 For 1 MTS connected to the infrastructure by 2 E1 links and the secondary link is a satellite
one:.e1config -siteLink dual.e1config -DI off.e1config -channel
1 -portNo 1.e1config -channel 2 -portNo 2.e1config -channel
1 -tsPattern X1 X2 ....e1config -channel 2 -tsPattern y1 y2
....e1config -link 1 -sat off.e1config -link 2 -sat on
where X1,X2,X3,.... - E1 time slots
Y1,Y2,Y3,.... - E1 time slots
Continue with step 9.

Configuration of satellite site link is also possible via TESS.


9 If the 16th timeslot on the E1 link should be allocated for signalling/synchronization according
to service provider specification, type .e1config -ts16skip on.
10 Type .e1config to verify that the new E1 configuration appears correctly below Next.
11 Type reset to reset the Site Controller and press Enter.
12 Type .e1config to verify that the new configuration has been set to Current.

MTS - Configuring Ethernet Site Link


The following configuration parameters are available for Base Station Ethernet links:
• Primary WAN Interface IP Address
• Primary WAN Interface IP Netmask
• Primary WAN Interface Gateway
• Primary WAN Interface VLAN ID
• Primary WAN Interface VLAN tagging
• Primary IP Tunnel Remote IP Address
• Primary IP Tunnel Fragmentation Size
• Green Color Map - Yellow Color Map
• CIR
• CBS
• EIR
• EBS
• Primary PVC IP Address
• Primary PVC Network Mask
• Secondary PVC IP address
• Secondary PVC Network Mask

8-32 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS - Configuring Ethernet Site Link

For description of parameters listed above and instruction on how to configure them
refer to the TETRA BTS Service Software (TESS) User Guide.
It is recommended to use TESS tool for configuration of Ethernet site link,
especially during upgrade or migration procedures.
Mentioned parameters can be also configured via .ethconf engineering command
on Site Controller MMI. For details, please refer to help that is delivered with
this command by typing .ethconf -?.
After all parameters are configured properly and configuration file is loaded to the MTS, Ethernet link
configuration can be inspected by executing .ethconf -STATUS command on the Site Controller MMI.
An example output produced by .ethconf -STATUS command is shown below:
Option Current Next
Ethernet Sitelink type Single Single
Primary Vlan Tagging on on
Primary WAN IP Address NOT SET * 10.10.10.1
Primary WAN IP Mask NOT SET * 255.255.255.0
Primary WAN Gateway NOT SET NOT SET
Primary WAN VLAN ID NOT SET NOT SET
Primary IP Tunnel Local Address NOT SET * 10.10.10.1
Primary IP Tunnel Remote Address NOT SET NOT SET
Primary IP Tunnel Fragmentation Size 339 339
Primary PVC IP Address 192.168.40.16 192.168.40.16
Primary PVC IP Mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Secondary PVC IP Address 192.168.41.17 192.168.41.17
Secondary PVC IP Mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Green Traffic Color Map 7,6,5,4,3,2,1,0 7,6,5,4,3,2,1,0
Yellow Traffic Color Map null null
QOS CIR [kbit] 512 512
QOS CBS [bytes] 361 361
QOS EIR [kbit] 0 0
QOS EBS [bytes] 0 0

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-33


MTS - Configuring Ethernet Site Link Chapter 8: Site Controller

The .ethconf -STATUS command displays two sets of settings for each parameter:
• Current: contains settings that were read from configuration file during startup
and are currently used by Base Station
• Next: contains settings that can take effect after reset of Base Station.

* displayed in front of a particular parameter indicates that its value has been
changed by the user via .ethconf command. Before Those settings can be used,
they need to be successfully validated and saved in TSC configuration file.
This process is triggered by executing .ethconf save command. If
configuration cannot be successfully saved, User shall be instructed how to handle
detected errors and warnings as illustrated in the example below:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
NOTE: Configuration cannot be saved due to errors or warnings below
------------------------------------------------------------------------
WARNING: Primary VLAN tagging shall be ON if primary WAN gateway is not set
ERROR: Primary WAN interface VLAN ID shall be 1-4095
ERROR: Primary IP tunnel remote address must be set
------------------------------------------------------------------------
All errors must be corrected before configuration can be saved
Warnings listed above indicate that configuration contains
non-standard settings which migh result in incorrect operation of Base Station
To save configuration without correcting warnings, please use
’.ethconf save -force’ command.

When the Next values are successfully validated and saved into configuration file they
shall take effect after reset of Base Station.

8-34 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS - Configuring CAN Bus

MTS - Configuring CAN Bus


Procedure 8-13 MTS - How to Configure CAN Bus

1 Log in to the Active Site Controller.


2 Use the following MMI command to view the mapping list:can check_mapping
See command example below:
SC> can check_mapping
Units are present:
Device Track ID
DPM 1 JTH0500101
PSU 1 JTH0500200
Units are not present:
DPM 2 JTH0500105
Track ID not mapped:
JTH0500102
Result: On the list, all the units will be indicated as Track ID not mapped.
3 Delete any units indicated as Units are not present from the CAN bus unit mapping
list. Use can remove_mapping <Device>, where <Device> is the unit name. See
example below:
SC> can remove_mapping dpm 2

Units not present should only be deleted if they are old mapped devices that have
been replaced.
4 Add all CAN bus units indicated as Track ID not mapped to the CAN bus unit mapping
list.

The unit Track ID is present on the unit label on the front panel.
Use can add_mapping <Device> <TrackID>, where <TrackID> is a TrackID of the
new unit and <Device> is the new unit name. Units have the following names: psu X, dpm X,
atcc X, where X denotes a digit between 0 and 3. See example below:
SC> can add_mapping dpm 2 JTH0500102
5 View the updated mapping list using the can check_mapping command and check that there
are no units labelled as Track ID not mapped or Units are not present.
6 Proceed to Procedure 8-14, "MTS - How to Configure the Cooling Fans," on page 8-36.

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-35


MTS - Configuring Cooling Fans Chapter 8: Site Controller

MTS - Configuring Cooling Fans

Procedure 8-14 needs to be repeated each time a Site Controller has been replaced.
Procedure 8-14 MTS - How to Configure the Cooling Fans

1 Make sure you are logged on to the Site Controller.


2 To get the current fan configuration, type psu 1 get fan_config and press Enter.
If applicable, repeat for PSU 2.
3 To set new fan configuration, use the psu # set fan_config command.
Examples:
psu 1 set fan_config 1 1 1 to define three fans present on PSU 1.
psu 2 set fan_config 0 0 0 to define no fans present on PSU 2.
4 If a redundant Site Controller is available in the system, repeat step 3 on the second Site
Controller while it is active.
5 Return to Process 8-1, "MTS – Replacing Site Controller," on page 8-20.

MTS - Loading Ki's Into MTS


Process 8-4 MTS - Loading Ki's Into MTS

1 Refresh Ki's. See "MTS - Refreshing Ki's for the MTS" on page 8-37.
2 Connect KVL to the AuC. See "MTS - Connecting KVL to the AuC" on page 8-37.
3 Download Ki's from AuC to KVL. Use local or remote connection. See:
• "MTS - Downloading Ki's from the AuC to KVL (Locally)" on page 8-38.
• "MTS - Downloading Ki's from the AuC to KVL (Remotely Using GSM)" on page 8-38.
4 Check the Inventory in KVL. See "MTS - Checking the Inventory in KVL".
5 Download Ki's from KVL to Site Controller/BRC. See "MTS - Downloading Ki's from KVL to
the Site Controller/BRC" on page 8-39.
6 Upload site receipts (locally or remotely). See
• "MTS - Uploading the Site Receipts (Locally)" on page 8-40
• "MTS - Uploading the Site Receipts (Remotely using GSM)" on page 8-40

8-36 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS - Refreshing Ki's for the MTS

MTS - Refreshing Ki's for the MTS


Procedure 8-15 MTS - How to Refresh Ki's for the MTS

1 On AuC open AuC Client and select Devices tab.


2 Find the relevant zone and site, select to highlight it. This shows that the CCK, AuC and Zone
KEK as not current.
3 Right-click the site and select Refresh Ki.
Result: The following message box appears:Operator must now upload the Ki to a
KVL and then proceed to refresh site controller 1 and 2 for this site.
Subsequently ACK information...
4 Click OK.
5 Continue to "MTS - Connecting KVL to the AuC" on page 8-37 to connect KVL to AuC.

MTS - Connecting KVL to the AuC


Procedure 8-16 MTS - How to Connect KVL to the AuC

1 Verify that the AuC and KVL both have the correct baud rate setting. When connecting either
locally or remotely ensure that it is set for 19200. When connecting remotely the GSM cell
phone will only negotiate at 9600 but the KVL will auto negotiate the link speed.
2 Check the baud rate of the KVL login to the KVL, scroll until CONFIG is displayed on the screen.
Select CONFIG then scroll until BAUDR is displayed. Select BAUDR and change to 19200.
3 If this is the first time the KVL has been connected to a Zone then CLEAR LIST in the KVL to
ensure that there will be no cross contamination of Zone receipts and that the receipt list is empty
and therefore capable of receiving more Ki’s:
• Log into the KVL at admin level.
• Select LIST from the display and then CLEAR.
• You are prompted for verification.
4 Once the LIST is cleared you can connect the KVL to the AuC using either local or remote
connectivity.
5 Depending on method you want to use, continue to:
• "MTS - Downloading Ki's from the AuC to KVL (Locally)" on page 8-38
• "MTS - Downloading Ki's from the AuC to KVL (Remotely Using GSM)" on page 8-38

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-37


MTS - Downloading Ki's from the AuC to KVL (Locally) Chapter 8: Site Controller

MTS - Downloading Ki's from the AuC to KVL (Locally)


Procedure 8-17 MTS - How to Download Locally Ki's from the AuC to KVL

1 On the AuC Client, select SYSTEM > PREFERENCES > PORTSETTINGS and then verify
the port configurations are set to local and 19200.
2 Using a null modem cable from the AuC COM port 1 to the KVL device select Au/Prc from the
KVL main menu, then DIRECT, then RS232.
3 The AuC event log will display successful connection from the KVL before allowing the
upload/download process to start.
Result: The KVL will collect the Ki’s from the AuC. Allow approximately one minute for the
process to complete.
4 Upon completion the AuC event log will display a success message and the KVL will also
acknowledge successful download by emitting an alternating hi/low tone and displaying message
Download Completed Successfully..
5 Press OK on KVL.
6 Continue to "MTS - Checking the Inventory in KVL" on page 8-39.

MTS - Downloading Ki's from the AuC to KVL (Remotely Using GSM)
Procedure 8-18 MTS - How to Download Ki's from the AuC to KVL (Remotely using GSM)

1 Contact the on site switch engineer and verify that the AuC is set for remote access.

This is carried out by going to the AuC Client select SYSTEM > SETTINGS and
then verify the port configurations are set to MODEM and 9600.
2 Connect GSM to KVL through modified adapter (Motorola phones only).
3 Contact the switch site and verify the telephone number needed to access the AuC.
4 On the KVL select Au/Prc from the main menu, then MODEM, then RS232.
5 At this point there will be a telephone number displayed. Edit this number as appropriate for the
Cluster Site you require, once the number is correct select ENTER and then DIAL.
6 If there is someone at the switch site then they can verify that the KVL connects to the AuC
correctly by monitoring the event log.
7 The KVL will collect the Ki’s from the AuC. The time taken will depend on the number of sites
assigned to the Zone and can take up to 3 minutes for a full zone.
8 Upon completion the AuC event log will display a success message and the KVL will also
acknowledge successful download by emitting an alternating hi/low tone. The call on the cell
phone will be dropped before this success tone is emitted.
9 Continue to "MTS - Checking the Inventory in KVL" on page 8-39.

8-38 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS - Checking the Inventory in KVL

MTS - Checking the Inventory in KVL


Procedure 8-19 MTS - How to Check the Inventory in KVL to Ensure Cor-
rect Information is Downloaded

1 On KVL select LIST, then VIEW. This information will show the sites than need Ki to be
uploaded.
2 If connecting the KVL locally to the AuC then disconnect and travel to site.
3 If connecting remotely to AuC then once the call has been dropped and the KVL displays a
successful download disconnect the KVL from the GSM.
4 Continue to "MTS - Downloading Ki's from KVL to the Site Controller/BRC" on page 8-39.

MTS - Downloading Ki's from KVL to the Site Controller/BRC

Remember to Ki redundant Site Controller as well as active. Only new/replaced BR should be Ki'd.
Procedure 8-20 MTS - How to Download Ki's from KVL to Site Controller/BRC

1 Connect to the Site Controller and log in as normal (Field).


2 Switch on the KVL.
3 Verify the BAUDR is set to 19200 by scrolling along to CONFIG > BAUDR and ensure it
is set to 19200.
4 On the SC type the command KVL and press Enter key.
5

Both: step 5 and step 6 have to be completed within 60 seconds.


Disconnect the PC from the Site Controller and connect the KVL to the Site Controller.
6 On the KVL, select UPDATE > SwMI > Ki.
7 The KVL will display UPDATING TARGET UNIT, followed by UPDATE WAS
SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED.
8 If the KVL displays TARGET UPDATE FAILURE then this could be due to the site ID being
different to that in the KVL, incorrect BAUDR settings or cable problems (check all).
9 Disconnect the KVL and connect the serial cable to the PC.
10 Remove the lead from the Site Controller and plug into the new BRC.
11 Log in to the new BRC as Motorola and type the command KVL.
12 Within 60 seconds disconnect the test lead from the PC and plug into the KVL device and repeat
step 6 through step 9.
13 Upon completion of downloading Ki's to new BRC’s, reconnect PC to the Site Controller and
enter reset to reset the Site Controller.

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-39


MTS - Uploading the Site Receipts (Locally) Chapter 8: Site Controller

Procedure 8-20 MTS - How to Download Ki's from KVL to Site Controller/BRC (Continued)
14 Check if the MTS is in correct security class. Login to the Site Controller, and then enter
status sec and status keys commands.

If a base station is not supporting the correct security class (2 or 3) reset the Site
Controller and repeat this step.
15 Check MTS returns to Wide Area Trunking and that no alarms are active.
16 Upload the site receipts. Depending on method you want to use, continue to:
• "MTS - Uploading the Site Receipts (Locally)" on page 8-40
• "MTS - Uploading the Site Receipts (Remotely using GSM)" on page 8-40

MTS - Uploading the Site Receipts (Locally)


Procedure 8-21 MTS - How to Upload the Site Receipts (Locally)

1 If no GSM connectivity is available then disconnect equipment and travel to switch site.
2 Using a null modem cable from the AuC COM port 1 to the KVL device select Au/Prc from the
KVL main menu, then DIRECT, then RS232.
Result: The AuC event log will display successful connection from the KVL before allowing
the upload/download process to start.
3 The KVL will both send the Site Ki receipts to the AuC automatically.
4 Allow approximately one minute for the process to complete.
5 Upon completion the AuC event log will display a success message and the KVL will also
acknowledge successful download by emitting an alternating hi/low tone and displaying message
Download Successfully Completed..
6 Press OK button on KVL.
7 Check on KVL that site is no longer listed by selecting List and then View.
8 Check on AuC that icon for site is now green and no errors are reported in the event window
for the site.

MTS - Uploading the Site Receipts (Remotely using GSM)


Procedure 8-22 MTS - How to Upload the Site Receipts (Remotely Using GSM)

1 If GSM connectivity is available then log in to KVL device.


2 Connect GSM to KVL through modified adapter (Motorola phones only).
3 On the KVL select Au/PrC from the main menu, then MODEM, then RS232.

8-40 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS - Site Controller Post-Restoration Checks

Procedure 8-22 MTS - How to Upload the Site Receipts (Remotely Using GSM) (Continued)
4 At this point there will be a telephone number displayed. Edit this number as appropriate for the
Cluster Site you require, once the number is correct select ENTER and then DIAL.
5 If there is someone at the switch site then they can verify that the KVL connects to the AuC
correctly by monitoring the event log.
6 Allow approximately one minute for the process to complete.
7 Upon completion the AuC event log will display a success message and the KVL will also
acknowledge successful download by emitting an alternating hi/low tone. The call on the cell
phone will be dropped before this success tone is emitted.
8 Check on AuC that icon for site is now green and no errors are reported in the event window
for the site.
9 Check on KVL that site is no longer listed by selecting List and then View.

MTS - Site Controller Post-Restoration Checks


Table 8-10 MTS - Site Controller Post-Restoration Checks

Action Post-Restoration Checks


MTS restoration - Ensure no alarms are present on MTS.
Restoring the Site
Open Zone Watch and check if site's icon is green.
Controller
Perform tests as described in "MTS - Site Controller Post - Restoration
Checks".
Make a test call with radio registered on this site and check that radio can
be heard on console. Check on Zone Watch that call is allocated to traffic
channel on the MTS.

MTS - Site Controller Post - Restoration Checks


Process 8-5 MTS - Site Controller Post - Restoration Checks

1 Test E1 connection. See "MTS - E1 Connection Test" on page 8-42.


2 Test X.21 connection. See "MTS - X.21 Connection Test".
3 Test Internal GPS module. See "MTS - Internal GPS Module Test", or test External GPS
module. See "MTS - External GPS Module Test".

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-41


MTS - E1 Connection Test Chapter 8: Site Controller

MTS - E1 Connection Test


The E1 tests the connection between the Site Controller and the CNE core router. All applications
that communicate with the CNE utilize the Internet Protocol (IP). The current state and statistics
for IP may be obtained using the netstat and netstat -s commands. The correct functioning of the
IP layer may be determined through careful use of the ping command.
To test the E1 connection, use the e1el command in the Site Controller Test Application.

MTS - X.21 Connection Test


The X.21 connection test requires the Site Controller to be connected to a Network Terminating
Unit (NTU) which supports the X.21 loop 3 command.
To test the X.21 connection, use the e1el command in the Site Controller Test Application.

MTS - Internal GPS Module Test


The GPS module generates a highly accurate timing reference signal within the Base Station. To do this a
proper GPS signal must be provided to the QMA input connector on the Site Controller Front Panel. The SC
provides a +5V dc bias voltage on the QMA connector. It is intended to be used as bias for active antennas.
Procedure 8-23 MTS - Site Controller - How to Verify the Internal GPS Module

1 A valid GPS signal must be provided to the QMA connector on the SC Front Panel.
2 Login to the Site Controller Application MMI.
3 To view the type and current status of internal GPS module, use the command:
status sri -gps. See the example response below - a report is printed that shows the
status of the GPS receiver:
Result: A report is printed that shows the status of the GPS receiver:
GPSR Type : INTERNAL
GPSR Model : GSCi4xxx
Software Ver : 225
Manufacture Data : Unknown
GPSR Antenna Status : CONNECTED
GPS Satellite Tracking : OK
GPS State : GPS 3D FIX
GPS Satellites Visible : 12
GPS Satellites Tracked : 9
GPS Date & Time : Thu Feb 21 09:17:36 2008
PDOP Status : GOOD
PDOP Value : 1.6
RAIM Protection is : Disabled
Latitude : N 50 deg 1 min 57.728 sec
Longitude : E 19 deg 56 min 21.808 sec
Altitude(Meters above GPS Ellipsoid) : 296.69

Detailed Satellite Status:

SatID Mode Flags C/N Ratio (dB-Hz)


-----------------------------------------
6 8 0x00 43
19 0 0x00 49
25 8 0x00 35
16 8 0x00 49

8-42 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual MTS - Internal GPS Module Test

Procedure 8-23 MTS - Site Controller - How to Verify the Internal GPS Module (Continued)

3 8 0x00 48
15 8 0x00 39
21 8 0x00 48
18 8 0x00 50
29 0 0x00 18
8 0 0x00 43
27 3 0x00 34
22 8 0x00 54
4 To view the current status of GPS synchronization, use the command: :
status sri
See the example response below:
Result:
Site Reference Operating OK : YES
Site Reference State : MAINTAIN PHASE LOCK
Site Reference Configuration : ASC
Site Reference 1 PPS Input Status : VALID
GPS Operating OK : YES
GPS State : GPS 3D FIX
GPS Satellites Tracked : 8
Sync Free Run Available (Minutes) : 240
Unsync Free Run Available(Days Hours Mins) : 2879 17 47
Last Calibration Date Time : Wed Oct 31 03:36:23 2007
Calibration Due Date Time : Thu Oct 29 03:36:23 2015
GPS Time : Wed Oct 31 09:49:34 2007
UTC Time : Wed Oct 31 09:49:20 2007
Local Time : Wed Oct 31 11:49:20 2007
UTC Time Mode : YES
TETRA Slot : H62507 M27 F2 S2
Synchronised : YES

Depending on the signal level on the GPS input, the GPS module may re-
quire several minutes to obtain lock.

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-43


MTS - External GPS Module Test Chapter 8: Site Controller

MTS - External GPS Module Test


Procedure 8-24 explains the verification steps for MTS connected to external GPS antenna.
Procedure 8-24 MTS - Site Controller - How to Verify the External GPS

1 A valid GPS signal must be provided to the QMA connector on the SC Front Panel.
2 Login to the Site Controller Application MMI.
3 To view the type and current status of external GPS module, use the command:
status sri -gps. See the example response below - a report is printed that shows the
status of the GPS receiver:
Result: A report is printed that shows the status of the GPS receiver:
GPSR Type : EXTERNAL
Cable Delay Setting (nS) : 0
Self Test Status : AVAILABLE
GPSR Model : P273T12T17
Software Ver : 2
Manufacture Data : 5J20
GPSR Antenna Status : CONNECTED
GPS Satellite Tracking : OK
GPS State : GPS POSITION HOLD
GPS Satellites Visible : 9
GPS Satellites Tracked : 5
GPS Date & Time : Thu Nov 1 11:53:07 2007
PDOP Status : Not Applicable - Pos'n Hold
PDOP Value : 0.0
RAIM Protection is : Disabled
Latitude : N 50 deg 1 min 57.232 sec
Longitude : E 19 deg 56 min 23.440 sec
Altitude(Meters above GPS Ellipsoid) : 326.46
Detailed Satellite Status:
SatID Mode Flags C/N Ratio (dB-Hz)
-----------------------------------------
5 8 0x00 44
12 8 0x00 32
30 5 0x00 29
2 8 0x00 36
6 0 0x00 0
0 0 0x00 0
0 0 0x00 0
0 0 0x00 0
1 0 0x00 0
7 0 0x00 0
31 0 0x00 0
24 8 0x00 34

8-44 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Adding Redundant Site Controller

Procedure 8-24 MTS - Site Controller - How to Verify the External GPS (Continued)
4 To view the current status of GPS synchronization, use the command: :
status sri
See the example response below - a report is printed that shows the status of the GPS
synchronization:
Result:
Site Reference Operating OK : YES
Site Reference State : MAINTAIN PHASE LOCK
Site Reference Configuration : ASC
Site Reference 1 PPS Input Status : VALID
GPS Operating OK : YES
GPS State : GPS POSITION HOLD
GPS Satellites Tracked : 5
Sync Free Run Available (Minutes) : 240
Unsync Free Run Available (Days Hours Mins) : 2879 23 38
Last Calibration Date Time : Thu Nov 1 11:31:42 2007
Calibration Due Date Time : Fri Oct 30 11:31:42 2015
GPS Time : Thu Nov 1 11:53:16 2007
UTC Time : Thu Nov 1 11:53:01 2007
Local Time : Thu Nov 1 11:53:01 2007
UTC Time Mode : YES
TETRA Slot : H64040 M29 F8 S4
Synchronised : YES

Depending on the signal level on the GPS input, the GPS module may re-
quire several minutes to obtain lock.

Adding Redundant Site Controller


This section describes how to add an additional (redundant) Site Controller to MTS 4. In order to be
able to add a redundant Site Controller, two module cages must be present in the MTS 4.

If a redundant Site Controller is added to an MTS with an expansion cabinet,


a redundant XHUB must also be added.

Redundant Site Controller feature is supported on releases:


• R6.0_001.12, MTS 05
• R5.2_002.34, MTS 10
and later.

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-45


List of Equipment in the Expansion Kit Chapter 8: Site Controller

List of Equipment in the Expansion Kit


When ordering an additional Site Controller, the following is included in the expansion kit.
Table 8-11 Equipment in Expansion Kit

Kit number Description Notes


GMCN4729A Site Controller hardware kit

How to Install
This section described how to install and configure an additional Site Controller, gaining
Redundant Site Controller functionality.

You must be familiar with Man-Machine Interface (MMI) commands and their
usage prior to performing procedures in this chapter. Improperly applying
MMI commands can result in equipment damage.

You must disable Black Ice or any other Firewall application before attempting to transfer files.
The MTS Site Controller has the following modes of operation:
• BOOT1 - to access this mode interrupt the booting process by pressing Escape
key or Control+C combination when appropriate message is shown. A
password may be required to enter this mode.
• Test Application - to access this mode enter the testapp command when in BOOT1
mode. To go back to normal Site Controller Application enter reset -oplatform
command to reboot and resume normal operation.
• Site Controller Application - if the boot process is not interrupted, this
is the default mode of operation.

When adding an additional (redundant) Site Controller there will be some service
downtime while making physical modifications.
Process 8-6 Adding Redundant Site CONTROLLER

1 Back up the Site Controller configuration of the existing Site Controller, See Process 8-2, "MTS
- Configuration Backup," on page 8-20.

This assumes that the existing Site Controller is properly configured and in service.
2 Add second Site Controller, see Procedure 8-25, "Add Additional Site CONTROLLER," on
page 8-47 below.

8-46 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual How to Install

Process 8-6 Adding Redundant Site CONTROLLER (Continued)


3 Restore the Site Controller Software on the second Site Controller, see Process 8-3, "MTS -
Restoring the Site Controller Software," on page 8-24.
4 Configure E1 Links on the second Site Controller, see Procedure 8-12, "MTS - How to Configure
E1 Links," on page 8-30.
5 Configure CAN Bus on the second Site Controller, seeProcedure 8-13, "MTS - How to Configure
CAN Bus," on page 8-35.
6 Load Ki’s into MTS. See Process 8-4, "MTS - Loading Ki's Into MTS," on page 8-36.
7 Check the MTS post-restoration checks. See Table 8-10, "MTS - Site Controller Post-Restoration
Checks," on page 8-41.

When adding a second Site Controller it will automatically become standby, meaning
that performance of the Site Controller post-restoration checks will not be possible.
In order to perform a Site Controller Post-restoration check on the second Site
Controller, the first Site Controller needs to be reset allowing the second Site
Controller to become active leading to interruption of service for several seconds.
8 Configure Redundant Site Controller feature. See Process 8-7 below.

Procedure 8-25 Add Additional Site CONTROLLER

1 Wear an ESD strap and connect its cable to a verified good ground. This strap must be worn
to prevent ESD damage to any components.
2 Remove the Site Controller Blind Plate.
3 Label the cables with labels included in the expansion kit.
4 Connect the Ethernet cables to the Base Radio(s) according to the scheme below:
Part number Cable type From To
3066544B02 Ethernet cable SC2 / BR4 BR4 / SC2
3066544B15 Ethernet cable SC2 / BR1 BR1 / SC2
3066544B16 Ethernet cable SC2 / BR2 BR2 / SC2
3066544B01 Ethernet cable SC2 / BR3 BR3 / SC2

At this stage only connect the cables to the Base Radios


5 Strap the cables.
Connect RF cable 3066543B10 to the GPS2 connector on the Junction Panel and let it hang.
Catch the cable in the empty space where the Site Controller is to be assembled and temporarily
fix it at the front.

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-47


How to Install Chapter 8: Site Controller

Procedure 8-25 Add Additional Site CONTROLLER (Continued)


6 Install the Site Controller. Use the handle to slide the unit into the chassis.

Connect the ribbon cables at the rear before sliding the unit into the chassis. Be
careful not to damage the cables when sliding the Site Controller into place.
7 Secure the Site Controller in the chassis with two M4X10 captive screws.
8 Connect the Ethernet cables previously attached to the Base Radio(s) to the Site Controller. Also
connect the newly added Site Controller to the junction panel according to the scheme below:
Part number Cable type From To
3066543B10 RF Cable Junction Panel / E1 Y splitter
3066560B01 Y splitter SC1 / E1
3066567B02 Y splitter SC2 / E1

9 Connect RF cable 3066543B10 to GPS connector.


10 Connect the redundant control signal cable according to the scheme below:
Part number Cable type From To
3066544B17 Redundant CTRL SC1 / RedIn SC2 / RedOut
signal cable
3066544B17 Redundant CTRL SC1 / RedOut SC2 / RedIn
signal cable

Make sure to follow the color indications on both the cables as well as on the Site
CONTROLLER.
11 Remove the Terminator from the CAN2 output on the Power Supply Unit and connect the CAN
Bus cable according to the scheme below:
Part number Cable type From To
3066544B03 CAN Bus cable SC2 / CAN PSU2 / CAN2

12 Connect the power cables to the MTS Power Supply Unit.

8-48 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Configuring Redundant Site Controller

Configuring Redundant Site Controller

Redundant Site Controller feature is supported by MTS Software releases:


• MTS SPU R5.2_002.34 or later
• MTS SPU R6.0_001.12 or later
On power up of the Standby Site Controller the Base Radios may dekey and reset. Base
Radios will automatically recover and key up again within 20 seconds.
Process 8-7 How to Configure Redundant Site Controllers

1 Perform Site Controller Hardware Pre-Checks, as described in Procedure 8-26, "Site Controller
Hardware Pre-Checks," on page 8-49.
2 Configure the Site Controller Configuration Files, see Procedure 8-27, "Site Controller
Configuration Files," on page 8-49.
3 Configure Ethernet ports connecting the two Site Controllers, as described in Procedure 8-28,
"How to Configure Ethernet Ports," on page 8-50.
4 Configure the ID values of the Site Controllers, see Procedure 8-29, "How to Configure SC
IDs," on page 8-51.

Procedure 8-26 Site Controller Hardware Pre-Checks

1 Ensure that both SCs are correctly installed and are running identical software applications,
Boot images and configuration files.
2 In order for the Redundant Site Controller feature to work correctly, the Site Controller and
BR Boot1 version must be:
• TSC_RLJ_BOOT1–R06.40.07 or later for Site Controller.
• BRC_RLJ_BOOT1–R06.40.05 or later for Base Radio.

The Boot1 version can be checked on the Site Controller and BRs by using the ver
command on both the Site Controller and on the Base Radio.
3 Check that the redundant Site Controller Ethernet Link cables are connected correctly, as shown
in Figure 5–6.
4 Proceed to Procedure 8-27 below.

Procedure 8-27 Site Controller Configuration Files

In order to check that the Site Controller configuration files have the Standby Site
Controller Installed parameter enabled, follow the steps below.

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-49


Configuring Redundant Site Controller Chapter 8: Site Controller

Procedure 8-27 Site Controller Configuration Files (Continued)

1 Log onto the Site Controller Application MMI.


2 From the SC: prompt, run the command display config.
3 Check the output of the configuration and confirm if the Standby SC parameter is enabled or not.
4 If no Standby Site Controller is enabled, upload the Active Site Controller configuration file.
5 Modify the configuration file in TESS to enable Standby Site Controller.
6 Download the new configuration file to the InActive Bank (set to use as next after reset).
7 Reset the Site Controller.
8 Confirm the configuration is correct.

Remember to check the configuration of both Site Controllers.


In order for the Redundant Site Controller feature to work correctly, the Ethernet ports used
to connect the two Site Controllers need to be specifically configured. The correct IP address
for each Site Controller must be as specified below.
Site Controller 1 (SC1)
• eth0: 10.0.253.1
• eth1: 10.0.254.1

Site Controller 2 (SC2)


• eth0: 10.0.254.2
• eth1: 10.0.253.2

Procedure 8-28 How to Configure Ethernet Ports

1 Reset the Site Controller and press the Esc key when prompted to interrupt the startup sequence.
2 From the prompt, run the command spr inet/if/eth0.
3 From the prompt, run the command spr inet/if/eth1.
4 Take note of the IP addresses and the MAC addresses.

If the IP addresses are set correctly (as stated in lists prior to this procedure),
continue to Step 7 below.
If the IP addresses are set incorrectly, they must be changed as follows in the next
step.

8-50 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Configuring Redundant Site Controller

Procedure 8-28 How to Configure Ethernet Ports (Continued)


5 From the prompt, run the command spw inet/if/eth0 “dhcp:no
addr:10.0.(252+X).X mask:255.255.255.0 dev_name:tsec dev_unit:0
ethaddr: yy:yy:yy:yy:yy:yy mtu:1500”

• There is one space between the ethaddr: and the


yy:yy:yy:yy:yy:yy in the command above.
• X = 1 for SC1, and 2 for SC2
• yy:yy:yy:yy:yy:yy = the MAC address of the interface. Note that
eth0 and eth1 have different MAC addresses.
6 From the prompt, run the command spw inet/if/eth1 “dhcp:no
addr:10.0.(255–X).X mask:255.255.255.0 dev_name:tsec1 dev_unit:1
ethaddr: yy:yy:yy:yy:yy:yy mtu:1500”

• There is one space between the ethaddr: and the


yy:yy:yy:yy:yy:yy in the command above.
• X = 1 for SC1, and 2 for SC2
• yy:yy:yy:yy:yy:yy = the MAC address of the interface. Note that
eth0 and eth1 have different MAC addresses.
7

Remember to check the IP settings on both SCs.

For an MTS using a single Site Controller, the Ethernet settings should be checked
using the ifconfig -a command from the SC application prompt. From the
output, confirm that the eth0 and eth1 ports are configured as expected. See Procedure
below for more information on how to set SC IDs.
Procedure 8-29 How to Configure SC IDs

The SCs must have different ID values configured. To check the SC id, follow the steps below.
1 Log onto the Site Controller Application MMI.
2 From the SC: prompt, run the command id.
3 An id value of either A or B is displayed.
4 Perform the same check on the second Site Controller.

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-51


MTS – Site Controller Software Version Check Chapter 8: Site Controller

Procedure 8-29 How to Configure SC IDs (Continued)


5 If the IDs are the same, one of the ID values have to be changed. To do so, log onto the Site
Controller Application MMI.

It does not matter if it is the ID value of SC1 or SC2 that is changed, as long as they
do not have the same ID value.
6 From the SC: prompt, run the command id x where x can be either A or B. Make sure to define
a value different for the two SCs.
7 Reset the Site Controller.

MTS – Site Controller Software Version Check


The MTS Site Controller should be loaded with the software provided on the MTS CD.
Versions later than the Baseline versions can be used. Please refer to the MTS Service Pack
Bulletin for version information and further details.
The Site Controller applications can be downloaded through SWDL Manager, but the
Test Application must be upgraded locally on site.

Verifying Test Application Version


Test Application version is verified from Boot1 mode. While in Boot1 mode, enter Test App
mode by using the following command: SC> testapp.
The version should be displayed in the startup text as exemplified below.
Transferring control to image entrypoint at 0x8064.

Motorola Inc. – Copyright 2006

Platform Test Application Version=TSC_RLJ_TESTAPP-E06.40.06

If Test Application version number is not displayed in the startup text, follow the step below.
At the factory prompt, use the following command: fv –oplatform.
The current Test App software version is displayed in the first line of the output, as in example below:
Test Application Version =TSC_RLJ_TESTAPP-E06.40.06
OS Version =OSE 4.5.2
Core Software Ver=TSC_RLJ_PLAT_27_SEP_06

Enter reset –oplatform to reset the Site Controller.

8-52 6802800U74-T January 2011


MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4 Installation, Configuration and Basic Service Manual Upgrading Test Application

The reset –oplatform command is not supported for older Test Application versions. Instead
press and hold the Reset button for a few seconds until all LEDs on the Site Controller lights up.

Upgrading Test Application


Perform Procedure 8-30 in order to upgrade the Test Application.
Procedure 8-30 How to Upgrade the Site Controller Test Application

1 Open 3 COM server application and configure it to point to the folder containing the Test
Application software.
2 Connect a RJ45 cable to the serial port on the PC and to the Service port on the Site Controller.
3 Connect a crossover Ethernet cable to the PC and to the Red In port on the Site Controller.
4 Reset the Site Controller and enter boot1 mode.
5 Type ferase 0xff780000 4M and press Enter.
6 When prompt returns type finstall TA /tftp/10.0.253.100/R064009ROM.hex
and press Enter.

The R064009ROM.hex stated in the command above is used just as an example. If


newer version exist, use this when executing the command.
7 When the file transfer has finished and the prompt appears reset the Site Controller.

6802800U74-T January 2011 8-53


Upgrading Test Application Chapter 8: Site Controller

This page intentionally left blank.

8-54 6802800U74-T January 2011


Chapter

9
XHUB Controller
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

The content of this chapter is only supported in Dimetra IP system releases D6.0 and later.
This chapter covers the following topics:
• "XHUB Controller – Theory of Operation"
• "XHUB Controller – Indicators, Switches, and Connectors"

Figure 9-1 XHUB Controller

6802800U74-T January 2011 9-1


XHUB Controller – Theory of Operation Chapter 9: XHUB Controller

XHUB Controller – Theory of Operation


■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

MTS 4 sites equipped with Site Controller Rev A or B may experience service interruption
to Base Radio(s) located in the Expansion Cabinet. Prior to Expansion Cabinet
installation, Site Controllers of Rev A or B must be sent to factory for FPGA upgrade
or replacement. Please see TIB 3592 for more information.
The eXpansion HUB (XHUB Controller) is a non-intelligent switching and interface module which plugs
into the Site Controller slot of MTS 4 Expansion Cabinet. With the usage of an Expansion Cabinet and an
XHUB, a station can be increased by a number of four Base Radios. The XHUB receive the CP3 interface
from the Site Controller in the Prime Cabinet, distribute the Enternet and timing as CP2 links to the Base
Radios